Home

R&S FSW-K7 Analog Demodulation User Manual

Contents

1. eet 299 DISPlay WINDOow n SIZE sss nennen nnne trennen nnnss ihn rts set nns siat nnns ennt sse n nnns nena 275 DiSblavlWiNDow cnzlTRACev GbPACmng eene enne nnne nn nnns enirn sehn rnt seen rnt nnn nn 233 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe Y SCALe ES DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACE Y SCALe AUTO ONE 232 DISPlayWINDow n TRACe Y SCALe MODE ettet 232 DISPlayWINDow n TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel ettet ttt 228 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet ttt 228 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe Y SCALe RPOSition stt DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe RPOSition DISPlayWINDow n TRACe Y SCALe RVALue ttt DISPlayWINDow n TRACe Y SCALe RVALue ttt DiSblautWINDowenslTRACests MODE nasaat nrasane nasaat annsanta nnan DISPlayWINDow n TRACe t MODE HCONIinuous ttt 264 DiSblautWiNDowenslTRAtCests SElLect ttt ttt ttt otl DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt STATE DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM AREA s csssssssssssssessssssesssssvesssssessssissssssessssseessssssssssiessssseessssteesssseessaseessen DISPlay WINDow n ZOOM MUL Tiple zoom AREA ettet 323 DISPlay WINDow n ZOOM MULTiple zoom STATe ettet 324 DISPlay WINDow n ZOOM STATe ett ttt ttt tto 323 AAN E A 205 FORMat DEXPort DSEParat
2. ssssss 325 cy MM 104 Remote commands Basics on syntax Boolean values ae Capitalization 2 5 0 dee eters rer reet ieu ee Character data serao 2 o rere terne rte Data blocks Numeric values ener erret nni Obsolet amp inrer ront ri enean Optional keywords GH Parameters sirisser ininda i iaaii SINGS EE Gut Res BW SOKOV nieder eee e Ur gei ere ees 102 Resetting RF input protection sss 33 177 ResidualM iiit irri Yee EE 28 Resolution bandwidth See RBW 102 Restoring Channel Settings cnino eee 54 Standard files rrr tte 53 Result Display ciere eee ose Reines 12 Result displays Marker table 5 rrr rri 24 Peak liSt tron ener ente 25 Result frequency External generator A 77 RESUS ssi Analyzing Data format remote ssssssssss 283 285 ET WEE 131 Retrieving remote control vg Stabilit CE 31 Updating the display sess 104 Updating the display remote 325 Result Summary Demodulation spectrum sssssssses 110 Evaluation method Retrieving values remote Reverse sweep External generator esses 45 77 RF Offline Gier 97 RF attenuation Auto SOKOV e critt Anite indent dee 87 Manual softkey
3. sssssusss 45 T TCP IP Address External generator n serrer 74 External generator eene 74 THD x Querying remote seen 288 Troubleshooting rte een eter 164 hr cem 120 Threshold MINIM OSs s erre trennen i ners 149 Time domain zoom Time per division Time per division Displayed E 14 OH KENG eras erdt ee 108 Time trigger clc dese geesde ge dg EENS 97 Total harmonic distortion see Ne EE 23 Traces AVETAQE ue 129 Averaging remote control seessssss 267 Configuration softkey a Configuring remote control esssssss 263 pri Detector remote control Ss Ss Export Ormai rite Renee er nte denge deron M Hold 129 MOOG 128 Mode remote Remote control gg Retrieving results remote sssusss 281 Settings predefined sss Settings remote control aie ken E Traces to be Checked Ballet 146 Tracking see External generator eee 76 Transducers Calibration with external generator 42 79 Transmission measurement Calibration external generator 78 External generator eret 37 Trigger Biel Del TEE Drop out time Power sensor Se External remote AA External DOWOLF ertet eer
4. 289 e Reference ASCII File Export Format 290 Retrieving Trace Results The following remote commands are required to retrieve the trace results in a remote environment ISENSeIADEMod AMtABSolutelt TDOMaintRESup ns 282 ISENGeJADE Mod AM REL attvel TDOMainl RE Gul 282 ISGENGeJADEMod AM REL ative AF Gbechum RESu n 282 ISENSeIADEMod EMTDOMaint RESup cec tenentes 282 SENSe ADEMGd FM AFSPectrum RESUlt 2 2 ene tuiaaco aa dnan 282 ISENSeIADEMod PMETDOMaint RESu centena 282 SENSeJADEMod PM AFSPectrum RESullt c c c cccetensesuassaennecccenaaedsaneeacenensacdenddeenaae 282 SENSe JADEMod SPECtrum RESUIt eriein aaaea aaka annaua kaaa aaa 282 EO SIDE EA EE 283 Tego DATA i raid rea trabes Douai Diano sa tuba tad dd 283 User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 281 R amp S FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements Retrieving Results SENSe JADEMod AM ABSolute TDOMain RESuIt SENSe ADEMod AM RELative TDOMain RESuIt SENSe JADEMod AM RELative AFSPectrum RESult SENSe JADEMod FM TDOMain RESult SENSe JADEMod FM AFSPectrum RESult SENSe JADEMod PM TDOMain RESult SENSe JADEMod PM AFSPectrum RESult SENSe JADEMod SPECtrum RESult lt TraceMode gt This command reads the result data of the evaluated signal in the specified trace mode The data format of the output data block is defined by the FORMat command see FORMat DATA on page 283 The trace results are c
5. T Hn e AF Filters lowpass Highpass Deemphasis Weighting e Scaling for Spectrum Ref Value Deviation e Scaling for Time Domain Ref Value AF Coupling FM PM only Table 1 1 List of predefined standards and settings Setting AM Broadcast FM Narrowband FM Broadcast Frequency Set None Default tling Demod band 100 kHz 100 kHz 400 kHz 5 MHz 5 MHz width Aquisition time 100 ms 100 ms 100 ms 10 ms 62 5 us Input coupling AC AC AC AC Squelch level 30 dBm 20 dBm Windows RF Spectrum AM Time Domain AM Spectrum Result Summary RF Spectrum FM Time Domain FM Spectrum Result Summary RF Spectrum FM Time Domain FM Spectrum Result Summary FM Time Domain RF Time Domain FM Time Domain Result Summary AF filter High pass AF filter Low 15 kHz 3 kHz 150 kHz pass RF Spectrum Span 50 kHz 25 kHz 400 kHz AM FM Time Domain Time domain 10 ms 10 ms 10 ms zoom Dev per division 1 kHz 20 kHz 100 kHz 50 kHz AM FM Spectrum Start freq 0 Hz 0 Hz 0 Hz Stop freq 15 kHz 5 kHz 63 33 kHz Ref value 5 kHz 75 kHz The Frequency Settling scenario requires a manually defined trigger User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 332 R amp S FSW K7 UO Data File Format iq tar B UO Data
6. eese eene enne nnne nnne tenen nnne nnns 328 Introduction Commands are program messages that a controller e g a PC sends to the instrument or software They operate its functions setting Commande or events and request infor EET RU NN User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 166 R amp S9FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements 11 1 1 Introduction mation query commands Some commands can only be used in one way others work in two ways setting and query If not indicated otherwise the commands can be used for settings and queries The syntax of a SCPI command consists of a header and in most cases one or more parameters To use a command as a query you have to append a question mark after the last header element even if the command contains a parameter A header contains one or more keywords separated by a colon Header and parameters are separated by a white space ASCII code 0 to 9 11 to 32 decimal e g blank If there is more than one parameter for a command these are separated by a comma from one another Only the most important characteristics that you need to know when working with SCPI commands are described here For a more complete description refer to the User Manual of the R amp S FSW Remote command examples Note that some remote command examples mentioned in this general introduction may not be supported by this particular application Conventions used
7. ecce 265 SENSe ADEMod AM RE Lative TDOMain TYPE 265 SENSe ADEMod AM RELative AFSPectrum TYPE eese 265 SENSe JADEMod FM TDOMain TYPE eccentric 265 SEENEN 265 ISENSeIADEMod PMETDOMainltTEEL ttt ttes 265 SENSeJADEMod PM AFSPectrumETY PE 00i ccs ccedencectivescsesessezedevertnavendceadeeaiaadaeetaaes 266 SENSe JADEMod SPECtrum TYPE eccentric 266 SENSe JAVERagGE COUNT 2 ect eap o bae ehe M pa dee dti nie te nta oodd reads 267 IGENZGelAVERage nzJ TAfectzl ener rtr rrr nh tenete nns 267 SENS amp AVERagesn s TYPE EE 267 SENSe WINDow DETector lt trace gt L FUNCHON nnn 268 ISENGe IiuINDow DE TechorziracezfEUNCHontAUTO n 269 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE Mode This command selects the trace mode User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 263 R amp S FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements REESEN Configuring the Measurement In case of max hold min hold or average trace mode you can set the number of single measurements with SENSe SWEep COUNt Note that synchronization to the end of the measurement is possible only in single sweep mode In the Analog Demodulation application when you configure the traces for a window with a specific evaluation e g AM time domain the traces in all windows with the same evaluation are configured identically Parameters Mode WRITe Overwrite mode t
8. ssss 69 Digital Baseband Interface B17 Input settings niece 67 Input status remote ssssssssssssssssss 197 Digital UO Input connection information sssssssss 69 Input settings er toes 67 Ene EE 96 Digital input Connection information esee 69 Digital standards ele De EE 51 VSA measurement 00 000 eee cee cece eeeneeeeeneeeeeeaees 51 Display configuration GU 105 Drop out time Urs ee 98 Trigger Power sensor sese 85 Duplicating Measurement channel remote 172 Duty cycle POWer SONSOM iiie nr pr eene iine pea 84 E Electronic input attenuation ssessssssss 87 88 Errors External generator een 45 lxsjBrecc Rm 86 90 Evaluation Data DASIS M 15 Mu rcm 15 Evaluation methods jm 276 Example Remote control of an external generator 221 Examples Ixeriote control nce ttr rena 328 Export format MACOS A 290 Exporting Data 153 FUNCOMS E M 152 et iere enne 152 153 333 337 UO data remote sese 326 Measurement settings 3 191 Peak Jr 145 iic M MM 152 UC 131 132 153 External generator Activating Deactivating
9. 43 76 Settings EEN Auto Scalig c ceret tede ct 118 126 AM Spectrum AUTO SENGS EE 125 Evaluation method sse 18 Meastime Auto softkey AM Time Domain Meastime Manual softkey Evaluation method cee eeeceeeeee testes eeneeeeneee 15 AUX control Analog Baseband TTL synchronization external generator 36 Amplitude settings EEN 89 Average Count tette 105 130 Input seee Power sensor ssseste ettet tette 84 Input settings Average mode Analog Baseband B71 re RTT 129 Fullscale level 5 e ostro roter itte te 91 Averaging VQ mode iesin TO Traces remote control ssssssssss 267 Input type remote control ssseeeees 195 A weighted filter AF fe 8 t iere dp aea aa edet 114 User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 347 R amp S9FSW K7 Index B Band Conversion loss table B21 sssssssss 66 External Mixer B21 remote control 183 External Mixer B21 Bandwidth settings sssssssee BB Power Trigger softkey iscrio natia 96 Bias Conversion loss table B21 External Mixer B21 remote control External Mixer B21 sss C Calibration External generator A External generator remote Normalization external generator 79 Reference trace external gen
10. For most modes the number of sweep points shown in the display are indicated in the diagram footer In zoom mode the rounded number of currently displayed points are indicated Status bar information Global instrument settings the instrument status and any irregularities are indicated in the status bar beneath the diagram Furthermore the progress of the current operation is displayed in the status bar N User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 14 R amp S FSW K7 Measurements and Result Displays Evaluation Methods for Analog Demodulation 3 Measurements and Result Displays The data that was measured by the R amp S FSW can be evaluated using various different methods In the Analog Demodulation application up to six evaluation methods can be displayed simultaneously in separate windows The results can be displayed as absolute deviations or relative to a reference value or level D The abbreviation AF for Audio Frequency refers to the demodulated AM FM or PM signal Basis for evaluation All evaluations are based on the I Q data set acquired during the measurement The spectrum of the modulated signal to be evaluated is determined by the demodulation bandwidth However it can be restricted to a limited span AF Span if only part of the signal is of interest Furthermore the time base for evaluations in the time domain can be restricted to analyze a smaller extract in more detail see chapter 4 6 Time Domain
11. ee VC ne E RF Start RF Stop oreet Serial number KT External reference External generator AA 38 External generator control suuuuusssss 74 External trigger Level power sensor sese 84 Level remote isc iiit rettet tete tos 240 ower SONSOM M 84 kill HP 95 User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 349 R amp S9FSW K7 Index F Falling Slope Power sensor sss 85 File format VQ data iier co ent te iiid 333 HR OX PO Mt ED 290 File name riu EW E 52 Files I Q data binary XML eee cece teste eeneeeeee 337 UO parameter XML iinei inir iR 334 Filters A weighted AF Sg CGIR AF E CCITT AE iai fite tei tret re om Demodulation High Pass AF iter reete High pass remote sssseesssesses High pass RF input Low pass AE eerte irte etri ee Weighting AP icio riri etes editore nire YIG remote EE Fixed reference De TIMIAG EE 136 Remote control 1 eene 304 FM Offline SOfIKOV EE 97 FM Spectrum Evaluation method seseseeeee 19 FM Time Domain Evaluation method sseseeeee 16 Format pricgc 289 Data remote untere 283 285 Free Run Trigger softKey rnit 95 Frequency Configuration softkey sssssssssssss 109 Coupling p
12. sss 87 RF full span elle E AE Analog Baseband connector ssessesessirerssrreeenne 34 Connector remote Overload protection Overload protection remote ssss 177 REMOTE e 177 179 RF overrange External Mixer B21 eene eeren 59 187 RF OVLD External generator AA 45 RF Power il gle EE 97 Trigger level remote sssessssesss 241 RF Spectrum Evaluation method ccc eee cece eeeneeeeeeeeeeeee 22 TroubleshOotinG WE 164 RF Time Domain Evaluation method sseseee 21 Rising Slope Power sensor sss 85 RUN CONT uc 103 RUN SINGLE CET M 104 S Sample PALS m HP 29 eq 68 Digital UO remote eene 199 Samples Performante qee 31 Saving ligera rt 152 Ens 150 e cce erenerb rsc eee dens ex Ebene emet Hep rend di 52 Scalar reflection measurement External gener tor aeree 37 Scaling ge EE 115 Amplitude range automatically 118 PU rud Configuration Softkey de Result S mmlary ertt nee nnne imer eebe Y axis ai Y axis remote control sess Sereen layOUt scirent intend namen e Revera Fudge eae Search Configuration softke
13. 0 eeceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 286 CALOCulate MARKer FUNCtion ADEMOod AM RESUlt t eese 286 CAL CulateMAhker FEUNCHon ADEMod EMIRE Guter 286 CAL CulateMAhker FEUNCHon ADEMod PMI RE Guer 286 CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion ADEMod CARRier RESGOI eneee oeer enere eerorere nene 287 CAL Culate MAh kerFUNCHon ADEMod FERRot RE Guter 287 CAL Culate nzMAbkertUNCHon ADEMod GINad HE Gutts 287 CALCulate n MARKer FUNCtion ADEMod THD RESUIt t 2 sss 288 IER FNM OFF E 288 ISENSeIADEMod PM RbOnttNL eccentric nn 289 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer FUNCtion ADEMod AFRequency RESult This command queries the modulation audio frequency for the demodulation method in the selected window Parameters lt ModFreq gt Modulation frequency in Hz CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion ADEMod AM RESult lt t gt lt MeasType gt CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion ADEMod FM RESult lt t gt lt MeasType gt CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion ADEMod PM RESult lt t gt lt MeasType gt This command queries the current value of the demodulated signal for the specified trace as displayed in the Result Summary in manual operation Note that all windows with the same evaluation method have the same traces thus the window is irrelevant E N User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 286 R amp S FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements SS SS He Retrieving Results Query parameters l
14. Manual operation See Trigger Level on page 98 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel AM ABSolute lt Level gt The command sets the level when RF power signals are used as trigger source For triggering to be successful the measurement time must cover at least 5 periods of the audio signal Parameters lt Level gt Range 100 to 30 RST 20 dBm Default unit dBm Example TRIG LEM AM 30 dBm Sets the RF power signal trigger threshold to 30 dBm Manual operation See Trigger Level on page 98 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel FM lt Level gt The command sets the level when FM modulated signals are used as trigger source For triggering to be successful the measurement time must cover at least 5 periods of the audio signal Parameters lt Level gt Range 10 to 10 RST 0 Hz Default unit MHz Example TRIG LEV FM 10 kHz Sets the FM trigger threshold to 10 kHz Manual operation See Trigger Level on page 98 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel PM lt Level gt The command sets the level when PM modulated signals are used as trigger source For triggering to be successful the measurement time must cover at least 5 periods of the audio signal Parameters lt Level gt Range 1000 to 1000 RST 0 RAD Default unit RAD DEG Example TRIG LEV PM 1 2 RAD Sets the PM trigger threshold to 1 2 rad Manual operation See Trigger Level on page 98 SES User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 242 R amp S FSW K7 Remot
15. FRQ Frequency Offset see Automatic Source Frequency Numerator Denomi nator Offset on page 77 NOR Normalization on No difference between reference setting and measurement APX approximation Normalization on Deviation from the reference setting occurs Aborted normalization or no calibration performed yet Error and status messages The following status and error messages may occur during external generator control Message Description Ext Generator GPIB Handshake Error Ext Generator TCPIP Handshake Error Ext Generator TTL Handshake Error Connection to the generator is not possible e g due to a cable damage or loose connection or wrong address Ext Generator Limits Exceeded The allowed frequency or power ranges for the generator were exceeded Reverse Sweep via min Ext Generator Fre quency Reverse sweep is performed frequencies are reduced to the minimum frequency then increased again see Reverse sweep on page 45 Ext Generator File Syntax Error Syntax error in the generator setup file see chap ter 4 7 4 3 Generator Setup Files on page 39 Ext Generator Command Error Missing or wrong command in the generator setup file see chapter 4 7 4 3 Generator Setup Files on page 39 Ext Generator Visa Error Error with Visa driver provided with installation very unlikely Overloading At a r
16. essent neneneretnr nere dn rsen rennes enne sense reset 183 IEN Ge Mixer FREOuencv START 183 SSS a User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 345 R amp S FSW K7 List of Remote Commands AnalogDemod ISENSe MIXer FREQuency S TOP ree rettet reote Ene reri SEENEN Segen 183 SENSe MIXer HARMonic BAND PRESet essere nennen nnne nnne nennen ens 183 IEN Ge Mixer HAhMontcBANDIVAL ue 184 IEN Ge Mixer HAbRMontc HIGH SGTATe essent trennen nennen 184 IEN Ge Mixer HAbRMontcHIGHTVAL ue 185 SENSe MIXerHARMoniG d EE 185 SENSe MIXer HARMonic EOWT 22 2 reinen rn htt hh rebatur nn cor na nS reae exa Enn a auo 185 EST Bel 181 SENSe MIXerLOSS AIG E 186 SENSe MIXer LOSS FABLe HIGE eontra trente t repara d EEGENEN geed 186 EISE Ke Rea TEE Be UE 186 SENSe MIXer LOSS ELOW E 186 SENSe MIXer e KE 187 SENSe MIXer RFOVerrange STATe sess nenen nent reenrset nens sen enne nnne 187 SENSe cedieirme c SENSe MIXer THReshold SENSe MIXerES TATe acce fepe etd tette rettet dte Serene deret ea da dE IEN Ge IMSbRACAbTure Ott Get SENS6 PME Ter lt p gt DCYCIE VALUS EE SENSe PMETer lt p gt DCYCle STAT cceeccecesceseeceeesseceeeesecaeeeseesesenecaeceaesaecanecaeseesaesaeeaesaeeeaeeateeaeeaeeess SENSe PMETer p FREQUSnCy iiie tete ort tir rr tre tree ee kei ingen dpa n Fre are ENEE EE IEN Ge IpMETer pz FR
17. sse 76 Basics es 35 Calibration functions esee 77 Calibration measurement settings 75 Channel bar information Sg CONNGCHONS oreari inerte rene Coupling frequencies ssssseeeee Errors si i Generators supported ssssssssee liuic M Interface settings sch NortiallZilig n et Eric ret tees OVEROAGING ET Recalling calibration settings dee LO Reference level i tenens 42 Reference lile eiie titre ntn 42 Reference line position asolo Reference line value esee 80 Reference position ccccccceeecceeeeeteeeneeeeeeeeeneee 79 Reference trace Reference value Reflection measurement sss 37 Reflection open measurement vag LO Reflection short measurement sssssseoseeseseseeeeeeee 78 Remote Control 5 trees esos entend 213 Settings Transducer factor ieser iannis 42 79 Transmission measurement 37 78 TTL synchronization ee External Mixer B21 essen Activating remote control ssessssss 180 Band m Basic Settings aei oe en ete Eh o ee de eroi pire Conversion loss Conversion loss tables Frequency TEE Handover frequency f Harmoni Order tee etre tte trc ecrire hes Harmoni Type uiro rente thee east Name Programming example EE e E Restoring bands
18. 204 CALCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion FIXed RPOint Y essssssssssssseseeeneeen eene 305 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarker mz FUNGCionFl edRbOmntvOFtGet 305 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarker mz EUNGCHonPhNOtse AUTO 311 CALCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion PNOise RESUIE essen 311 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion PNOise STATe seen 311 CALCulate cnz D I Tamarker mz LINK ninesini eiiiai ai siaaandikadi kadandan daa iiaeiai iaa CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum LEFT CAL Culate nz DEI Tamarker mz MAximum NENT CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXiMUM RIGHT 0 02 ec ceecee cence eeeeneeeeeeceeeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeseeaeeeeseeaeeeeeeeeeeeeees CALCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimum PEAK esses eene enne nnne nnne CAL Culate nz DEI Tamarker mz MiNmmum LEET CAL Culate nz DEI Tamarker mz MiNmumNENT enne enne ener nen nene nentes nena CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum RIGHt CAL Culate nz DEI Tamarker mz MiNmmumf PDEART enne nnne nnne CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarker mz MbREF esses nennen ennt sen nrtn set rnr ient ens s innen rrr nnns sena CALCulate n DELTamarker m TRAQCe sse eene nete en nrnen en nrnnr rnnt ent rsen erts nnne nnn CAECulate sn DEETamarkersmo EE 297 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarker zmz SREL ative tenente entere nnn ener n nnns nnn 297 CALCulate n DELTamarker m Y CALOCulate n
19. Delta 6 All Phase Noise Off Phase Noise Measurement State coss eicedie dite kika iinn Ninka anann 141 Defining EE 142 Switching All Phase Noise Measurements Off eeeeeeeeeees 142 Phase Noise Measurement State Activates or deactivates phase noise measurement for the reference point in the diagram This function is only available for delta markers User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 141 R amp S FSW K7 Analysis LEE a Dg Marker Function Configuration If activated the delta markers display the phase noise measured at defined offsets from the reference position Remote command CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion PNOise STATe on page 311 CALCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion PNOise RESult on page 311 Defining a Reference Point Instead of using marker 1 as the reference marker a fixed reference marker can be defined for phase noise measurement in RF Spectrum analysis The Level and Frequency or Time settings define the position and value of the ref erence point Alternatively a Peak Search can be performed to set the maximum value of the selected trace as the reference point If Automatic Peak Search is activated a peak search is started automatically after each sweep and the result is used as the reference point Remote command CALCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion FIXed RPOint Y on page 305 CALCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion FI
20. 13 38 R amp S FSW K7 Measurement Basics ee a Receiving Data Input and Providing Data Output Generator type TTL support Generator type TTL support SMBV100A6 X SMR50 X SMC100A1 X SMR50B11 X SMC100A3 X SMR60 X SMEO2 X SMR60B11 X SME03 X SMP02 X SME06 X SMP03 X SMG SMP04 X SMGL SMP22 X SMGU SMTO2 SMH SMT03 SMHU SMT06 SMIQO2B X SMVO03 SMIQO2E SMU02B31 X SMIQ03B X SMUOS3 X SMIQOSE SMU03B31 X SMIQ04B X SMU04 X SMIQO6GB X SMU04B31 X SMLO01 SMU06 X SML02 SMUO6B31 X SMLO03 SMX SMR20 X SMYO01 SMR20B11 X SMY02 SMR27 X HP8340A SMR27B11 X HP8648 SMR30 X HP ESG A Series 1000A 2000A 3000A 4000A SMR30B11 X HP ESG D SERIES E4432B 1 Requires the option SMR B11 4 7 4 3 Generator Setup Files For each signal generator type to be controlled by the R amp S FSW a generator setup file must be configured and stored on the R amp S FSW The setup file defines the frequency and power ranges supported by the generator as well as information required for com munication For the signal generators listed in chapter 4 7 4 2 Overview of Generators Supported by the R amp S FSW B10 Option on page 38 default setup files are provided Ee User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 39 R amp S9FSW K7 Measurement Basics 4 7 4 4 4 7 4 5 Receiving Data Input and Providing Data Output If necessary these file
21. SENSe MIXer LOSS TABLe HIGH lt FileName gt This command defines the file name of the conversion loss table to be used for the high second range Parameters lt FileName gt string file name gt Example MIX LOSS TABL HIGH MyCVLTable Manual operation See Mixer Settings Harmonics Configuration on page 59 See Conversion loss on page 60 SENSe MIXer LOSS TABLe LOW lt FileName gt This command defines the file name of the conversion loss table to be used for the low first range Parameters lt FileName gt string file name gt Example MIX LOSS TABL mix 1 4 Specifies the conversion loss table mix_1_4 Manual operation See Mixer Settings Harmonics Configuration on page 59 See Conversion loss on page 60 SENSe MIXer LOSS LOW Average This command defines the average conversion loss to be used for the entire low first range Parameters lt Average gt numeric value Range 0 to 100 RST 24 0 dB Default unit dB E N User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 186 R amp S FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements a_a a i ee ee ee ee a a es Configuring the Measurement Example MIX LOSS 20dB Manual operation See Mixer Settings Harmonics Configuration on page 59 See Conversion loss on page 60 SENSe MIXer PORTs lt PortType gt This command specifies whether the mixer is a 2 port or 3 port type Parameters lt PortType gt 2 3 RST 2 Examp
22. Sensori Select Auto Sensor2 Zeroing Power Sensor Meas gt Ref Sensor3 L Frequency Manual Reference Value 67 19 dBm Sensor4 o Frequency Coupling ewe Use Ref Level Offset Unit Scale hm Number of Readings Meas Time Average Duty Cycle External Power Trigger External Trigger Level 20 0 dBm Hysteresis 0 0 dB Dropout Time 1000s Holdoff Time os Slope Rising Falling Continuous Value Update enecens eege 82 co ee 82 Zeroing Be ET 82 Frequency Manual rii EES EE NEAS 82 Frequency Coup EE 82 Bic RS 83 Meas Timp AVOLlaG EE 83 Setting the Reference Level from the Measurement Meas Ref 83 Refelence Valig ere perte tet gh des ar e Peg RARE e aere eee da gn 83 Use Ret Lev Ose AT LETT 83 Average Count Number of Readings 84 DUV GYE e oe ee ag 84 Using the power sensor as an external trigger eiie 84 L External Trigger Level 84 B 3 84 Eo o MEINEN ION TTA CO T 85 L Drop Out TIME NE DT E NEU 85 o e A E 85 State Switches the power measurement for all power sensors on or off Note that in addition to this general setting each power sensor can be activated or deactivated individually by the Select setting on each tab However the general setting overrides the individual settings Remote command SENSe PMETer lt p gt STATe on
23. 13 151 R amp S FSW K7 I Q Data Import and Export Import Export Functions 7 IO Data Import and Export Baseband signals mostly occur as so called complex baseband signals i e a signal rep resentation that consists of two channels the in phase I and the quadrature Q channel Such signals are referred to as UO signals UO signals are useful because the specific RF or IF frequencies are not needed The complete modulation information and even distortion that originates from the RF IF or baseband domains can be analyzed in the Uu Q baseband Importing and exporting UO signals is useful for various applications e Generating and saving UO signals in an RF or baseband signal generator or in exter nal software tools to analyze them with the R amp S FSW later e Capturing and saving UO signals with an RF or baseband signal analyzer to analyze them with the R amp S FSW or an external software tool later For example you can capture UO data using the I Q Analyzer application if available and then perform a Analog Demodulation measurement on that data later using the R amp S FSW Analog Demodulation application As opposed to storing trace data which may be averaged or restricted to peak values l Q data is stored as it was captured without further processing The data is stored as complex values in 32 bit floating point format Multi channel data is not supported The UO data is stored in a format with the file extension iq tar F
24. B17 is installed Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Manual operation See Input Sample Rate on page 68 Setting up Probes Probes can be connected to the optional BASEBAND INPUT connectors if the Analog Baseband interface option R amp S FSW B71 is installed SENSe PROBesp ID IPARTnumDOGE 2 aede eet hehe tro en tein en ER ee PER pin enhn 200 ISGENGe JP OBe pz ID ShRNumber nennen nnnm nen estes ns nares 200 SENSeT PROBSSps SETUBIMODE ccn pacte ee tetra das cr tede x dd adora addo 200 ISENSeIPbROBe pes SETuGMAMET tentent tentent tete tette 201 SENSE PROBE spr SE THIS TA EE 201 SENS PROBe lt p gt SE ak DE 201 E MN User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 199 R amp S FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements REESEN Configuring the Measurement SENSe PROBe lt p gt ID PARTnumber Queries the R amp S part number of the probe Suffix lt p gt 11213 Selects the connector 1 Baseband Input 2 Baseband Input Q 3 RF currently not supported use 1 with RF Input Connector setting Baseband Input I Return values lt PartNumber gt Part number in a string Usage Query only SENSe PROBe lt p gt ID SRNumber Queries the serial number of the probe Suffix lt p gt 11213 Selects the connector 1 Baseband Input 2 Baseband Input Q 3 RF currently not supported use 1 with RF Input Connector setting Baseband Input I Return values lt SerialNo gt S
25. Comment ssisssssrerrsesenes se 149 Compatibility 146 Copying 2s 147 Creating 147 Data points 150 Deactivating 148 Deleting 148 Deleting values 150 Details 148 Editing es 147 Inserting values 150 Managing we 145 Margin wee 149 Name eegen sa 149 Remote control in DCH dl e E 150 Selecting E SUD rere eek T tede exire dere Threshold s x Maces EE KU Visibility 7 K ET Lines Configuration Softkey ssssssssssss 145 Limit see Limit lines iore eterno nn 145 Linking Markets M 134 136 LO Level External Mixer B21 n e 61 Level External Mixer B21 remote control 181 Loading FUNCIONS gege 152 Settings fles niente 52 Lower Level Hysteresis ic Rm 126 Low pass filter AP FHES iei etri torre prd 113 LVL External generator AA 45 Margins Bus e 149 Marker functions Deactivatihg err rtr rr Eee a 143 Remote Control soisissa ttd entes 304 Marker peak list see Peak liSt anene ler oerte rer inrer teretes 144 Markers lee ue 134 Basic settings Configuration remote control 292 Configuration softkey sese Configuration Softkey DeactiValirig EE Delta riarkets oer rere tnr teat Fixed referen
26. Configuring the Atle UAH DEE 228 e Configuring a e 230 Saling the Y AXIS T 231 Amplitude Settings Useful commands for amplitude configuration described elsewhere SENSe ADJust LEVel on page 262 Remote commands exclusive to amplitude configuration CAL Culate nzM Ab ker mz FUNGC onRtterence eene nennen 227 CALCulate lt n gt UNIT POW EE 227 DiSblavlfWiNDow nzTRACGevtSCALelbRLEVel nennen 228 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet sse 228 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion REFerence This command matches the reference level to the power level of a marker If you use the command in combination with a delta marker that delta marker is turned into a normal marker Example CALC MARK2 FUNC REF Sets the reference level to the level of marker 2 Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt UNIT POWer lt Unit gt This command selects the unit of the y axis The unit applies to all measurement windows Parameters lt Unit gt DBM V A W DBPW WATT DBUV DBMV VOLT DBUA AMPere RST dBm Example CALC UNIT POW DBM Sets the power unit to dBm e VY User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 227 R amp S9FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements 11 4 5 2 Configuring the Measurement DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel lt R
27. EXTernal STATe on page 215 Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example CORR ON Activates normalization Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Source Calibration Normalize on page 79 SENSe CORRection TRANsducer GENerator Name This command uses the normalized measurement data to generate a transducer factor with up to 1001 points The trace data is converted to a transducer with unit dB and stored in a file with the specified name and the suffix trd under c Nx sNinstrNtrd The frequency points are allocated in equidistant steps between start and stop frequency The generated transducer factor can be further adapted using the commands described in the Remote Commands Configuring the R amp S FSW Working with Transducers section in the R amp S FSW User Manual Parameters Name lt name gt Example CORR TRAN GEN SMUO1 Creates the transducer file C r_s instr trd SMU01 trd Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Save As Trd Factor on page 79 Programming Example for External Generator Control The following example demonstrates how to work with an external generator in a remote environment It assumes a signal generator of the type SMU04 is connected to the R amp S FSW including TTL synchronization as described in chapter 4 7 4 1 External Generator Connections on page 36 eran aaaaaaaass Preparing the instrument Reset the instrument RST Set the
28. Example Element order for real data 1 channel I 0 Real sample 0 I 1 Real sample 1 I 2 Real sample 2 Example Element order for complex cartesian data 1 channel I 0 Q 0 Real and imaginary part of complex sample 0 I 1 Q 1 Real and imaginary part of complex sample 1 I 2 Q 2 Real and imaginary part of complex sample 2 Example Element order for complex polar data 1 channel Mag 0 Phi 0 Magnitude and phase part of complex sample 0 Mag 1 Phi ll Magnitude and phase part of complex sample 1 Mag 2 Phi 2 Magnitude and phase part of complex sample 2 EEUU RU M User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 337 UO Data Binary File Example Element order for complex cartesian data 3 channels Complex data I channel no time index Q channel no time index I 0 0 Q 0 0 Channel 0 Complex sample 0 LLL 01 QILIIO Channel 1 Complex sample 0 I 2 0 Q 2 0 Channel 2 Complex sample 0 I 0 1 Q 0 1 Channel 0 Complex sample 1 I 1 1 Q 1 1 Channel 1 Complex sample 1 TEITI Of27 a Channel 2 Complex sample 1 I 2 Q 0 2 Channel 0 Complex sample 2 ELL EST ET EST Channel 1 Complex sample 2 I 2 2 QI21 21 Channel 2 Complex sample 2 Example Element order for complex cartesian data 1 channel This is an example of how to store complex cartesian data in float32 format using MAT LAB S
29. Parameters 25 us 50 us 75 us 750 us RST 50 us Example FILT DEMP TCON 750us Selects the deemphasis for the demodulation bandwidth range from 800 Hz to 4 MHz with a time constant of 750 us Manual operation See Deemphasis on page 114 SENSe FILTer n DEMPhasis STATe State This command activates deactivates the selected deemphasis for the specified evalua tion For details about deemphasis refer to Deemphasis on page 114 Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example FILT DEMP ON Activates the selected deemphasis Manual operation See Deemphasis on page 114 SENSe FILTer n HPASs FREQuency ABSolute lt FilterType gt This command selects the high pass filter type for the specified evaluation For details on the high pass filters refer to High Pass on page 113 Parameters lt FilterType gt 20 Hz 50 Hz 300 Hz RST 300Hz Default unit Hz Example FILT HPAS FREQ 300Hz Selects the high pass filter for the demodulation bandwidth range from 800 Hz to 8 MHz Manual operation See High Pass on page 113 SENSe FILTer n HPASs FREQuency MANual Frequency This command selects the cutoff frequency of the high pass filter for the specified eval uation For details on the high pass filters refer to High Pass on page 113 E M User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 256 R amp S FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements REESEN Configuring the M
30. R amp S9FSW K7 Configuration Input and Frontend Settings Amplitude Reference Level Input Settings Value 0 0 dBm Preamplifier Offset 0 0 dB Input Coupling Unit Impedance Auto Level E Mechanical Attenuation Mode Manual Kuto Electronic Attenuation State Mode 10 0 dB Value betereneetewel decke ENNEN EEN DEENEN HENNEN ue 86 L Shifting the Display Offset 86 L Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level 87 Mechanical AtlemUationi 2 c02 cccdeeeeecceeecseeeeseeeeeseercceanenesensetheesnacccnanenesaeeeaeetanesecaaa 87 L Attenuation Mode Value tnnt nntnntn tenens 87 Using Electronic Attenuation Option B25 ce Lernen aset ti 88 tel re E se 88 L Preamplifier option Ba seed n atn iaces bine eege ap cu 88 E it EE 89 D E NP RD 89 Reference Level Defines the expected maximum reference level Signal levels above this value may not be measured correctly which is indicated by the IF OVLD status display OVLD for analog baseband or digitial baseband input The reference level is also used to scale power diagrams the reference level is then used as the maximum on the y axis Since the R amp S FSW hardware is adapted according to this value it is recommended that you set the reference level close above the expected maximum signal level to ensure an optimum measurement no compression good signal to noise ratio Note that the Refere
31. Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements 11 10 Commands for Compatibility Parameters lt FileName gt String containing the path and name of the source file Example Loads IQ data from the specified file Usage Setting only Manual operation See Import on page 153 See IQ Import on page 153 MMEMory STORe IQ COMMent Comment This command adds a comment to a file that contains UO data Parameters Comment String containing the comment Example MMEM STOR IQ COMM Device test 1b Creates a description for the export file MMEM STOR IQ STAT 1 C R_S Instr user data ig tar Stores UO data and the comment to the specified file Manual operation See Export on page 152 See IQ Export on page 153 MMEMory STORe IQ STATe 1 lt FileName gt This command writes the captured UO data to a file The file extension is iq tar By default the contents of the file are in 32 bit floating point format Parameters 1 lt FileName gt String containing the path and name of the target file Example MMEM STOR IQ STAT 1 C R_S Instr user data iq tar Stores the captured UO data to the specified file Manual operation See Export on page 152 See IQ Export on page 153 Commands for Compatibility The following commands are provided for compatibility to other signal analyzers only For new remote control programs use the specified alternative commands CALCIO me EEN 328 T User M
32. This command selects the marker step size mode The step size defines the distance the marker moves when you move it with the rotary knob It therefore takes effect in manual operation only User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 298 R amp S9FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements Parameters lt StepSize gt Example Manual operation Analyzing Results STANdard the marker moves from one pixel to the next POINts the marker moves from one sweep point to the next RST POINts CALC MARK X SSIZ STAN Sets the marker step size to one pixel See Marker Stepsize on page 136 CALCulate MARKer lt m gt LINK lt DisplayType gt Links the specified marker in all displays of the specified type Parameters lt DisplayType gt Manual operation TIME SPECtrum BOTH NONE TIME Links the markers in all time domain diagrams SPECtrum Links the markers in all AF Spectrum displays BOTH Links the markers both in the time domain diagrams and in the AF Spectrum displays NONE Markers are not linked RST NONE See Link Time Marker on page 136 See Link AF Spectrum Marker on page 136 DISPlay MTABle lt DisplayMode gt This command turns the marker table on and off Parameters lt DisplayMode gt Example Manual operation ON Turns the marker table on OFF Turns the marker table off AUTO Turns the marker table on if 3 or more markers are active RST AUTO DISP MT
33. Using the TTL interface allows for considerably higher measurement rates than pure GPIB control because the frequency stepping of the R amp S FSW is directly coupled with the frequency stepping of the generator For more information on TTL synchronization see TTL synchronization on page 44 For an overview of which generators support TTL synchronization see chapter 4 7 4 2 Overview of Generators Supported by the R amp S FSW B10 Option on page 38 Remote command SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice GENerator LINK on page 217 GPIB Address TCP IP Address For LAN connections TCP IP address of the signal generator For GPIB connections GPIB address of the signal generator Remote command SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB RDEVice GENerator ADDRess on page 217 SYSTem COMMunicate TCPip RDEVice GENerator ADDRess On page 218 Reference Selects the internal R amp S FSW or an external frequency reference to synchronize the R amp S FSW with the generator default internal Remote command SOURce EXTernal ROSCillator SOURce on page 216 N User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 74 R amp S FSW K7 Configuration a SS SSS PN RNC SR NUNT Input and Frontend Settings Edit Generator Setup File Displays the setup file for the currently selected Generator Type in read only mode in an editor Although the existing setup files are displayed in read only mode in the editor they can be saved under a different name using File
34. na Input and Frontend Settings Calibrate Reflection Open Starts an open circuit reflection type measurement to determine a reference trace for calibration If both reflection type calibrations open circuit short circuit are carried out the reference trace is calculated by averaging the two measurements The order of the two calibration measurements is irrelevant Remote command SENSe CORRection METHod on page 220 Selects the reflection method SENSe CORRection COLLect ACQuire on page 219 Starts the sweep for open circuit calibration Source Calibration Normalize Switches the normalization of measurement results on or off This function is only avail able if the memory contains a reference trace that is after a calibration has been per formed For details on normalization see chapter 4 7 4 5 Normalization on page 40 Remote command SENSe CORRection STATe on page 220 Recall Restores the settings that were used during source calibration This can be useful if instrument settings were changed after calibration e g center frequency frequency deviation reference level etc Remote command SENSe CORRection RECall on page 220 Save As Trd Factor Uses the normalized measurement data to generate a transducer factor The trace data is converted to a transducer with unit dB and stored in a file with the specified name and the suffix trd under c r_s instr trd The freque
35. see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 276 Result Summary The result summary displays the results of the evaluation functions for all windows in a table 4 Result Summary Carrier Power 7 17 dBm Carrier Offset 4 48 Hz Mod Depth 25 18 Peak Peak Peak 2 RMS Mod Freq SINAD THO AM 25 201 25 167 25 184 17 543 o 1 0001 MHz 53 116 dB 58 491 dB For each evaluation the following information is provided Table 3 1 Result summary description Label Description Peak Positive peak maximum Peak Negative peak minimum Peak 2 Average of positive and negative peaks RMS Root Mean Square value Mod Freq Modulation frequency User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 23 R amp S FSW K7 Measurements and Result Displays EMG SS i a a a ee Evaluation Methods for Analog Demodulation Label Description SINAD Signal to noise and distortion Calculated only if AF Spectrum is displayed Measures the ratio of the total power to the power of noise and harmonic distortions The noise and harmonic power is calculated inside the AF spectrum span The DC offset is removed before the calculation SINAD dB 20 H total power noise distortion power THD Total harmonic distortion The ratio of the harmonics to the fundamental and harmonics All harmonics inside the AF spectrum span are considered up to the tenth harmonic Calculated only if AF Spectrum is displayed THD aB 20 lo
36. 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters lt Holdoff gt Time period that has to pass between the trigger event and the start of the measurement in case another trigger event occurs Range 0s to 1s Increment 100 ns RST 0s Example PMET2 TRIG HOLD 0 1 Sets the holdoff time of the trigger to 100 ms Manual operation See Using the power sensor as an external trigger on page 84 See Trigger Holdoff on page 85 SENSe PMETer lt p gt TRIGger HYSTeresis lt Hysteresis gt This command defines the trigger hysteresis for external power triggers The hysteresis in dB is the value the input signal must stay below the IF power trigger level in order to allow a trigger to start the measurement Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters lt Hysteresis gt Range 3dB to 50 dB Increment 1 dB RST 0 dB Example PMET2 TRIG HYST 10 Sets the hysteresis of the trigger to 10 dB Manual operation See Using the power sensor as an external trigger on page 84 See Hysteresis on page 84 p H u User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 211 R amp S FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements REESEN Configuring the Measurement SENSe PMETer lt p gt TRIGger LEVel lt Level gt This command defines the trigger level for external power triggers This command requires the use of an R amp S NRP Z81
37. Activates or deactivates automatic signal identification Auto ID basically functions like Signal ID However the test and reference sweeps are converted into a single trace by a comparison of maximum peak values of each sweep point The result of this comparison is displayed in trace 3 if Signal ID is active at the same time If Signal ID is not active the result can be displayed in any of the traces 1 to 3 Unwanted mixer products are suppressed in this calculated trace Note that automatic signal identification is only available for measurements that perform frequency sweeps not in vector signal analysis or the I Q Analyzer for instance Remote command SENSe MIXer SIGNal on page 181 Auto ID Threshold Defines the maximum permissible level difference between test sweep and reference sweep to be corrected during automatic comparison Auto ID on page 62 function The input range is between 0 1 dB and 100 dB Values of about 10 dB i e default setting generally yield satisfactory results Remote command SENSe MIXer THReshold on page 182 Bias Settings Define the bias current for each range which is required to set the mixer to its optimum operating point It corresponds to the short circuit current The bias current can range from 10 mA to 10 mA The actual bias current is lower because of the forward voltage of the mixer diode s The trace is adapted to the settings immediately so you can check the result
38. Current sample rate is displayed lt FullScaleLevel gt The level in dBm that should correspond to an UO sample with the magnitude 1 if transferred from connected device If not available 9 97e37 is returned User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 197 R amp S FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements NN i Se ee a eee Configuring the Measurement Example INP DIQ CDEV Result 1 SMU200A 103634 Out A 70000000 100000000 Passed Not Started 0 0 Manual operation See Connected Instrument on page 69 INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer AUTO lt State gt If enabled the digital input full scale level is automatically set to the value provided by the connected device if available This command is only available if the optional Digital Baseband interface option R amp S FSW B17 is installed Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Manual operation See Full Scale Level on page 68 INPut DIQ RANGe COUPling State If enabled the reference level for digital input is adjusted to the full scale level automat ically if the full scale level changes This command is only available if the optional Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 is installed Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Manual operation See Adjust Reference Level to Full Scale Level on page 69 INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer Level Defines or queries the Full Scale Level i e the level that corresponds to an I Q sam
39. DIQ Digital IQ data only available with optional Digital Baseband Inter face R amp S FSW B17 For details on UO input see the R amp S FSW UO Analyzer User Man ual AIQ Analog Baseband signal only available with optional Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 For details on Analog Baseband input see the R amp S FSW UO Ana lyzer User Manual RST RF Manual operation See Radio Frequency State on page 56 See Digital UO Input State on page 68 See Analog Baseband Input State on page 70 Using External Mixers The commands required to work with external mixers in a remote environment are descri bed here Note that these commands require the R amp S FSW B21 option to be installed and an external mixer to be connected to the front panel of the R amp S FSW In MSRA mode external mixers are not supported For details on working with external mixers see the R amp S FSW User Manual BASIC SOUINGS ic M 180 TE E 182 e Conversion Loss Table Settings seiis inienn iiinn eai 187 e Programming Example Working with an External Mixer 191 Basic Settings The basic settings concern general usage of an external mixer ISENSS MIXES TA TEE 180 SENSe MIXerBIAG tal GH c 181 SENSe MIXer BIAS LOW ence t tete tntt te tttn tnt teet tet na 181 SENSe IMIXer E OR E 181 SENSe MIXE SIGNA iiaeia a a a a aa 181 SENSe TMIXeETHResliBId aaa E a ER Aa
40. Displays the phase deviations of the demodulated PM signal in rad or versus time ES User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 17 R amp S FSW K7 Measurements and Result Displays PE Evaluation Methods for Analog Demodulation 1 PM Time Domain e P Clrw Ref 0 00 rad AC CF 100 0 MHz 1001 pts Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH XTIM PM See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 276 AM Spectrum Displays the modulation depth of the demodulated AM signal in or dB versus AF span The spectrum is calculated from the demodulated AM signal in the time domain via FFT _ _ gt RE TEE S e AA LLL LLLUX User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 18 R amp S FSW K7 Measurements and Result Displays EE Evaluation Methods for Analog Demodulation 2 AM Spectrum eiAPClrw Ref 100 00 96 AF CF 1 25 MHz 1001 pts AF Span 2 5 MHz Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH XTIMe AM REL AFSPektruml see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 276 FM Spectrum Displays the frequency deviations of the demodulated FM signal in Hz or dB versus AF span The spectrum is calculated from the demodulated AM signal in the time domain via FFT LEE User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 19 R amp S FSW K7 Measurements and Result Displays EE Evaluation Methods for Analog Demodulation 2 FM Spectrum 1AP Clrw Ref 250 00 kHz PAF CF 1 25 MHz 1001 pts AF Span 2 5 MHz Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH XTIMe FM AFSPektruml see LAYout AD
41. Ee EEN 322 Restoring original display 151 Single mode a 151 Single mode remote sssssssssssss 322 Time dora ees oerte serene reos 32 107
42. Fig 9 5 RF spectrum with demodulation bandwidth 400 kHz 11 Once the correct DBW has been determined you can replace the RF spectrum by the FM spectrum result display to analyze the spectrum of the FM signal Select the Display Config softkey and move an FM Spectrum window over the RF Spec trum window in the display User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 161 R amp S FSW K7 Measurement Example Demodulating an FM Signal MultiView Analog Demod Ref Level 0 z Att B AQT 10ms z Freq 500 0 MHz 1 FM Time D 1AP Clrnw Ref 0 00 Hz DC CF 500 0 MHz l a 5 FM Spectrum AF CF 50 0 kHz 1001 pts AF Span 100 0 kHz 4 Result Summary Carrier Power 10 37 dBm Carrier Offset 651 49 Hz Peak Peak Peak 2 RMS Mod Freq SINAD THD FM 50 132 kHz 48 840 kHz 49 486 kHz 34 956 kHz 10 000 kHz 65 064 dB 66 515 dB Fig 9 6 FM spectrum and Result Summary including SINAD and THD values From the FM spectrum the SINAD and THD are also calculated and displayed in the Result Summary 12 Since the AF Auto Scale function is enabled the FM Spectrum diagram is scaled according to the current measurement automatically Each diagram is scaled indi vidually so that the reference values at the top of the two diagrams can differ 100 kHz in the FM Time Domain versus 50 kHz in the FM Spectrum However you can adjust the values manually a Tap the FM Spectrum window to set the focus in it b Press the AMPT key and select the Scale Config
43. FlLTer lt n gt CCIR WEIGhted STAT A 255 SENSe FIL Ter n CCIR UNWeighted S TATe cesses 255 E ET KE Ce WEE 255 SENSe FILTer lt n gt DEMPhasis TCOhetant enne 255 SENSeJFIETersn s DEMPhasis S TATe nanc a Dev pana acad dee 256 SENSe FIL Ter n HPASs FREQuency ABSolute sese ene 256 SENSe FIL Ter n HPASs FREQuency MANUal esses entren 256 E ET Nenn E Kn gn RE 257 SENSe FIL Ter n L PASs FREQuency ABSolute sees 257 SENSe FIL Ter n L PASs FREQuency MANUal cessent nnne 257 SENSe FILTer lt n gt LPASs FREQuency RELative 0 cceceeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaeeeeeeeseeeaaaaaees 258 SENSeJ FIETeremgsEPASSDUSTATe ET 258 SENSe FILTer lt n gt AWEighted STATe State This command activates deactivates the A weighting filter for the specified evaluation For details on weighting filters see Weighting on page 114 Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example FILT AWE ON Activates the A weighting filter Manual operation See Weighting on page 114 SENSe FlLTer lt n gt AOFF This command switches all AF filters for the selected evaluation off Usage Setting only User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 254 R amp S FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements REESEN Configuring the Measurement Manual operation See Deactivating all AF Filters on page 115
44. INP IQ FULL 0 5V Manual operation See Fullscale Level Mode Value on page 91 INPut IQ TYPE lt DataType gt This command defines the format of the input signal Parameters lt DataType gt IQ I Q IQ The input signal is filtered and resampled to the sample rate of the application Two input channels are required for each input signal one for the in phase component and one for the quadrature component l The in phase component of the input signal is filtered and resam pled to the sample rate of the application If the center frequency is not 0 see SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 225 the in phase component of the input signal is down converted first Low IF I Q The quadrature component of the input signal is filtered and resampled to the sample rate of the application If the center fre quency is not 0 the quadrature component of the input signal is down converted first Low IF Q RST IQ Example INP IQ TYPE Q Manual operation See li Mode on page 70 SENSe SWAPiq State This command defines whether or not the recorded IQ pairs should be swapped I lt gt Q before being processed Swapping and Q inverts the sideband This is useful if the DUT interchanged the and Q parts of the signal then the R amp S FSW can do the same to compensate for it EE User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 195 R amp S FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements NN SS Se ee a es Co
45. SENS MIX ON p PYP SM M User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 191 Configuring the Measurement Configuring basic mixer behavior Set the LO level of the mixer s LO port to 15 dBm SENS MIX LOP 15dBm Set the bias current to 1 mA SENS MIX BIAS LOW 1mA eer Configuring the mixer and band settings Use band V to full possible range extent for assigned harmonic 6 SENS MIX HARM BAND V SENS MIX RFOV ON Query the possible range SENS MIX FREQ STAR Result 47480000000 47 48 GHz SENS MIX FREQ STOP Result 138020000000 138 02 GHz Use a 3 port mixer type SENS MIX PORT 3 Split the frequency range into two ranges cange 1 covers 47 48 GHz GHz to 80 GHz harmonic 6 average conv loss of 20 dB range 2 covers 80 GHz to 138 02 GHz harmonic 8 average conv loss of 30 dB SENS MIX HARM TYPE EVEN SENS MIX HARM HIGH STAT ON SENS MIX FREQ HAND 80GHz SENS MIX HARM LOW 6 SENS MIX LOSS LOW 20dB SENS MIX HARM HIGH 8 SENS MIX LOSS HIGH 30dB eege Activating automatic signal identification functions Activate both automatic signal identification functions SENS MIX SIGN ALL Use auto ID threshold of 8 dB SENS MIX THR 8dB Select single sweep mode INIT CONT OFF Initiate a basic frequency sweep and wait until the sweep has finis
46. User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 66 R amp S9FSW K7 Configuration 5 4 1 3 Input and Frontend Settings Mixer Type Specifies whether the external mixer for which the table is to be applied is a two port or three port type This setting is checked against the current mixer setting before the table can be assigned to the range Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL PORTs on page 190 Position Value Each position value pair defines the correction value for conversion loss for a specific frequency The reference values must be entered in order of increasing frequencies A maximum of 50 reference values can be entered To enter a new value pair tap the Position Value table or select the Insert Value button Correction values for frequencies between the reference values are obtained by inter polation Linear interpolation is performed if the table contains only two values If it con tains more than two reference values spline interpolation is carried out Outside the fre quency range covered by the table the conversion loss is assumed to be the same as that for the first and last reference value The current configuration of the conversion loss function as described by the position value entries is displayed in the preview pane to the right of the table Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL DATA on page 189 Insert Value Inserts a new position value entry in the table If the table is empty a new entry at 0 H
47. a new conversion loss table is created This command is only available with option B21 External Mixer installed Parameters lt FileName gt lt File name gt Example CORR CVL SEL LOSS TAB Ai Manual operation See New Table on page 63 See Edit Table on page 64 See File Name on page 65 SENSe CORRection CVL SNUMber lt SerialNo gt This command defines the serial number of the mixer for which the conversion loss table is to be used This setting is checked against the current mixer setting before the table can be assigned to the range Before this command can be performed the conversion loss table must be selected see SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 191 This command is only available with option B21 External Mixer installed Parameters lt SerialNo gt Serial number with a maximum of 16 characters Example CORR CVL SEL LOSS TAB 4 Selects the conversion loss table CORR CVL MIX 123 4567 Manual operation See Mixer S N on page 66 Programming Example Working with an External Mixer This example demonstrates how to work with an external mixer in a remote environment It is performed in the Spectrum application in the default layout configuration Note that without a real input signal and connected mixer this measurement will not return useful results Jem Preparing the instrument Reset the instrument RST Activate the use of the connected external mixer
48. e Configuring the Triggering Conditions eeeeeeeeene 238 e Configuring the Trigger Output 1 2 cee cele ree n neret 245 Configuring the Triggering Conditions TRlGoert GtOuencelpBBbower HOL Dot 238 Reiler TR AE 238 TRIGger SEQuence lHOLBoff TIME 11 reacted ta ier e euet 239 TRlGoert GtOuencellFbower HOL Doft 239 TRiGger SEQuence Power HY S KEE 239 TRIGger SEQuence EVeLlBBPOW6L irritat han maa ue ta Foe a 240 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel EXTernal port eee 240 TRlGoert GtOuencell EVellEbower eene en nene nnns ns 240 TRIGgerLSEQuence LEVelQ Paw EE 241 TRIGGer SEQuence t EVelRFBOWL irte rere ERKENNEN Dee eO Goku ee EENS 241 TRlGoert GtOuencell EVel AM REI ative rnn nereoersrsnrnrentrerororernrnrenerererene 241 TRiGoert GtEOuencell EVel AM ABGolutel nnns 242 TRIGGer SEQuencepEVeOlF M io ested terere iain Andie Ee 242 TRiGgen SE Quechee E EE 242 TRIGger SEQuence S E OPe ENEE EENENNEERNEENNENN NEE t Rea rne ne RR pe naaa aK naana 243 TRIGg6r e Re D 243 TRiGger SEQuence TIME RINTetVal 2 2 etur dto aa a Rhen 245 TRIGger SEQuence BBPower HOLDoff Period This command defines the holding time before the baseband power trigger event The command requires the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 or the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 Note that this command is maintained for compatibility reasons only Use the
49. el Att Mechanical and electronic RF attenuation Offset Reference level offset AQT Measurement time for data acquisition RBW Resolution bandwidth DBW Demodulation bandwidth Freq Center frequency for the RF signal Window title bar information For each diagram the header provides the following information User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 13 R amp S FSW K7 Welcome to the Analog Demodulation Application Deeg Understanding the Display Information 1 FM Time Domain 1AP Clrw Ref 0 00 Hz DC Demod Out 1 2 345 6 7 8 9 Fig 2 1 Window title bar information in the Analog Demodulation application 1 Window number 2 Modulation type 3 Trace color 4 Trace number 5 Detector 6 Trace mode 7 Reference value at the defined reference position 8 AF coupling AC DC only in AF time domains if applicable 9 Results are selected for demodulation output Diagram footer information The diagram footer beneath the diagram contains the following information depending on the evaluation RF Spectrum CF Center frequency Sweep points Span measured span of input signal RF Time domain CF Center frequency Sweep points Time per division of input signal AF Spectrum AF CF center fre Sweep points AF Span evaluated span quency of demodula ted signal AF Time domain CF Center frequency Sweep points Time per division of input signal
50. in Trigger 2 3 on page 99 ERREUR RA a User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 245 R amp S FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements REESEN Configuring the Measurement OUTPut TRIGgereport DIRection iiiriieie eria cuero sede nennt ann hh kun a hene rr n RR hn tns 246 OLFTPutctRIGSereponts EV Sly icc iicet Doer Pel DI ER eM var so bene ver qnse REDDE as 246 OUTPuETRIGgersponboOTYIP EE 247 OUTPut TRIGger port PULSe lMMediate 2 once cia node tornata rta nu urn Eed 247 OL Put TRIGSereports PULSE LENGI cinin EES ERl SNE et 247 OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt DIRection Direction This command selects the trigger direction Suffix port 2 3 Selects the trigger port to which the output is sent 2 trigger port 2 front 3 trigger port 3 rear Parameters Direction INPut Port works as an input OUTPut Port works as an output RST INPut Manual operation See Trigger 2 3 on page 99 OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel Level This command defines the level of the signal generated at the trigger output This command works only if you have selected a user defined output with OUTPut TBRIGger boort OTYPe Suffix port 2 3 Selects the trigger port to which the output is sent 2 trigger port 2 front 3 trigger port 3 rear Parameters Level HIGH TTL signal LOW OV RST LOW Manual operation See Trigger 2 3 on page 99 See Output Type on pag
51. ter 11 8 1 5 Configuring Special Marker Functions on page 304 o The Fixed Reference Marker settings are described in Defining a Fixed Reference on page 136 e Phase Noise Measurement Marker nennen 141 e MOB DOW MAKER enn eI etek cc helices 142 e Deactivating All Marker Functions ecrire tnra 143 User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 140 R amp S FSW K7 Analysis Marker Function Configuration 6 5 1 Phase Noise Measurement Marker For each of the 16 markers phase noise measurement can be activated Phase noise measurement markers are configured in the Phase Noise Config dialog box using the Phase Noise function The individual marker settings correspond to those defined in the Marker dialog box Any settings to the marker state or type changed in the Marker Function dialog box are also changed in the Marker dialog box and vice versa To display the Phase Noise Config dialog box do one of the following e Press the MKR FUNC key then select the Select Marker Function softkey Then select the Phase Noise button Select the Phase Noise Config softkey e Inthe Overview select Analysis and switch to the vertical Marker Function Con fig tab Then select the Phase Noise button Select the Phase Noise Config soft key a Frequency Marker 1 20 0 MHz Delta 1 Delta 2 20 65 dBm 15 16 Delta 3 Delte Peak Search Delta 4 Auto Peak Search 4 off Delta 5 0
52. the default setting AVERage The average is formed over several sweeps The Sweep Average Count determines the number of averaging procedures MAXHold The maximum value is determined over several sweeps and dis played The R amp S FSW saves the sweep result in the trace memory only if the new value is greater than the previous one MINHold The minimum value is determined from several measurements and displayed The R amp S FSW saves the sweep result in the trace memory only if the new value is lower than the previous one VIEW The current contents of the trace memory are frozen and dis played OFF Hides the selected trace RST WRITe OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF EES User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 266 R amp S FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements NN i ee ee ee s Configuring the Measurement Example ADEM AM AVER MAXH MINH OFF OFF OFF Determines average max hold and min hold values simultane ously for the traces 1 3 of the RF time domain evaluation ADEM AM WRIT OFF OFF OFF OFF OFE Determines only the current measurement values for trace 1 ADEM AM OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF Switches AM demodulation off SENSe AVERage COUNt lt AverageCount gt This command defines the number of sweeps that the application uses to average traces In case of continuous sweeps the application calculates the moving average over the average count In case of single sweep measureme
53. you select the INPUT OUTPUT key and then Input Source Config Input Source Power Sensor Probes Probe I Name RT ZS30 Serial Number 1410 4309 02 E Not Present Part Number 101241 Type Single Ended Microbutton Action Run Single For each possible probe connector Baseband Input Baseband Input Q the detected type of probe if any is displayed The following information is provided for each con nected probe e Probe name e Serial number e R amp S part number e Type of probe Differential Single Ended For more information on using probes with an R amp S FSW see the R amp S FSW User Manual For general information on the R amp S9RTO probes see the device manuals Microbutton ACION ceto ertet ordei teas deducet bue dude sat vec dedu aeaa 72 Microbutton Action Active R amp S probes except for RT ZS10E have a configurable microbutton on the probe head By pressing this button you can perform an action on the instrument directly from the probe Select the action that you want to start from the probe Run single Starts one data acquisition No action Prevents unwanted actions due to unintended usage of the microbut ton Remote command SENSe PROBe p SETup MODE on page 200 User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 72 R amp S FSW K7 Configuration H Input and Frontend Settings 5 4 1 6 External Generator Control Settings The External Generator settings are available in the Inp
54. 1 6 kHz 625 us 1000 s 1000 s 131071 9994 s 200 Hz 800 Hz 1 25 ms 2000 s 2000 s 262143 9988 s 100 Hz 400 Hz 2 5 ms 4000 s 4000 s 524287 9975 s Gaussian filter curve is limited by UO bandwidth only available with option B160 5 only available with option B320 Large numbers of samples Principally the R amp S FSW can handle up to 1 6 million samples However when 480 001 samples are exceeded all traces that are not currently being displayed in a window are deactivated to improve performance The traces can only be activated again when the samples are reduced Effects of measurement time on the stability of measurement results Despite amplitude and frequency modulation the display of carrier power and carrier frequency offset is stable This is achieved by a digital filter which sufficiently suppresses the modulation provided however that the measurement time is 2 3 x 1 modulation frequency i e that at least three periods of the AF signal are recorded The mean carrier power for calculating the AM is also calculated with a digital filter that returns stable results after a measurement time of 2 3 x 1 modulation frequency i e at least three cycles of the AF signal must be recorded before a stable AM can be shown AF Triggers The Analog Demodulation option allows triggering to the demodulated signal The display is stable if a minimum of five modulation periods are within the recording time Trigger
55. 100 96 corresponding to the upper diagram border The default setting is 50 96 diagram center for the AF time evaluations and 100 96 upper diagram border for the AF spectrum evaluations Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe RPOSition on page 218 User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 116 R amp S FSW K7 Configuration REESEN Demodulation Reference Value Determines the modulation depth or the phase deviation or the frequency deviation at the reference line of the y axis The reference value can be set specifically for each eval uation e AF time display The trace display takes individual frequency phase offsets into account in contrast the AF Coupling setting permits automatic correction by the average frequency phase offset of the signal and can therefore not be activated simultaneously e AF spectrum display In the default setting the reference value defines the modulation depth or the FM PM deviation at the upper diagram border Possible values e AM 0 and 10000 96 e FM 0 and 10MHz e PM 0 and 10000 rad Note The reference value for the AF range in the window title bar is displayed with respect to the defined reference position The position may vary for different windows For time domain and frequency domain windows for example a different reference value may be displayed although the same reference is actually used but the positions vary Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt T
56. 239 Drop Out Time Defines the time the input signal must stay below the trigger level before triggering again ERREUR RA N User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 98 R amp S9FSW K7 Configuration 5 5 2 Trigger Configuration Note For input from the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 using the baseband power trigger BBP the default drop out time is setto 100 ns to avoid unintentional trigger events as no hysteresis can be configured in this case Remote command TRIGger SEQuence DTIMe on page 238 Slope For all trigger sources except time you can define whether triggering occurs when the signal rises to the trigger level or falls down to it Remote command TRIGger SEQuence SLOPe on page 243 Trigger Holdoff Defines the minimum time in seconds that must pass between two trigger events Trig ger events that occur during the holdoff time are ignored Remote command TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HOLDoff on page 239 Trigger Input and Output Settings The trigger input and output settings are configured in the Trigger In Out tab of the Trigger dialog box or in the Outputs configuration dialog box via the INPUT OUTPUT key Ntra p M 99 KEES eia pe dedos sd 100 e 100 0 15 E deans 100 EE NIC AREE RES 100 Trigger 2 3 Defines the usage of the variable TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connectors where Trigger 2 TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connector o
57. 299 Marker Stepsize Defines the size of the steps that the marker position is moved using the rotary knob Standard The marker position is moved from pixel to pixel on the display This is the default and most suitable to move the marker over a larger distance Sweep Points The marker position is moved from one sweep point to the next This setting is required for a very precise positioning if more sweep points are collected than the number of pixels that can be displayed on the screen Remote command CALCulate MARKer X SSIZe on page 298 Defining a Fixed Reference Instead of using a reference marker that may vary its position depending on the mea surement results a fixed reference marker can be defined for trace analysis When you setthe State to On a vertical and a horizontal red display line are displayed marked as FXD The normal marker 1 is activated and set to the peak value of the trace assigned to marker 1 and a delta marker to the next peak The fixed reference marker is set to the position of marker 1 at the peak value The delta marker refers to the fixed reference marker If activated the fixed reference marker FXD can also be selected as a Reference Marker instead of another marker The Level and Frequency or Time settings define the position and value of the ref erence marker Alternatively a Peak Search can be performed to set the current maximum value of the trace assigned to marker 1 as
58. 4 6 Receiving Data Input and Providing Data Output bar you can restore the calibration settings which are stored with the reference dataset on the R amp S FSW Storing the normalized reference trace as a transducer factor The inverse normalized reference trace can also be stored as a transducer factor for use in other R amp S FSW applications that do not support external generator control The normalized trace data is converted to a transducer with unit dB and stored in a file with the specified name and the suffix trd under c r_s instr trd The frequency points are allocated in equidistant steps between the start and stop frequency This is useful for example to determine the effects of a particular device component and then remove these effects from a subsequent measurement which includes this compo nent For an example see the External Generator Control Measurement Examples section in the R amp S FSW User Manual Note that the normalized measurement data is stored not the original reference trace Thus if you store the normalized trace directly after calibration without changing any settings the transducer factor will be O dB for the entire span by definition of the nor malized trace Reference Trace Reference Line and Reference Level Reference trace The calibration results are stored internally on the R amp S FSW as a reference trace For each measured sweep point the offset to the expected values is determin
59. All different information areas are labeled They are explained in more detail in the following sections User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 12 R amp S FSW K7 Welcome to the Analog Demodulation Application Understanding the Display Information MultiView Spectrum Analog Demod 1 Time per Division Ref Level 0 x Att 200ms DBW 5MHz Freq 1 0 GHz TEM Time Domain 2 TAP CIW Ref 3 pc Division FIM Debug AF Fitter Start 0 0 100 pts 2 0 ms 4 Result SEN MTN Carrier Power 82 E Carrier Offset 133 47 kHz FPESK PESK EPESK RMS Mod Freg 85 041 kHz 84 715 kHz 84 878 kHz 50 313 kHz oo Measuring 12 00 45 1 Channel bar for firmware and measurement settings 2 3 Window title bar with diagram specific trace information 4 Diagram area 5 Diagram footer with diagram specific information depending on result display 6 Instrument status bar with error messages progress bar and date time display MSRA operating mode In MSRA operating mode additional tabs and elements are available A colored back ground of the screen behind the measurement channel tabs indicates that you are in MSRA operating mode See the R amp S FSW MSRA User Manual for details Channel bar information In the Analog Demodulation application the R amp S FSW shows the following settings Table 2 1 Information displayed in the channel bar in the Analog Demodulation application Ref Level Reference level m
60. Baseband Input Q 3 RF currently not supported use 1 with RF Input Connector setting Baseband Input I DETected NDETected RST NDETected Query only SENSe PROBe lt p gt SETup TYPE Queries the type of the probe User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 201 R amp S9FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements 11 4 2 6 Configuring the Measurement Suffix p 11213 Selects the connector 1 Baseband Input 2 Baseband Input Q 3 RF currently not supported use 1 with RF Input Connector setting Baseband Input Return values lt Type gt String containing one of the following values None no probe detected active differential active single ended Usage Query only Working with Power Sensors The following commands describe how to work with power sensors e Configuring Power Sensor TTT 202 e Configuring Power Sensor Measurements 204 e Triggering with Power Gensors EE 210 Configuring Power Sensors SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice PMETer p CONFigure AUTO STATe 202 Sv Tem CGOMMunicateRDEVice PME TerCOUND A 202 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice PMETer p DEFine eeseseseeeeeeseee nennen 203 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice PMETer lt p gt CONFigure AUTO STATe State This command turns automatic assignment of a power sensor to the power sensor index on and off Suffix p 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters lt S
61. Example CALC MARK FUNC FPE LIST SIZE 10 The marker peak list will contain a maximum of 10 peaks Manual operation See Maximum Number of Peaks on page 144 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FPEaks SORT lt SortMode gt This command selects the order in which the results of a peak search are returned Parameters lt SortMode gt X Sorts the peaks according to increasing position on the x axis Y Sorts the peaks according to decreasing position on the y axis RST X Example CALC MARK FUNC FPE SORT Y Sets the sort mode to decreasing y values Manual operation See Sort Mode on page 144 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FPEaks STAT State This command turns a peak search on and off Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC MARK FUNC FPE STAT ON Activates marker peak search Manual operation See Peak List State on page 144 CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion FPEeaks X This command queries the position of the peaks on the x axis The order depends on the sort order that has been set with CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FPEaks SORT Return values lt PeakPosition gt Position of the peaks on the x axis The unit depends on the mea surement Usage Query only Ee User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 307 R amp S FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements REESEN Analyzing Results CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion FPEeaks Y This comma
62. External generator control commands are available if the R amp S FSW External Generator Control option R amp S FSW B10 is installed For each measurement channel one external generator can be configured To switch between different configurations define multiple measurement channels For more information on external generator control see chapter 4 7 4 Basics on External Generator Control on page 35 e Measurement Config urallgli 2 iie rato reo ete e ab Rape 213 e Intetface ConTig letlor coiecr edet rrt teh RSR ce ent ener R enne Kann nnana 216 Source lee EE 218 e Programming Example for External Generator Control sss 221 Measurement Configuration The following commands are required to activate external generator control and to con figure a calibration measurement with an external tracking generator SOURce EXTemal FREGUenG iieri iiid terea e eo ede eene eco urea di e Uoc EEN 213 SGOUlbce EvTemaltRtOuencv COUPimotSTATel en eeeosese rene eoserenennnorornnnnene 213 SGOUlbce EvTemaltRtOuencvl FACTortD Nominator nn 214 SOURcCe EXTernal FREQuency FACTor NUMerator eese 214 SOURce EXTemaliFREQuency OFFSelt 1 2 eter teen ta sc ener RR de Rr Recon ax 215 SOURce EXTermalPOWer EEVel ecce inae eetu eere teca einen need NEEN SE 215 SOURCES e NEEN RE 215 SGOUlbce POWertL EVellt IMMedatelOtt Get 216 SOURce EXTernal FREQuency lt Frequency
63. FREG encyHANDOV6L 2 1 inerat cett tea tere er ka ER ANDE a iaaa 183 SENSe MIXer FREQuenby S PARU E 183 SENSe MIXer FREQuency S TOP iacet deerat ken en aa RR eeh ree ENKEN 183 SENSe MIXerHARMonicBANDIPRESl 2 2221 reet Letter pedea deae uou Elek EE 183 SENSe MIXer HARMonic BAND VALue 22 eiecti ieiuna ne dea ecu 184 ISGENGe Mixer HAMontc HIGH STATe eene nennen snnt nnns 184 SENSe MIXer HARMonIcGHIGPB VALue 2 2 2 22 2 crure todeadazat eno pna denegat e eo Ren ede actin 185 SENSE IMI Ker HARMONO dE 185 SENSE Mixer HARMON LOW EE 185 EK e E 186 SENSe MIXerEOSS TABLE ln BETEN 186 SENSe MIXer LOSS TABLe LOW cene tette tette tenetis 186 User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 182 R amp S FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements REESEN Configuring the Measurement SENSe MIXer LOSS LOW ccce ttt tenentes 186 SEN Se MIR Gi PORT Sec HE 187 SENSe MiXer RFOVerrange S TATe iniit REENEN ERRLEEAE ENEE EENS AER 187 SENSe MIXer FREQuency HANDover Frequency This command defines the frequency at which the mixer switches from one range to the next if two different ranges are selected The handover frequency for each band can be selected freely within the overlapping frequency range This command is only available if the external mixer is active see SENSe MIXer
64. FUNCtion lt Detector gt Defines the trace detector to be used for trace analysis Parameters lt Detector gt APEak Autopeak NEGative Negative peak POSitive Positive peak QPEak Quasipeak CISPR filter only SAMPle First value detected per trace point RMS RMS value AVERage Average CAVerage CISPR Average CISPR filter only CRMS CISPR RMS CISPR filter only RST APEak Example DET POS Sets the detector to positive peak Manual operation See Detector on page 129 User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 268 R amp S9FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements 11 5 Capturing Data and Performing Sweeps SENSe WINDow DETector trace FUNCtion AUTO State This command couples and decouples the detector to the trace mode Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example DET AUTO OFF The selection of the detector is not coupled to the trace mode Manual operation See Detector on page 129 Capturing Data and Performing Sweeps MSRA operating mode Note that in MSRA operating mode capturing data is only possible for the MSRA Master channel In Analog Demodulation application channels the sweep configuration com mands define the analysis interval Be sure to select the correct measurement channel before using these commands PUB ORR be os HQ OEP EEPEMDEPST 269 Ig rds sn corie eege dE NEEN 270 ll OS Nee E 271 EINEN TEE 271 NI
65. FUNCtion NDBDown RESult on page 309 n dB down Delta Value Defines the delta level from the reference marker 1 used to determine the bandwidth or time span Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion NDBDown FREQuency on page 308 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion NDBDown TIME on page 310 6 5 3 Deactivating All Marker Functions All special marker functions can be deactivated in one step Use the All Functions Off button in the Marker Functions dialog box 6 6 Marker Peak List Configuration In the Analog Demodulation application the search limits are not available To display the Marker Peak List dialog do one of the following e Press the MKR FUNC key then select the Marker Peak List softkey e Inthe Overview select Analysis and switch to the vertical Peak List tab N User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 143 R amp S FSW K7 Analysis Marker Peak List Configuration SearchLimits Right Limit E 126 5 GHz Maximum Number of Peaks 50 Threshold E 120 0 dBm Peak Excursion 6 0 dB 7o o Display Marker Numbers On Off perience Export Decimal Separator comma Peak Est SIBIG EE 144 AUG I Oe NEN TIC ENS LOCI IDEO TETTE TT TREES 144 Maximum Number of Pesks irat tk D dai pec dd roca Eie erc da ea re Eddie veda 144 Peak EXCHISIOB EE 144 Displaying Marker INUIDBOS 2 2 tI EE M iet ARRANA ENAREN ARARAU Saa 145 Exporting the Peak
66. File Format iq tar UO data is packed in a file with the extension iq tar An iq tar file contains UO data in binary format together with meta information that describes the nature and the source of data e g the sample rate The objective of the iq tar file format is to separate UO data from the meta information while still having both inside one file In addition the file format allows you to preview the UO data in a web browser and allows you to include user specific data The iq tar container packs several files into a single tar archive file Files in tar format can be unpacked using standard archive tools see http en wikipedia org wiki Compar ison of file archivers available for most operating systems The advantage of tar files is that the archived files inside the tar file are not changed not compressed and thus itis possible to read the I Q data directly within the archive without the need to unpack untar the tar file first Sample iq tar files If you have the optional R amp S FSW VSA application R amp S FSW K70 some sample iq tar files are provided in the C R S Instr user vsa DemoSignals directory on the R amp S FSW Contained files An iq tar file must contain the following files e Q parameter XML file e g xyz xml Contains meta information about the UO data e g sample rate The filename can be defined freely but there must be only one single UO parameter XML file inside an iq tar file
67. HARM HIGH 2 Manual operation See Mixer Settings Harmonics Configuration on page 59 See Harmonic Order on page 60 SENSe MIXer HARMonic TYPE lt OddEven gt This command specifies whether the harmonic order to be used should be odd even or both Which harmonics are supported depends on the mixer type Parameters lt OddEven gt ODD EVEN EODD RST EVEN Example MIX HARM TYPE ODD Manual operation See Mixer Settings Harmonics Configuration on page 59 See Harmonic Type on page 60 SENSe MIXer HARMonic LOW lt HarmOrder gt This command specifies the harmonic order to be used for the low first range Parameters lt HarmOrder gt numeric value Range 2 to 61 USER band for other bands see band def inition RST 2 for band F Example MIX HARM 3 Manual operation See Mixer Settings Harmonics Configuration on page 59 See Harmonic Order on page 60 E User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 185 R amp S FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements AMET Se ee a es Configuring the Measurement SENSe MIXer LOSS HIGH Average This command defines the average conversion loss to be used for the entire high sec ond range Parameters lt Average gt numeric value Range 0 to 100 RST 24 0 dB Default unit dB Example MIX LOSS HIGH 20dB Manual operation See Mixer Settings Harmonics Configuration on page 59 See Conversion loss on page 60
68. LEVel IFPower command RST IMMediate User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 234 R amp S9FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements lt TriggerSlope gt lt OffsetSamples gt lt NoOfMeas gt Example Configuring the Measurement POSitive NEGative Used slope of the trigger signal The value indicated here will be ignored for lt trigger source gt IMMediate RST POSitive Number of samples to be used as an offset to the trigger signal For details refer to chapter 4 3 Sample Rate Measurement Time and Trigger Offset on page 29 The value indicated here is ignored for trigger source IMMe diate RST 0 Number of repetitions of the measurement to be executed The value indicated here is especially necessary for the average max hold minhold function Range 0 to 32767 RST 0 ADEM SET 8MHz 32000 EXT POS 500 30 Performs a measurement at sample rate 8 MHz record length 32000 trigger source EXTernal trigger slope POSitive offset samples 500 500 samples before trigger occurred of meas 30 SENSe JADEMod SPECtrum BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution Bandwidth Defines the resolution bandwidth for data acquisition From the specified RBW and the demodulation span set by SENSe ADEMod SPECtrum SPAN MAXimum on page 254 or SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth DEMod on page 236 the required measurement time is calculated If
69. Level on page 61 SENSe MIXer SIGNal State This command specifies whether automatic signal detection is active or not SS User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 181 R amp S FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements ee SS SSS SS a ee ae ee a ee es Configuring the Measurement Note that automatic signal identification is only available for measurements that perform frequency sweeps not in vector signal analysis or the UO Analyzer for instance Parameters lt State gt OFF ON AUTO ALL OFF No automatic signal detection is active ON Automatic signal detection Signal ID is active AUTO Automatic signal detection Auto ID is active ALL Both automatic signal detection functions Signal ID Auto ID are active RST OFF Manual operation See Signal ID on page 62 See Auto ID on page 62 SENSe MIXer THReshold Value This command defines the maximum permissible level difference between test sweep and reference sweep to be corrected during automatic comparison see SENSe MIXer SIGNal on page 181 Parameters Value numeric value Range 0 1 dB to 100 dB RST 10 dB Example MIX PORT 3 Manual operation See Auto ID Threshold on page 62 Mixer Settings The following commands are required to configure the band and specific mixer settings SENSe amp MIXer
70. Offset gt Numeric value RST 0 Default unit dB Manual operation See Y Offset on page 147 CALCulate LIMit lt k gt UPPer SHIFt lt Distance gt This command moves a complete upper limit line vertically Compared to defining an offset this command actually changes the limit line definition points by the value you define Parameters lt Distance gt Defines the distance that the limit line moves The unit depends on CALCulate LIMit k UNIT on page 317 User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 318 R amp S FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements NT SS a Analyzing Results Usage Event Manual operation See Shift y on page 150 CALCulate LIMit lt k gt UPPer SPACing lt InterpolType gt This command selects linear or logarithmic interpolation for the calculation of an upper limit line from one horizontal point to the next Parameters lt InterpolType gt LINear LOGarithmic RST LIN Manual operation See X Axis on page 149 See Y Axis on page 149 CALCulate LIMit lt k gt UPPer STATe State This command turns an upper limit line on and off Before you can use the command you have to select a limit line with CALCulate LIMit lt k gt NAME on page 317 Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Visibility on page 146 CALCulate LIMit lt k gt UPPer THReshold Limit This command defines an absolute limit for limit lines with a
71. PM RPO 500us Sets the position where the phase to 0 rad setting to 500 us 11 7 4 Formats for Returned Values ASCII Format and Binary Format When trace data is retrieved using the TRAC DATA Or TRAC IQ DATA command the data is returned in the format defined using the FORMat DATA The possible formats are described here e ASCII Format FORMat ASCII The data is stored as a list of comma separated values CSV of the measured values in floating point format e Binary Format FORMat REAL 32 The data is stored as binary data Definite Length Block Data according to IEEE 488 2 each measurement value being formatted in 32 Bit IEEE 754 Floating Point Format The schema of the result string is as follows 41024 lt valuel gt lt value2 gt lt value n with 4 number of digits 4 in the example of the following number of data bytes 1024 number of following data bytes 1024 in the example lt Value gt 4 byte floating point value User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 289 R amp S FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements Retrieving Results Reading out data in binary format is quicker than in ASCII format Thus binary format is recommended for large amounts of data 11 7 5 Reference ASCII File Export Format Trace data can be exported to a file in ASCII format for further evaluation in other appli cations The file consists of the header containing important scaling p
72. R amp S FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements SS SS a a M es es Capturing Data and Performing Sweeps Manual operation See Continue Single Sweep on page 104 INITiate CONTinuous State This command controls the sweep mode Note that in single sweep mode you can synchronize to the end of the measurement with OPC OPC or WAI In continuous sweep mode synchronization to the end of the measurement is not possible Thus it is not recommended that you use continuous sweep mode in remote control as results like trace data or markers are only valid after a single sweep end synchronization For details on synchronization see the Remote Basics chapter in the R amp S FSW User Manual If the sweep mode is changed for a measurement channel while the Sequencer is active see rNiTiate SEQuencer IMMediate on page 272 the mode is only considered the next time the measurement in that channel is activated by the Sequencer Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 ON 1 Continuous sweep OFF 0 Single sweep RST 1 Example INIT CONT OFF Switches the sweep mode to single sweep INIT CONT ON Switches the sweep mode to continuous sweep Manual operation See Continuous Sweep RUN CONT on page 103 INITiate IMMediate This command starts a single new measurement With sweep count or average count gt 0 this means a restart of the corresponding number of measurements With trace mode MAXHold MINHold
73. RAD RST RAD Example UNIT ANGL DEG Manual operation See Phase Unit Rad Deg on page 120 UNIT THD lt Mode gt Selects the unit for THD measurements E N User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 259 R amp S FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements pem SS SSS SSS Configuring the Measurement This command is identical to CALC UNIT THD Parameters lt Mode gt DB PCT RST DB Example UNIT THD PCT Manual operation See THD Unit DB on page 120 11 4 9 Adjusting Settings Automatically The following remote commands are required to adjust settings automatically in a remote environment The tasks for manual operation are described in chapter 5 10 Automatic Settings on page 125 MSRA operating mode In MSRA operating mode settings related to data acquisition cannot be adjusted for Analog Demodulation applications SEN SGA UUs eas P aa N a a i M 260 SENSe ADJustCONFigure DUERalion 2 eie eter reete eoi eade eaaa 261 SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURatlon MODE 1 reinen nena nna in hene inn 261 PENS ADJUSt FREQUENCY e EE cuero ene Rennen hp ena te x ERR ed nn see XR RR E ERR ru EM RA aan ds 261 SENSeJADJust CONFigure HYSTeresis LOWE nnne 262 IGENZGe Aust CONEioure H Gteresles Uber 262 PENSE JADJuSt TEE 262 SENSe JADJust SCALe Y AUTO CONTINUOUS 2 2 cceceeeceetececcseeeseeeetecenecesuaeaeauenenees 263 SENSe ADJust ALL This command init
74. Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements AME P A HEH Activating Analog Demodulation Measurements lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The channel name is displayed as the tab label for the measurement channel Note If the specified name for a new channel already exists the default name extended by a sequential number is used for the new channel see table 11 1 Example INST CRE SAN Spectrum 2 Adds an additional spectrum display named Spectrum 2 INSTrument CREate REPLace lt ChannelName1 gt lt ChannelType gt lt ChannelName2 gt This command replaces a measurement channel with another one Parameters lt ChannelName1 gt String containing the name of the measurement channel you want to replace lt ChannelType gt Channel type of the new channel For a list of available channel types see table 11 1 lt ChannelName2 gt String containing the name of the new channel Note If the specified name for a new channel already exists the default name extended by a sequential number is used for the new channel see table 11 1 Example INST CRE REPL Spectrum2 IQ IQAnalyzer Replaces the channel named Spectrum2 by a new measurement channel of type IQ Analyzer named IQAnalyzer INSTrument DELete lt ChannelName gt This command deletes a measurement channel If you
75. S f span S f max and f 4 DBW 2 fmax and SpanNmin are specified in the data sheet Remote command SENSe ADEMod SPECtrum SPAN MAXimum on page 254 SENSe ADEMod SPEC SPAN ZOOM on page 253 Demodulation Bandwidth Defines the demodulation bandwidth of the measurement The demodulation bandwidth determines the sampling rate with which the input signal is captured and analyzed For recommendations on finding the correct demodulation bandwidth see chapter 4 2 Demodulation Bandwidth on page 28 User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 111 R amp S FSW K7 Configuration 5 8 3 Demodulation For details on the relation between demodulation bandwidth and sampling rate refer to chapter 4 3 Sample Rate Measurement Time and Trigger Offset on page 29 Remote command SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth DEMod on page 236 RF Full Span Sets the span around the center frequency of the RF data to be evaluated to the demodulation bandwidth Remote command SENSe ADEMod SPECtrum SPAN MAXimum on page 254 AF Filter The AF filter reduces the evaluated bandwidth of the demodulated signal and can define a weighting function It is configured in the AF Filter tab of the Demodulation Set tings dialog box AF filters are only available for AF time domain evaluations A maximum of two filters out of high pass low pass or deemphasis filters can be active at the same time if analog demodulation o
76. STAT ON Turns the n dB Down marker on See n dB down Marker State on page 143 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion NDBDown TIME This command queries the position of the n dB down markers on the x axis when meas uring in the time domain To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchronization to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single sweeps See also INI Tiate CONTinuous on page 271 Return values lt Time gt Example Manual operation lt time 1 gt absolute position in time of the n dB marker to the left of the ref erence marker in seconds lt time 2 gt absolute position in time of the n dB marker to the right of the reference marker in seconds INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode CALC MARK FUNC NDBD ON Switches on the n dB down function INIT WAI Starts a sweep and waits for the end CALC MARK FUNC NDBD TIME Outputs the time values of the temporary markers See n dB down Delta Value on page 143 User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 310 R amp S FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements AMET H PH Analyzing Results Phase Noise Measurement Marker The following commands control the phase noise measurement marker function Useful commands for phase
77. Spectrum RBW 2 MHz ns VBW 2MHz Mode Auto Sweep 100 0 MHz 1001 pts 20 0 MHz 300 0 MHz Fig 4 7 Shifted reference line If the DUT inserts a gain or an attenuation in the measurement this effect can be reflected in the result display on the R amp S FSW To reflect a power offset in the measurement trace change the Reference Value Coupling the Frequencies As described in chapter 4 7 4 5 Normalization on page 40 normalized measurement results are very accurate as long as the same settings are used as for calibration Although approximate normalization is possible it is important to consider the required frequencies for calibration in advance The frequencies and levels supported by the con nected signal generator are provided for reference with the interface configuration Two different methods are available to define the frequencies for calibration that is to couple the frequencies of the R amp S FSW with those of the signal generator e Manual coupling a single frequency is defined e Automatic coupling a series of frequencies is defined one for each sweep point based on the current frequency at the RF input of the R amp S FSW the RF frequency range covers the currently defined span of the R amp S FSW unless limited by the range of the signal generator Automatic coupling If automatic coupling is used the output frequency of the generator source frequency is calculated as follows LEE User Manual 1173 924
78. Suffix p 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters lt Frequency gt The available value range is specified in the data sheet of the power sensor in use RST 50 MHz Example PMET2 FREQ 1GHZ Sets the frequency of the power sensor to 1 GHZ Manual operation See Frequency Manual on page 82 SENSe PMETer lt p gt FREQuency LINK lt Coupling gt This command selects the frequency coupling for power sensor measurements Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters lt Coupling gt CENTer Couples the frequency to the center frequency of the analyzer MARKer1 Couples the frequency to the position of marker 1 OFF Switches the frequency coupling off RST CENTer Example PMET2 FREQ LINK CENT Couples the frequency to the center frequency of the analyzer Manual operation See Frequency Coupling on page 82 SENSe PMETer lt p gt MTIMe Duration This command selects the duration of power sensor measurements Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index D HH Re User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 207 R amp S FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements REESEN Configuring the Measurement Parameters lt Duration gt SHORt NORMal LONG RST NORMal Example PMET2 MTIM SHOR Sets a short measurement duration for measurements of station ary high power signals for the selecte
79. TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HOLDoff on page 239 command for new remote control programs Parameters Period Range 150 ns to 1000s RST 150 ns Example TRIG SOUR BBP Sets the baseband power trigger source TRIG BBP HOLD 200 ns Sets the holding time to 200 ns TRIGger SEQuence DTIMe lt DropoutTime gt Defines the time the input signal must stay below the trigger level before a trigger is detected again User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 238 R amp S FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements REESEN Configuring the Measurement For input from the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 using the baseband power trigger BBP the default drop out time is set to 100 ns to avoid unintentional trigger events as no hysteresis can be configured in this case Parameters lt DropoutTime gt Dropout time of the trigger Range O sto 10 0s RST Os Manual operation See Drop Out Time on page 98 TRIGger SEQuence HOLDoff TIME lt Offset gt Defines the time offset between the trigger event and the start of the sweep data cap turing Parameters Rolles RST Os Example TRIG HOLD 500us Manual operation See Trigger Offset on page 98 TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HOLDoff Period This command defines the holding time before the next trigger event Note that this command is available for any trigger source not just IF Power Note If you perform gated measurements in comb
80. Tiate SEOtienterABOR eiue eerie e See e 272 INITiate SEQuencer IMMediale 22 i SEENEN Reduce hn a Resa cron eaque cenam sa dno hie 272 lee MODE E 272 INITiate SEQ uencer REFResh ALL creto eene dena doc na Intt EEEE ETENEE 273 SYST em SEQUENCE EE 274 ABORt This command aborts a current measurement and resets the trigger system To prevent overlapping execution of the subsequent command before the measurement has been aborted successfully use the OPC or WAI command after ABOR and before the next command For details see the Remote Basics chapter in the R amp S FSW User Manual To abort a sequence of measurements by the Sequencer use the INI Tiate SEQuencer ABORt on page 272 command Note on blocked remote control programs LEE User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 269 R amp S FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements REESEN Capturing Data and Performing Sweeps If a sequential command cannot be completed for example because a triggered sweep never receives a trigger the remote control program will never finish and the remote channel GPIB LAN or other interface to the R amp S FSW is blocked for further commands In this case you must interrupt processing on the remote channel first in order to abort the measurement To do so send a Device Clear command from the control instrument to the R amp S FSW on a parallel channel to clear all currently active remote channels D
81. Y Axis om Absolute H Upper H Position Value 0 00 Hz 20 00 dBm 30 00000000 MHz 20 00 dBm Insert Value 1 50 MHz 31 50 MHz Dato Gel 150 Insert ValWB Eeer dee DRE 150 BATTU EE 150 cM MCI 150 UU aie gs 150 e EE EE 150 User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 148 R amp S FSW K7 Analysis REESEN Limit Line Settings and Functions Name Defines the limit line name All names must be compatible with Windows conventions for file names The limit line data is stored under this name with a LIN extension Remote command CALCulate LIMit lt k gt NAME on page 317 Comment Defines an optional comment for the limit line The text may contain up to 40 characters Remote command CALCulate LIMit COMMent on page 313 Threshold Defines an absolute threshold value only for relative scaling of the y axis Remote command CALCulate LIMit lt k gt LOWer THReshold on page 316 CALCulate LIMit k UPPer THReshold on page 319 Margin Defines a margin for the limit line The default setting is 0 dB i e no margin Remote command CALCulate LIMit k LOWer MARGin on page 315 CALCulate LIMit k UPPer MARGin on page 318 X Axis Describes the horizontal axis on which the data points of the limit line are defined Includes the following settings e Domain Hz for frequency domain s for time domain
82. Zoom on page 32 e Evaluation Methods for Analog Demodulaton AAA 15 3 1 Evaluation Methods for Analog Demodulation The following evaluation methods can be selected for Analog Demodulation measure ments AM Time Doma BEE 15 FM Titae DODmialiy EEN 16 PM mme DOMa Been a CITED DLL DEDIT 17 AM SOS CUM MEE CE 18 FM SPS EEN 19 PM SBS CUI EE 20 RF TIG GIB EE 21 RF SSC UN CC L Aaa NATE 22 PROS UIE SUPE cod EES REES SES easier boe tert as 23 Maker EE 24 Marker Peak bist edet ecd uet eode Rodeo ant e Reduces co red dedu ra adds id eed Rud na 25 AM Time Domain Displays the modulation depth of the demodulated AM signal in 96 versus time ERREUR RA E E e e A A A1 L LLLLLLM ALLLLSE J User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 15 R amp S FSW K7 Measurements and Result Displays Ech Evaluation Methods for Analog Demodulation 1 AM Time Domain e iAP Clrw Ref 0 00 96 CF 100 0 MHz 1001 pts Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH XTIM AM REL See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 276 FM Time Domain Displays the frequency spectrum of the demodulated FM signal versus time EET A E E User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 16 R amp S FSW K7 Measurements and Result Displays pec aa Evaluation Methods for Analog Demodulation 1 FM Time Domain 1AP Clrw Ref 0 00 Hz DC CF 100 0 MHz 1001 pts Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH XTIM FM See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 276 PM Time Domain
83. adding a new window the command returns its name by default the same as its number as a result Example LAY ADD 1 LEFT MTAB Result 2 Adds a new window named 2 with a marker table to the left of window 1 Example LAY ADD 1 BEL XTIM AM RELative TDOMain Adds an AM Time Domain display below window 1 Usage Query only Manual operation See AM Time Domain on page 15 See FM Time Domain on page 16 See PM Time Domain on page 17 See AM Spectrum on page 18 See FM Spectrum on page 19 See PM Spectrum on page 20 See RF Time Domain on page 21 See RF Spectrum on page 22 See Result Summary on page 23 See Marker Table on page 24 See Marker Peak List on page 25 N User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 276 R amp S FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements REESEN Configuring the Result Display Table 11 3 lt WindowType gt parameter values for AnalogDemod application Parameter value Window type MTABle Marker table PEAKIist Marker peak list RSUMmary Result summary XTIM AM RF Time Domain RF power XTIM AM RELative AM Time Domain XTIM AM RELa AM Spectrum tive AFSPectrum XTIM FM FM Time Domain XTIM FM AFSPectrum FM Spectrum XTIM PM PM Time Domain XTIM PM AFSPectrum PM Spectrum XTIM SPECtrum RF Spectrum LAYout CATalog WINDow This command queries the name and index of all active windows from top left to b
84. amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input User Manual Bor c Med Input State c HET 68 Input Sample ale er tede he aE EE ehasdnas RR AERA EU a aan 68 Full Seale Level nece re Ernte ER Sege 68 Adjust Reference Level to Full Scale Level 69 Connected WE CIE 69 BI UE 69 Digital UO Input State Enables or disable the use of the Digital IQ input source for measurements Digital IQ is only available if the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 is installed Remote command INPut SELect on page 179 Input Sample Rate Defines the sample rate of the digital I Q signal source This sample rate must correspond with the sample rate provided by the connected device e g a generator If Auto is selected the sample rate is adjusted automatically by the connected device The allowed range is from 100 Hz to 10 GHz Remote command INPut DIQ SRATe on page 199 INPut DIQ SRATe AUTO on page 199 Full Scale Level The Full Scale Level defines the level and unit that should correspond to an UO sample with the magnitude 1 User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 68 R amp S FSW K7 Configuration a 8 8 Input and Frontend Settings If Auto is selected the level is automatically set to the value provided by the connected device Remote command INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer on page 198 INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer UNIT on page 199 INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer AUTO on page 198 Adjust Reference Level to Full Scale Level If enabled the re
85. amp S FSW is directly coupled with the frequency stepping of the generator For details see chapter 4 7 4 7 Coupling the Frequencies on page 43 In figure 4 4 the TTL connection is illustrated using an SMU generator for example User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 36 R amp S FSW K7 Measurement Basics hee Receiving Data Input and Providing Data Output BNC Blank BNC Trigger SMU Fig 4 4 TTL connection for an SMU generator The external generator can be used to calibrate the data source by performing either transmission or reflection measurements Transmission Measurement This measurement yields the transmission characteristics of a two port network The external generator is used as a signal source It is connected to the input connector of the DUT The input of the R amp S FSW is fed from the output of the DUT A calibration can be carried out to compensate for the effects of the test setup e g frequency response of connecting cables GEN OUTPUT DUT RF INPUT Fig 4 5 Test setup for transmission measurement Reflection Measurement Scalar reflection measurements can be carried out using a reflection coefficient mea surement bridge LEE User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 37 R amp S FSW K7 Measurement Basics Receiving Data Input and Providing Data Output GEN OUTPUT RF INPUT DUT Fig 4 6 Test setup for reflection measurement Generated signal input In order to use the functions of the external generator
86. an appropriate generator must be connected and configured correctly In particular the generator output must be connected to the RF input of the R amp S FSW External reference frequency In order to enhance measurement accuracy a common reference frequency should be used for both the R amp S FSW and the generator If no independent 10 MHz reference frequency is available it is recommended that you connect the reference output of the generator with the reference input of the R amp S FSW and that you enable usage of the external reference on the R amp S FSW via SETUP gt Reference gt External Refer ence For more information on external references see the Instrument Setup section in the R amp S FSW User Manual Connection errors If no external generator is connected if the GPIB or TCP IP address is not correct or the generator is not ready for operation an error message is displayed Ext Generator GPIB Handshake Error or Ext Generator TCPIP Handshake Error see chapter 4 7 4 8 Displayed Information and Errors on page 45 4 7 4 2 Overview of Generators Supported by the R amp S FSW B10 Option R amp S SMA V2 10 x or higher R amp S SMU V1 10 or higher o The R amp S SMA and R amp S SMU require the following firmware versions Generator type TTL support Generator type TTL support SMA01A X SMR40 X SMBV100A3 X SMR40B11 X 1 Requires the option SMR B11 User Manual 1173 9240 02
87. application in MSRA mode define the analysis interval For details on the MSRA operating mode see the R amp S FSW MSRA User Manual e Bandwidih Er Le E 101 EE itn perdre Nien Mien edge ede eects 103 5 6 1 Bandwidth Settings The bandwidth settings define which parts of the input signal are acquired and then demodulated They are configured via the BW key or in the Bandwidth tab of the Data Acquisition dialog box gt To display this dialog box do one of the following e Select the Data Acquisition button in the Analog Demodulation Overview e Select the BW key and then the Bandwidth Config softkey Bandwidth Sweep g DITS HIERBEI 5 0 MHz Demodulation Filter Hat Gauss Meas Time AQT 62 5 us A Capture Offset 0 0 Resolution Bandwidth eer FM Time Domain penmedulation BandWidth o iiai EEE NAE 102 Demodulator AE izccviiaadtaacacst rua ede ce nn pan euer SEAN SEN eege Eeer 102 Measurement Time AQT Jovane RES Meee eee 102 Capre CG 102 Resolution GMA e 102 User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 101 R amp S FSW K7 Configuration BEE Data Acquisition Demodulation Bandwidth Defines the demodulation bandwidth of the measurement The demodulation bandwidth determines the sampling rate with which the input signal is captured and analyzed For recommendations on finding the correct demodulation bandwidth see chapter 4 2 Demodulation Bandwidth on page 28 For details on the relation betwee
88. are highlighted The running measurement can be aborted by selecting the highlighted softkey or key again The results are not deleted until a new measurement is started Note Sequencer If the Sequencer is active the Continuous Sweep softkey only con trols the sweep mode for the currently selected channel however the sweep mode only has an effect the next time the Sequencer activates that channel and only for a channel defined sequence In this case a channel in continuous sweep mode is swept repeatedly Furthermore the RUN CONT key on the front panel controls the Sequencer not individ ual sweeps RUN CONT starts the Sequencer in continuous mode For details on the Sequencer see the R amp S FSW User Manual Remote command INITiate CONTinuous on page 271 User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 103 R amp S FSW K7 Configuration EE Data Acquisition Single Sweep RUN SINGLE After triggering starts the number of sweeps set in Sweep Count The measurement stops after the defined number of sweeps has been performed While the measurement is running the Single Sweep softkey and the RUN SINGLE key are highlighted The running measurement can be aborted by selecting the highligh ted softkey or key again Note Sequencer If the Sequencer is active the Single Sweep softkey only controls the sweep mode for the currently selected channel however the sweep mode only has an effect the next time the Sequencer activates that chann
89. available to configure measure ments and analyze results with their corresponding remote control command UO Data Import and Export Description of general functions to import and export raw UO measurement data How to Perform Measurements in the Analog Demodulation Application The basic procedure to perform each measurement and step by step instructions for more complex tasks or alternative methods Measurement Examples Detailed measurement examples to guide you through typical measurement scenar ios and allow you to try out the application immediately Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Measurement Hints and tips on how to handle errors and optimize the measurement configuration Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements Remote commands required to configure and perform Analog Demodulation meas urements in a remote environment sorted by tasks Commands required to set up the environment or to perform common tasks on the instrument are provided in the main R amp S FSW User Manual Programming examples demonstrate the use of many commands and can usually be executed directly for test purposes List of remote commands Alpahabetical list of all remote commands described in the manual Index User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 7 R amp S9FSW K7 Preface Documentation Overview 1 2 Documentation Overview The user documentation for the R amp S FSW consists of the following parts e Getting Started printed manual e On
90. bit floating point data IEEE 754 ScalingFactor Optional describes how the binary data can be transformed into values in the unit Volt The binary UO data itself has no unit To get an UO sample in the unit Volt the saved samples have to be multiplied by the value ofthe ScalingFactor For polar data only the magnitude value has to be multiplied For multi channel signals the ScalingFactor must be applied to all channels The attribute unit must be set to v The ScalingFactor must be gt 0 If the ScalingFactor element is not defined a value of 1 V is assumed NumberOfChan nels Optional specifies the number of channels e g of a MIMO signal contained in the I Q data binary file For multi channels the UO samples of the channels are expected to be interleaved within the UO data file see chapter B 2 I O Data Binary File on page 337 If the NumberOfChannels element is not defined one channel is assumed DataFilename Contains the filename of the UO data binary file that is part of the iq tar file It is recommended that the filename uses the following convention lt xyz gt lt Format gt lt Channels gt ch lt Type gt e xyz a valid Windows file name e Format complex polar or real see Format element e Channels Number of channels see NumberOfChannels element e Type float32 float64 int8 int16 int32 or int64 see DataType element Examples e xyz complex 1ch flo
91. cc aestas SEENEN SEENEN 285 FORMAL DE MPGMIIRA CGS c EE 285 MMEMory STORe lt n gt TRACe lt Trace gt lt FileName gt This command exports trace data from the specified window to an ASCII file Parameters lt Trace gt Number of the trace to be stored This parameter is ignored if the option Export all Traces and all Table Results is activated in the Export configuration settings see FORMat DEXPort TRACes on page 285 lt FileName gt String containing the path and name of the target file Example MMEM STOR1 TRAC 3 TEST ASC Stores trace 3 from window 1 in the file TEST ASC N User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 284 R amp S FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements SSS ee ee Retrieving Results Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Export Trace to ASCII File on page 132 See Export on page 152 FORMat DEXPort DSEParator lt Separator gt This command selects the decimal separator for data exported in ASCII format Parameters lt Separator gt COMMa Uses a comma as decimal separator e g 4 05 POINt Uses a point as decimal separator e g 4 05 RST RST has no effect on the decimal separator Default is POINt Example FORM DEXP DSEP POIN Sets the decimal point as separator Manual operation See Decimal Separator on page 132 See Exporting the Peak List on page 145 FORMat DEXPort HEADer lt State gt If enabled additional
92. command SENSe ADJust SCALe Y AUTO CONTinuous on page 263 RF Evaluation These settings are only available for RF evaluations and the result summary Demod Spectrum Scaling Unit Range Scaling Logarithmic Range 100 dB b E Linear Percent EN Linear with Unit Ref Level Position 100 0 sm Relative Relative iser 6 RF Time Domain t Range Defines the displayed y axis range in dB frequency domain or Hz time domain The default value is 100 dB or 500 kHz Remote command DISPlay WINDow n TRACe Y SCALe on page 231 Ref Level Position Defines the reference level position i e the position of the maximum AD converter value on the level axis in where 0 96 corresponds to the lower and 100 to the upper limit of the diagram Only available for RF measurements Remote command DISPlay WINDowcn TRACe Y SCALe RPOSition on page 218 Auto Scale Once Automatically determines the optimal range and reference level position to be displayed for the current measurement settings User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 118 R amp S9FSW K7 Configuration The display is only set once it is not adapted further i changed again Remote command Demodulation f the measurement settings are DISPlay WINDowcn TRACe Y SCALe AUTO ONCE on page 232 Scaling Defines the scaling method for the y axis Logarithmic Logarithmic scaling only available for logarithmic units dB Lin
93. configured in the Analog Demodulation Overview dialog box which is displayed when you select the Overview softkey from any menu see chapter 5 3 Configuration Overview on page 53 Multiple Measurement Channels and Sequencer Function When you activate an application a new measurement channel is created which deter mines the measurement settings for that application The same application can be acti vated with different measurement settings by creating several channels for the same application The number of channels that can be configured at the same time depends on the available memory on the instrument Only one measurement can be performed at any time namely the one in the currently active channel However in order to perform the configured measurements consecu tively a Sequencer function is provided If activated the measurements configured in the currently active channels are performed one after the other in the order of the tabs The currently active measurement is indicated by a symbol in the tab label The result displays of the individual channels are updated in the tabs including the MultiView as the measurements are performed Sequential operation itself is independant of the currently displayed tab For details on the Sequencer function see the R amp S FSW User Manual 2 2 Understanding the Display Information The following figure shows a measurement diagram during an Analog Demodulation measurement
94. deactivates the marker in the diagram Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt STATe on page 293 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt STATe on page 296 User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 133 R amp S FSW K7 Analysis El Marker Settings Marker Position X value Defines the position x value of the marker in the diagram Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X on page 294 CALCulate n DELTamarkercm X on page 297 Marker Type Toggles the marker type The type for marker 1 is always Normal the type for delta marker 1 is always Delta These types cannot be changed Note If normal marker 1 is the active marker switching the Mkr Type activates an additional delta marker 1 For any other marker switching the marker type does not acti vate an additional marker it only switches the type of the selected marker Normal A normal marker indicates the absolute value at the defined position in the diagram Delta A delta marker defines the value of the marker relative to the specified reference marker marker 1 by default Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m STATe on page 293 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt STATe on page 296 Reference Marker Defines a marker as the reference marker which is used to determine relative analysis results delta marker values If a fixed reference point is configured see Defining a Fixed Reference on page 136 the re
95. delete the last measurement channel the default Spectrum channel is activated Parameters lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel you want to delete A measurement channel must exist in order to be able delete it Example INST DEL Spectrum4 Deletes the spectrum channel with the name Spectrum4 INSTrument LIST This command queries all active measurement channels This is useful in order to obtain the names of the existing measurement channels which are required in order to replace or delete the channels Return values lt ChannelType gt For each channel the command returns the channel type and lt ChannelName gt channel name see table 11 1 Tip to change the channel name use the INSTrument REName command I User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 173 R amp S FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements Activating Analog Demodulation Measurements Example INST LIST Result for 3 measurement channels ADEM Analog Demod IQ IQ Analyzer SANALYZER Spectrum Usage Query only Table 11 1 Available measurement channel types and default channel names Application lt ChannelType gt Parameter Default Channel Name Spectrum SANALYZER Spectrum UO Analyzer IQ IQ Analyzer Pulse R amp S FSW K6 PULSE Pulse Analog Demodulation ADEM Analog Demod R amp S FSW K7 GSM R amp S FSW K10 GSM GSM Mu
96. demodulated data is automatically set to 0 Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example DEM SQU ON Signals below the level threshold are squelched Manual operation See Squelch State on page 107 SENSe JADEMod SQuelch LEVel Threshold This command defines the level threshold below which the demodulated data is set to 0 if squelching is enabled see SENSe ADEMod SQUelch STATe on page 249 Parameters Threshold numeric value The absolute threshold level Range 150 dBm to 30 dBm RST 40 dBm Example DEM SQU LEV 80 If the signal drops below 80 dBm the demodulated data is set to 0 Manual operation See Squelch Level on page 107 p P Ms User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 249 R amp S FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements SS SS ee ee ae es Configuring the Measurement 11 4 8 2 Time Domain Zoom Settings Using the time domain zoom the demodulated data for a particular time span is extracted and displayed in more detail SENSe JADEMod rnP ZOOM LENGI iiir eerie pnto aia nnn ende cadran 250 SENSe JJADEModenscZOOM LENGIDIMDDE irtcn nannaa aaa see doc hu nuire nena 250 SENS amp ADEModen ZODMA3S TARL ien ecpeee a neuen etm etat eret en EES 251 ISENSEJABEMods ns ZOOM STATE EE 251 SENSe JADEMod lt n gt ZOOM LENGt
97. e Q data binary file e g xyz complex float32 Contains the binary UO data of all channels There must be only one single UO data binary file inside an iq tar file Optionally an iq tar file can contain the following file e Q preview XSLT file e g open IqTar xml file in web browser xslt Contains a stylesheet to display the UO parameter XML file and a preview of the UO data in a web browser A sample stylesheet is available at http www rohde schwarz com file open IqTar xml file in web browser xslt LEE User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 333 R amp S9FSW K7 I Q Data File Format iq tar UO Parameter XML File Specification B 1 I Q Parameter XML File Specification The content of the UO parameter XML file must comply with the XML schema RsIqTar xsd available at http www rohde schwarz comf file RsIqTar xsd In particular the order of the XML elements must be respected i e iq tar uses an ordered XML schema For your own implementation of the iq tar file format make sure to validate your XML file against the given schema The following example shows an UO parameter XML file The XML elements and attrib utes are explained in the following sections Sample UO parameter XML file xyz xml lt xml version 1 0 encoding UTF 8 gt xml stylesheet type text xsl href open IqTar xml file in web browser xslt gt RS IQ TAR FileFormat fileFormatVersion 1 xsi noNamespaceSchemaLocation Rs
98. e Scaling mode absolute or relative Hz s 9 6 values For relative values the frequencies are referred to the currently set center frequency In the zero span mode the left boundary of the diagram is used as the reference e Scaling linear or logarithmic Remote command CALCulate LIMit k LOWer SPACing on page 316 CALCulate LIMit k UPPer SPACing on page 319 CALCulate LIMit k LOWer MODE on page 315 CALCulate LIMit k UPPer MODE on page 318 CALCulate LIMit k CONTrol DOMain on page 313 Y Axis Describes the vertical axis on which the data points of the limit line are defined Includes the following settings e Level unit e Scaling mode absolute or relative dB values Relative limit values refer to the reference level U User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 149 R amp S9FSW K7 Analysis 6 8 Zoom Functions e Limittype upper or lower limit values must stay above the lower limit and below the upper limit to pass the limit check Remote command CALCulate LIMit k UNIT on page 317 CALCulate LIMit k LOWer SPACing on page 316 CALCulate LIMit k UPPer SPACing on page 319 Data points Each limit line is defined by a minimum of 2 and a maximum of 200 data points Each data point is defined by its position x axis and value y value Data points must be defined in ascending order The same position can have two different values Remote command CALCulate LIMit k CONTrol DATA
99. ee ee Configuring the Measurement This command is only available with option B21 External Mixer installed Parameters lt Band gt K A KA Q U VJE W F D G Y J USER Standard waveguide band or user defined band Note The band formerly referred to as A is now named KA the input parameter A is still available and refers to the same band as KA For a definition of the frequency range for the pre defined bands see table 11 2 RST F 90 GHz 140 GHz Example CORR CVL SEL LOSS TAB Ai Selects the conversion loss table CORR CVL BAND KA Sets the band to KA 26 5 GHz 40 GHz Manual operation See Band on page 66 SENSe CORRection CVL BIAS lt BiasSetting gt This command defines the bias setting to be used with the conversion loss table Before this command can be performed the conversion loss table must be selected see SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 191 This command is only available with option B21 External Mixer installed Parameters lt BiasSetting gt numeric value RST 0 0A Default unit A Example CORR CVL SEL LOSS TAB 4 Selects the conversion loss table CORR CVL BIAS 3A Manual operation See Bias Settings on page 62 See Write to lt CVL table name gt on page 63 See Bias on page 66 SENSe CORRection CVL CATAlog This command queries all available conversion loss tables saved in the C r_s instr user cv1 directory on the instrument This
100. ee reduceret nn RE 135 Individual Marker Setup In the Analog Demodulation application up to 17 markers or delta markers can be acti vated for each window simultaneously Initial marker setup is performed using the Marker dialog box p B B O User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 132 R amp S9FSW K7 Analysis Marker Settings ker Markers Marker Settings Search Settings Selected State Stimulus Ref Link to Marker Delta 1 Delta 2 14 16 Delta 3 Delta 4 ony Delta 6 The markers are distributed among 3 tabs for a better overview By default the first marker is defined as a normal marker whereas all others are defined as delta markers with reference to the first marker All markers are assigned to trace 1 but only the first marker is active Selected EE 133 EIN 133 Marker Position X ValUC cccccsccccccedeessccecedetesencccntesdedecensntecadeetpeysedecesatbseacestpreeedeees 134 Makar Ke 134 Reference MAKET p E 134 biking to Another Marker oi a id oa ERE Ra cde ha ia de Rai d eda tee 134 Assigning the Marker to a Trace 134 dll Martens Onl EET atin eisai bee etal ei 135 Selected Marker Marker name The marker which is currently selected for editing is highlighted orange Remote command Marker selected via suffix lt m gt in remote commands Marker State Activates or
101. existing window while keeping its position index and window name To add a new window use the LAYout ADD WINDow command Parameters lt WindowName gt String containing the name of the existing window By default the name of a window is the same as its index To determine the name and index of all active windows use the LAYout CATalog WINDow query lt WindowType gt Type of result display you want to use in the existing window See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 276 for a list of available window types Example LAY REPL WIND 1 MTAB Replaces the result display in window 1 with a marker table LAYout SPLitter Index1 Index2 Position This command changes the position of a splitter and thus controls the size of the windows on each side of the splitter As opposed to the DISPlay WINDow lt n gt SIZE on page 275 command the LAYout SPLitter changes the size of all windows to either side of the splitter perma nently it does not just maximize a single window temporarily Note that windows must have a certain minimum size If the position you define conflicts with the minimum size of any of the affected windows the command will not work but does not return an error N User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 278 R amp S FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements a ES a a Configuring the Result Display y 100 x 100 y 100 102 12 dim x 0 y 0 x 100 Fig 11 1 SmartGrid coord
102. frequency span SENS FREQ STAR 10HZ SENS FREQ STOP 1MHZ User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 221 Configuring the Measurement Set the generator type to SMU04 with a frequency range of 100 kHz to 4GHz SYST COMM RDEV GEN TYPE SMUO4 Set the interface used to the GPIB address 28 SYST COMM RDEV GEN INT GPIB SYST COMM GPIB RDEV GEN ADDR 28 Activate the use of TTL synchronization to optimize measurement speed SYST COMM RDEV GEN LINK TTL Activate the use of the external reference frequency at 10 MHz on the generator SOUR EXT ROSC EXT Activate external generator control SOUR EXT STAT ON Set the generator output level to 10 dBm SOUR EXT POW 10DBM Set the frequency coupling to automatic SOUR EXT FREQ COUP STAT ON Define a series of frequencies one for each sweep point based on the current frequency at the RF input of the analyzer the generator frequency is half the frequency of the analyzer with an offset of 100 kHz analyzer start 10 Hz analyzer stop 1 MHz analyzer span 999 99 KHz generator frequency start 100 005 KHz generator frequency stop 600 KHz generator span 499 995 KHz SOUR EXT FREQ FACT NUM 1 SOUR EXT FREQ FACT DEN 2 SOUR EXT FREQ OFFS 100KHZ Perform a transmission measurement with direct connection between the generator and the analyzer and wait till the end SENS CORR METH TRAN SENS CORR COLL ACQ THR WAI Retrieve the measured frequenci
103. frequent adaptation due to small changes in the input signal you can define a hysteresis This setting defines an upper threshold the signal must exceed compared to the last mea surement before the reference level is adapted automatically Remote command SENSe ADJust CONFigure HYSTeresis UPPer on page 262 Lower Level Hysteresis When the reference level is adjusted automatically using the Auto Level function the internal attenuators and the preamplifier are also adjusted In order to avoid frequent adaptation due to small changes in the input signal you can define a hysteresis This setting defines a lower threshold the signal must fall below compared to the last mea surement before the reference level is adapted automatically Remote command SENSe ADJust CONFigure HYSTeresis LOWer on page 262 AF Auto Scale Activates automatic scaling of the y axis for AF measurements RF power and RF spec trum measurements are not affected by the auto scaling Remote command SENSe ADJust SCALe Y AUTO CONTinuous on page 263 E User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 126 R amp S9FSW K7 6 6 1 6 2 6 3 6 3 1 6 3 2 6 4 6 4 1 6 4 2 6 5 6 5 1 6 5 2 6 5 3 6 6 6 7 6 7 1 6 7 2 6 8 6 1 d Analysis Trace Settings Analysis General result analysis settings concerning the trace markers lines etc can be config ured via the Analysis button in the Overview They are identical to the analysis func tio
104. gt This command defines a fixed source frequency for the external generator Parameters lt Frequency gt Source frequency of the external generator RST 1100050000 Example SOUR EXT FREQ 10MHz Manual operation See Manual Source Frequency on page 76 SOURce EXTernal FREQuency COUPling STATe State This command couples the frequency of the external generator output to the R amp S FSW E N User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 213 R amp S FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements NS Se ee a es Configuring the Measurement Parameters lt State gt ON OFF 0 1 ON 1 Default setting a series of frequencies is defined one for each sweep point based on the current frequency at the RF input of the R amp S FSW the RF frequency range covers the currently defined span of the R amp S FSW unless limited by the range of the signal generator OFF 0 The generator uses a single fixed frequency defined by SOURce EXTernal FREQuency RST 1 Example SOUR EXT FREQ COUP ON Manual operation See Source Frequency Coupling on page 76 SOURce EXTernal FREQuency FACTor DENominator lt Value gt This command defines the denominator of the factor with which the analyzer frequency is multiplied in order to obtain the transmit frequency of the selected generator Select the multiplication factor such that the frequency range of the generator is not exceeded if the following formula is appli
105. if two different ranges are selected The handover frequency can be selected freely within the overlapping frequency range Remote command SENSe MIXer FREQuency HANDover on page 183 Band Defines the waveguide band or user defined band to be used by the mixer The start and stop frequencies of the selected band are displayed in the RF Start and RF Stop fields For a definition of the frequency range for the pre defined bands see table 11 2 The mixer settings for the user defined band can be selected freely The frequency range for the user defined band is defined via the harmonics configuration see Range 1 2 on page 60 Remote command SENSe MIXer HARMonic BAND VALue on page 184 RF Overrange If enabled the frequency range is not restricted by the band limits RF Start and RF Stop In this case the full LO range of the selected harmonics is used Remote command SENSe MIXer RFOVerrange STATe on page 187 Preset Band Restores the presettings for the selected band Note changes to the band and mixer settings are maintained even after using the PRESET function This function allows you to restore the original band settings Remote command SENSe MIXer HARMonic BAND PRESet on page 183 Mixer Type The R amp S FSW option B21 supports the following external mixer types 2 Port LO and IF data use the same port 9 Port LO and IF data use separate ports Remote command SEN
106. in Descriptions Note the following conventions used in the remote command descriptions e Command usage If not specified otherwise commands can be used both for setting and for querying parameters If a command can be used for setting or querying only or if it initiates an event the usage is stated explicitely e Parameter usage If not specified otherwise a parameter can be used to set a value and it is the result of a query Parameters required only for setting are indicated as Setting parameters Parameters required only to refine a query are indicated as Query parameters Parameters that are only returned as the result of a query are indicated as Return values e Conformity Commands that are taken from the SCPI standard are indicated as SCPI con firmed All commands used by the R amp S FSW follow the SCPI syntax rules e Asynchronous commands A command which does not automatically finish executing before the next command starts executing overlapping command is indicated as an Asynchronous com mand e Reset values RST Default parameter values that are used directly after resetting the instrument RST command are indicated as RST values if available e Manual operation p VV M 91 User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 167 R amp S9FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements 11 1 2 11 1 3
107. instrument and measurement settings are included in the header of the export file for result data If disabled only the pure result data from the selected traces and tables is exported See chapter 11 7 5 Reference ASCII File Export Format on page 290 for details Parameters lt State gt ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Include Instrument Measurement Settings on page 131 FORMat DEXPort TRACes Selection This command selects the data to be included in a data export file see MMEMory STORe lt n gt TRACe on page 284 Ee User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 285 R amp S9FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements 11 7 3 Retrieving Results Parameters Selection SINGIe Only a single trace is selected for export namely the one specified by the MMEMory STORe lt n gt TRACe command ALL Selects all active traces and result tables e g Result Summary marker peak list etc in the current application for export to an ASCII file The trace parameter for the MMEMory STORecn TRACe command is ignored RST SINGle Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Export all Traces and all Table Results on page 131 Retrieving Result Summary Values The result summary contains measurement values that are calculated from the trace data For details see Result Summary on page 23 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer FUNCtion ADEMod AFRequency RESuIt
108. into the upper BASEBAND INPUT connectors on the front panel of the R amp S FSW The detected information on the User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 34 R amp S9FSW K7 Measurement Basics 4 7 4 Receiving Data Input and Providing Data Output probe is displayed in the Probes tab of the Input dialog box individually for each con nector Single ended and differential probes Both single ended and differential probes are supported as input however since only one connector is occupied by a probe the Input Configuration setting for the Analog Baseband input source must be set to Single ended for all probes see Input config uration on page 71 Availability of probe input Analog baseband input from connected probes can only be analyzed in applications that support UO data processing and the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B7 1 such as the I Q Analyzer the Analog Demodulation application or one of the optional appli cations Frequency sweep measurements with probes Probes can also be used as an alternative method of providing RF input to the R amp S FSW In this case the probe must be connected to the BASEBAND INPUT connector and the input is redirected to the RF input path see chapter 4 7 2 RF Input from the Analog Baseband Connector on page 34 As opposed to common RF input processing a transducer is activated before the common process to compensate for the additional path of the redirected signal P
109. is displayed when you select the Overview icon which is available at the bottom of all softkey menus fet 000 dm Att AA AMT ZE e NRA E L tz Eran iE Ahs Analog Demod Input Ref Level Level Offset Daw AQT Demod Filter FM Time Domain Data Acquisition In addition to the main measurement settings the Overview provides quick access to the main settings dialog boxes Thus you can easily configure an entire Analog Demod ulation measurement channel from input over processing to output and analysis by step ping through the dialog boxes as indicated in the Overview In particular the Overview provides quick access to the following configuration dialog boxes listed in the recommended order of processing 1 Input Frontend See chapter 5 4 Input and Frontend Settings on page 54 2 Trigger See chapter 5 5 Trigger Configuration on page 93 3 Data Acquisition See chapter 5 6 Data Acquisition on page 101 4 Demod Display User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 53 R amp S9FSW K7 Configuration 5 4 Input and Frontend Settings See chapter 5 7 Demodulation Display on page 105 5 Demodulation Settings See chapter 5 8 Demodulation on page 105 6 Analysis See chapter 6 Analysis on page 127 7 Optionally Outputs See chapter 5 9 1 Output Settings on page 120 To configure settings gt Select any button in the Overview to open the corresponding dialog box Select a setting in the
110. leeds ie ENEE 278 LAY OUPREPIL CE WINDOW EE 278 EAY OURS Oe ele EE eeh EE 278 LAYOUUWIND W SMA ADD riirii er tie eere teneor ee ER R2 qe a ble Hang ned lates 280 p P B User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 275 R amp S FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements SS lM Configuring the Result Display LAYoutWINDoOwems DEMNIfy iain chau ku Ran nie n nn anh e tah Rete ER Rn nan 280 Be geleed 280 LAYO WINDOW A RE PLAC e a a a a AET Eaa 281 LAYout ADD WINDow lt WindowName gt lt Direction gt lt WindowType gt This command adds a window to the display This command is always used as a query so that you immediately obtain the name of the new window as a result To replace an existing window use the LAYout REPLace WINDow command Parameters lt WindowName gt String containing the name of the existing window the new window is inserted next to By default the name of a window is the same as its index To determine the name and index of all active windows use the LAYout CATalog WINDow query lt Direction gt LEFT RIGHt ABOVe BELow Direction the new window is added relative to the existing window lt WindowType gt text value Type of result display evaluation method you want to add See the table below for available parameter values Return values lt NewWindowName gt When
111. may be anywhere in the diagram Parameters lt RefPoint gt Numeric value that defines the horizontal position of the reference For frequency domain measurements it is a frequency in Hz For time domain measurements it is a point in time in s RST Fixed Reference OFF LEE User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 304 R amp S FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements REESEN Analyzing Results Example CALC DELT FUNC FIX RPO X 128 MHz Sets the frequency reference to 128 MHz Manual operation See Defining a Fixed Reference on page 136 See Defining a Reference Point on page 142 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion FlXed RPOint Y lt RefPointLevel gt This command defines the vertical position of the fixed delta marker reference point The coordinates of the reference may be anywhere in the diagram Parameters lt RefPoint gt Numeric value that defines the vertical position of the reference The unit and value range is variable RST Fixed Reference OFF Example CALC DELT FUNC FIX RPO Y 10dBm Sets the reference point level for delta markers to 10 dBm Manual operation See Defining a Fixed Reference on page 136 See Defining a Reference Point on page 142 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion FlXed RPOint Y OFFSet lt Offset gt This command defines a level offset for the fixed delta marker reference point Parameters lt Offset gt Numeric value RST 0 D
112. may be entered Before this command can be performed the conversion loss table must be selected see SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 191 This command is only available with option B21 External Mixer installed Parameters lt Freq gt numeric value The frequencies have to be sent in ascending order lt Level gt Example CORR CVL SEL LOSS TAB Ai Selects the conversion loss table CORR CVL DATA 1MHZ 30DB 2MHZ 40DB Manual operation See Position Value on page 67 E N User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 189 R amp S FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements REESEN Configuring the Measurement SENSe CORRection CVL HARMonic lt HarmOrder gt This command defines the harmonic order for which the conversion loss table is to be used This setting is checked against the current mixer setting before the table can be assigned to the range Before this command can be performed the conversion loss table must be selected see SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 191 This command is only available with option B21 External Mixer installed Parameters lt HarmOrder gt numeric value Range 2 to 65 Example CORR CVL SEL LOSS TAB Ai Selects the conversion loss table CORR CVL HARM 3 Manual operation See Harmonic Order on page 66 SENSe CORRection CVL MIXer Type This command defines the mixer name in the conversion loss table This setting is check
113. noise markers described elsewhere e CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion FIXed RPOint MAXimum PEAK CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion FIXed RPOint X cCALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion FIXed RPOint Y Remote commands exclusive to phase noise markers CALCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion PNOise AUTO eere 311 CALCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion PNOise RESUIt eere 311 CALCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion PNOise STATe eese 311 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion PNOise AUTO State This command turns an automatic peak search for the fixed reference marker at the end of a sweep on and off Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC DELT FUNC PNO AUTO ON Activates an automatic peak search for the reference marker in a phase noise measurement Manual operation See Defining a Reference Point on page 142 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion PNOise RESult This command queries the result of a phase noise measurement If necessary the command activates the measurement first Return values lt PhaseNoise gt Example CALC DELT2 FUNC PNO RES Outputs the result of phase noise measurement of the delta marker 2 Usage Query only Manual operation See Phase Noise Measurement State on page 141 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCt
114. noise ratio however When you switch off electronic attenuation the RF attenuation is automatically set to the same mode auto manual as the electronic attenuation was set to Thus the RF attenu ation may be setto automatic mode and the full attenuation is provided by the mechanical attenuator if possible Both the electronic and the mechanical attenuation can be varied in 1 dB steps Other entries are rounded to the next lower integer value If the defined reference level cannot be set for the given attenuation the reference level is adjusted accordingly and the warning Limit reached is displayed in the status bar Remote command INPut EATT STATe on page 230 INPut EATT AUTO on page 230 INPut EATT on page 229 Input Settings Some input settings affect the measured amplitude of the signal as well For details see chapter 5 4 1 Input Source Settings on page 55 Preamplifier option B24 Input Settings If option R amp S FSW B24 is installed a preamplifier can be activated for the RF input signal This function is not available for input from the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 For R amp S FSW 26 models the input signal is amplified by 30 dB if the preamplifier is activated For R amp S FSW 8 or 13 models the following settings are available You can use a preamplifier to analyze signals from DUTs with low input power Off Deactivates the preamplifier 15 dB The RF input signal is amplified
115. of an external generator Remote command SOURce EXTernal STATe on page 215 Source Power The output power of the external generator The default output power is 20 dBm The range is specified in the data sheet Remote command SOURce EXTernal POWer LEVel on page 215 Source Offset Constant level offset for the external generator Values from 200 dB to 200 dB in 1 dB steps are allowed The default setting is 0 dB Offsets are indicated by the LVL label in the channel bar see also chapter 4 7 4 8 Displayed Information and Errors on page 45 With this offset attenuators or amplifiers at the output connector of the external generator can be taken into account for the displayed output power values on screen or during data entry for example Positive offsets apply to an amplifier and negative offsets to an attenuator subsequent to the external generator Remote command SOURce POWer LEVel IMMediate OFFSet on page 216 Source Frequency Coupling Defines the frequency coupling mode between the R amp S FSW and the generator For more information on coupling frequencies see chapter 4 7 4 7 Coupling the Fre quencies on page 43 Auto Default setting a series of frequencies is defined one for each sweep point based on the current frequency at the RF input of the R amp S FSW see Automatic Source Frequency Numerator Denominator Off set on page 77 the RF frequency range covers the currently def
116. on page 274 Example SYST SEQ ON Activates the Sequencer INIT SEQ MODE SING Sets single sequence mode so each active measurement will be performed once INIT SEQ IMM Starts the sequential measurements Usage Event INITiate SEQuencer MODE Mode This command selects the way the R amp S FSW application performs measurements sequentially Before this command can be executed the Sequencer must be activated see SYSTem SEQuencer on page 274 A detailed programming example is provided in the Operating Modes chapter in the R amp S FSW User Manual e PY X User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 272 R amp S9FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements Capturing Data and Performing Sweeps Note In order to synchronize to the end of a sequential measurement using OPC OPC or WAI you must use SING1e Sequence mode For details on synchronization see the Remote Basics chapter in the R amp S FSW User Manual Parameters Mode Example SINGIe Each measurement is performed once regardless of the chan nel s sweep mode considering each channels sweep count until all measurements in all active channels have been performed CONTinuous The measurements in each active channel are performed one after the other repeatedly regardless of the channel s sweep mode i
117. on the deemphasis filter minimum demodulation bandwidth is required for an error less than 0 5 dB up to a maximum AF frequency The following table shows the dependencies Deemphasis us 25 us 50 us 75 us 750 us Max AF frequency 25 kHz 12 kHz 8 kHz 800 Hz Required demodulation bandwidth 2200kHz 2100kHz 250kHz 2 6 4 kHz For higher AF frequencies the demodulation bandwidth must be increased Remote command SENSe FILTer lt n gt DEMPhasis STATe on page 256 SENSe FILTer lt n gt DEMPhasis TCONstant on page 255 Deactivating all AF Filters The All Filter Off button deactivates all AF filters for the selected evaluation Remote command SENSe FILTer lt n gt AOFF on page 254 Scaling The scaling parameters define the range of the demodulated data to be displayed They are configured in the Scaling tab of the Demodulation Settings dialog box gt To display this dialog box do one of the following e Select the Demod Settings button in the Analog Demodulation Overview and select the Scaling tab e Select the MEAS CONFIG key and then the Scale Config softkey Depending on the evaluation AF or RF display the settings vary AF EVA BON GE 115 RF Ey AW EE 118 AF Evaluation These settings are only available for AF evaluations I User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 115 R amp S FSW K7 Configuration Demodulation Demod Spectrum AfFilter Sca
118. operation See Using Electronic Attenuation Option B25 on page 88 Configuring a Preamplifier CO E E 230 iint ALN E 231 INPut GAIN STATe lt State gt This command turns the preamplifier on and off The command requires option R amp S FSW B24 This function is not available for input from the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 For R amp S FSW 26 models the input signal is amplified by 30 dB if the preamplifier is activated _L_L________ N User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 230 R amp S FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements REESEN Configuring the Measurement For R amp S FSW 8 or 13 models the preamplification is defined by INPut GAIN VALue Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example INP GAIN STAT ON Switches on 30 dB preamplification Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Input Settings on page 88 See Preamplifier option B24 on page 88 INPut GAIN VALue lt Gain gt This command selects the preamplification level if the preamplifier is activated INP GAIN STAT ON see INPut GAIN STATe on page 230 The command requires option R amp S FSW B24 Parameters lt Gain gt 15 dB 30 dB The availability of preamplification levels depends on the R amp S FSW model e R amp S FSW8 15dB and 30 dB R amp S FSW13 15dB and 30 dB R amp S FSW26 30 dB All other values are rounded to the nearest of these two RST OFF Example INP GAIN VAL
119. or the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 For frequency sweeps the third IF represents the start frequency The trigger bandwidth at the third IF depends on the RBW and sweep type For measurements on a fixed frequency e g zero span or UO measurements the third IF represents the center frequency The trigger threshold depends on the defined trigger level as well as on the RF attenu ation and preamplification For details on available trigger levels and trigger bandwidths see the data sheet This trigger source is only available for RF input Remote command TRIG SOUR IFP see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 243 Baseband Power Trigger Source Defines triggering on the baseband power for baseband input via the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 or the Analog Baseband interface R amp S FSW B7 1 For more information on the the Digital Baseband Interface or the Analog Baseband Interface see the R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input User Manual Remote command TRIG SOUR BBP see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 243 Digital I Q Trigger Source For applications that process UO data such as the I Q Analyzer or optional applications and only if the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 is available Defines triggering of the measurement directly via the LVDS connector In the selection list you must specify which general purpose bit GPO to GP5 will provide the trigger data The fo
120. page 209 Een User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 81 R amp S FSW K7 Configuration Input and Frontend Settings Continuous Value Update If activated the power sensor data is updated continuously during a sweep with a long sweep time and even after a single sweep has completed This function cannot be activated for individual sensors If the power sensor is being used as a trigger See Using the power sensor as an external trigger on page 84 continuous update is not possible this setting is ignored Remote command SENSe PMETer lt p gt UPDate STATe on page 209 Select Selects the individual power sensor for usage if power measurement is generally activa ted State function The detected serial numbers of the power sensors connected to the instrument are provided in a selection list For each of the four available power sensor indexes Power Sensor 1 Power Sensor 4 which correspond to the tabs in the configuration dialog one of the detected serial numbers can be assigned The physical sensor is thus assigned to the configuration setting for the selected power sensor index By default serial numbers not yet assigned are automatically assigned to the next free power sensor index for which Auto Assignment is selected Alternatively you can assign the sensors manually by deactivating the Auto option and selecting a serial number from the list Remote command SENSe PMETer lt p gt STATe on
121. page 209 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice PMETer p DEFine on page 203 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice PMETer lt p gt CONFigure AUTO STATe on page 202 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice PMETer COUNt on page 202 Zeroing Power Sensor Starts zeroing of the power sensor For details on the zeroing process refer to the R amp S FSW User Manual Remote command CALibration PMETer lt p gt ZERO AUTO ONCE on page 204 Frequency Manual Defines the frequency of the signal to be measured The power sensor has a memory with frequency dependent correction factors This allows extreme accuracy for signals of a known frequency Remote command SENSe PMETer p FREQuency on page 207 Frequency Coupling Selects the coupling option The frequency can be coupled automatically to the center frequency of the instrument or to the frequency of marker 1 Remote command SENSe PMETer p FREQuency LINK on page 207 E a User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 82 R amp S FSW K7 Configuration Input and Frontend Settings Unit Scale Selects the unit with which the measured power is to be displayed Available units are dBm dB W and If dB or is selected the display is relative to the reference value that is defined with either the Meas gt Ref setting or the Reference Value setting Remote command UNIT lt n gt PMETer lt p gt POWer on page 210 UNIT lt n gt PMETer lt p gt POWer R
122. points of a lower limit line SS O 9 User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 314 R amp S FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements RAM P G H M Analyzing Results Parameters lt LimitLinePoints gt Variable number of level values Note that the number of vertical values has to be the same as the number of horizontal values set with CALCulate LIMit lt k gt CONTrol DATA If not the R amp S FSW either adds missing val ues or ignores surplus values The unit depends on CALCulate LIMit lt k gt UNIT on page 317 RST Limit line state is OFF Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Data points on page 150 CALCulate LIMit lt k gt LOWer MARGin lt Margin gt This command defines an area around a lower limit line where limit check violations are still tolerated Parameters lt Margin gt numeric value RST 0 Default unit dB Manual operation See Margin on page 149 CALCulate LIMit lt k gt LOWer MODE lt Mode gt This command selects the vertical limit line scaling Parameters lt Mode gt ABSolute Limit line is defined by absolute physical values The unit is variable RELative Limit line is defined by relative values related to the reference level dB RST ABSolute
123. rear panel of the instrument Parameters Source INTernal the internal reference is used EXTernal the external reference is used if none is available an error flag is displayed in the status bar RST INT Example SOUR EXT ROSC EXT Switches to external reference oscillator Manual operation See Reference on page 74 e P P User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 216 R amp S FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements AME J Y Configuring the Measurement SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB RDEVice GENerator ADDRess Number Changes the IEC IEEE bus address of the external generator Parameters Number Range 0 to 30 RST 28 Example SYST COMM GPIB RDEV GEN ADDR 15 Manual operation See GPIB Address TCP IP Address on page 74 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice GENerator INTerface Type Defines the interface used for the connection to the external generator This command is only available if external generator control is active see SOURce EXTernal STATe on page 215 Parameters Type GPIB TCPip RST GPIB Example SYST COMM RDEV GEN INT TCP Manual operation See Interface on page 74 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice GENerator LINK Type This command se
124. relative scale The R amp S FSW uses the threshold for the limit check if the limit line violates the threshold Parameters Limit Numeric value The unit depends on CALCulate LIMit k UNIT on page 317 RST 200 Default unit dBm Manual operation See Threshold on page 149 E MN User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 319 R amp S FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements SS SSS SSS SSS Sa a Analyzing Results 11 8 2 2 Managing Limit Lines ee HIERT eg eg 320 CALC ulate LIMI KA COPY EE 320 RR IERT ee EE 320 CALCUlate LIMIR STATE EE 320 GALGulate LIMitsk gt TRAGest gt CHEGK eegend tisacevidesadaansccnctesnaateacdndaataareacaecdsaaas 321 CALCulate LIMit ACTive This command queries the names of all active limit lines Return values lt LimitLines gt String containing the names of all active limit lines in alphabetical order Example CALC LIM ACT Queries the names of all active limit lines Usage Query only Manual operation See Visibility on page 146 CALCulate LIMit lt k gt COPY lt Line gt This command copies a limit line Parameters lt Line gt 1to8 number of the new limit line lt name gt String containing the name of the limit line Example CALC LIM1 COPY 2 Copies limit line 1 to line 2 CALC LIM1 COPY FM2 Copies limit line 1 to a new line named FM2 Manual operation See Copy Line on page 147 CALCulate LIMit lt k gt DELete This comma
125. right of the current peak Remote command CALCulate lt n gt CALCulate lt n gt ELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum LEFT on page 302 ARKer lt m gt MAXimum LEFT on page 301 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum NEXT on page 302 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum NEXT on page 301 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum RIGHt on page 303 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum RIGHt on page 301 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum LEFT on page 303 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum LEFT on page 301 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MINimum NEXT on page 303 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum NEXT on page 302 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MINimum RIGHt on page 304 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum RIGHt on page 302 Peak Excursion Defines the minimum level value by which a signal must rise or fall so that it will be identified as a maximum or a minimum by the search functions Entries from 0 dB to 80 dB are allowed the resolution is 0 1 dB The default setting for the peak excursion is 6 dB Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer PEXCursion on page 300 6 4 2 Positioning Functions The following functions set the currently selected marker to the result of a peak search or set other characteristic values to the current marker value These functions are avail able as softkeys in the Marker To me
126. sheet Remote command SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution on page 236 p H R User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 102 R amp S FSW K7 Configuration aaa SS SS SS Data Acquisition 5 6 2 Sweep Settings The sweep settings define how often data from the input signal is acquired and then demodulated They are configured via the SWEEP key or in the Sweep tab of the Data Acquisition dialog box gt To display this dialog box do one of the following e Select the Data Acquisition button in the Analog Demodulation Overview and switch to the Sweep tab e Select the SWEEP key and then the Sweep Config softkey Bandwidth Sweep Meas Time AQT 162 5 us Sweep Points 1001 Sweep Count ETer Telife Siegi 1 FM Time Domain Continuous Sweep RUN ere KREE 103 Single Sweep RUN GINGLE AA 104 Conine SINGIS S WEED EE 104 eeh 2 tecti estat m M etae d ei ed Eege 104 Measurement Time AQT 2 cce nieder une Dern ez ek nnne nennen pn enu 104 T jeMziep p 105 SWeep Average COL o Terre ee rear MEL aede id e rbd decre alee 105 Continuous Sweep RUN CONT After triggering starts the sweep and repeats it continuously until stopped This is the default setting While the measurement is running the Continuous Sweep softkey and the RUN CONT key
127. span and thus only if an AF spectrum win dow is displayed If either value deviates strongly from the expected result make sure the demodulation bandwidth is defined correctly see Determining the demodulation bandwidth p V User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 164 R amp S FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements 11 Remote Commands for Analog Demodula tion Measurements The commands required to perform measurements in the Analog Demodulation appli cation in a remote environment are described here The R amp S FSW must already be set up for remote operation in a network For details see the R amp S FSW User Manual A programming example at the end of the remote commands description demonstrates the most important commands in a typical application scenario see chapter 11 11 Pro gramming Example on page 328 Status registers The R amp S FSW K7 option uses the status registers of the base unit except for the STATus QUEStionable ACPLimit register For a description see the R amp S FSW User Manual General R amp S FSW Remote Commands The application independant remote commands for general tasks on the R amp S FSW are also available for Analog Demodulation measurements and are described in the R amp S FSW User Manual In particular this comprises the following functionality e M
128. sss 114 ASCII trace export ssssssss serere 290 Configuration Softkey s we 112 Attenuation cccccccccecccsecescccesescsces neret 87 Deactivating we 115 Auto Se 87 Deemphasis sssees 114 Displayed chup cente eerte 13 High pass s nenne eese 113 Electronic essese tette 88 Low pass iss sat 113 Manual 87 Weighting ENNEN 114 Option B25 5 custo em Pere bete 88 AF full span Protective MEME 33 Softkey sss 110 Protective remote sssssssseees 177 AF span Audio frequency Displayed NEEN 14 Sw pM 15 Manual Softkey ai 110 Auto all Remote control eene 202 Softkey ienasi aient des 125 AF spectrum eee 109 Auto frequency AF start SOflKOy ridire dad cde d diets 125 Sc M 110 Auto ID AF stop External Mixer B21 remote Control 181 Softkey irsin terp tacirin aE 110 External Mixer B21 62 AF trigger EEN 29 31 Threshold External Mixer B21 sses 62 All Functions Off Threshold External Mixer B21 remote control SOMKOY m lean 143 182 AM Offline Auto level Softkey EEN 97 Hysteresis schen ton n fes ente ta decies 126 Amplitude Reference level 87 91 126 Analog Baseband Interface B71 settings 89 SoflKey tette g et seca ier 87 91 126 Configuration Softkey Automatic coupling Scaling Frequencies external generator
129. the fixed reference marker Remote command CALCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion FIXed RPOint Y on page 305 CALCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion FIXed RPOint X on page 304 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion FIXed RPOint MAXimum PEAK on page 304 Link Time Marker Links the markers in all time domain diagrams Remote command CALCulate MARKer lt m gt LINK on page 299 Link AF Spectrum Marker Links the markers in all AF spectrum displays Remote command CALCulate MARKer lt m gt LINK on page 299 EEUU RA N User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 136 R amp S FSW K7 Analysis Marker Search Settings and Positioning Functions 6 4 Marker Search Settings and Positioning Functions Several functions are available to set the marker to a specific position very quickly and easily or to use the current marker position to define another characteristic value In order to determine the required marker position searches may be performed The search results can be influenced by special settings Most marker positioning functions and the search settings are available in the MKR menu Search settings are also available via the MARKER key or in the vertical Marker Con fig tab of the Analysis dialog box horizontal Search Settings tab The remote commands required to define these settings are described in chapter 11 8 1 Working with Markers Remotely on page 292 e Marker Searc
130. the same name as predefined standards Usage Event Manual operation See Setup Standard on page 52 See Restore Standard Files on page 53 p P 1 User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 176 R amp S9FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements 11 4 2 11 4 2 1 Configuring the Measurement SENSe ADEMod PRESet STORe Standard This command saves the current Analog Demodualtion measurement configuration Standard definitions are stored in an xml file The default directory for Analog Demodu altion standards is C r_s instr user predefined AdemodPredefined Parameters Standard String containing the file name You can save the file in a subdirectory of the directory mentioned above In that case you have to include the relative path to the file Manual operation See Setup Standard on page 52 See Save Standard on page 52 Configuring the Input E il EE 177 e Using External MIXOIS daideseencdeiedtetiiees i pacieleieninicteade nada 180 e Configuring Input via the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 193 e Configuring Digital Q Input and Output dieit tree 196 HUE dco aoo CR 199 e Working witht Power SeiSols ueavatree cicero bea sacac ei te Place neu dus 202 External Generator Contkol ecrire rhe n tae ee roa dene eet e e Y p
131. to Spectrum3 INSTrument SELect lt ChannelType gt Selects the channel type for the current channel See also INSTrument CREate NEW on page 172 For a list of available channel types see table 11 1 Parameters lt ChannelType gt ADEMod Analog Demodulation application R amp S FSW K7 SYSTem PRESet CHANnel EXECute This command restores the default instrument settings in the current channel Use INST SEL to select the channel Example INST Spectrum2 Selects the channel for Spectrum2 SYST PRES CHAN EXEC Restores the factory default settings to the Spectrum2 channel Usage Event Manual operation See Preset Channel on page 54 Configuring the Measurement The following remote commands are required to configure an Analog Demodulation measurement Specific commands Managing Standard Settings 222 ccccecccccccseeccceessnaseedeeedeaeacseedenanaeceseraaaeieceess 176 EE E te t ebe 177 e Configuring the QUMUN EEA 223 Frequency Settings EE 225 I User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 175 R amp S9FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements 11 4 1 Configuring the Measurement e Configuring the Vertical Axis Amplitude Scaling sees 227 e Configuring Data ACquisillot 2 erred ihi tale Reid ARNAN 233 EERSTEN RARO ERE nde 237 e Confournng Demod laligli 2 anoo eio Eee ie Fa Eee Ho aite hn anie
132. to detect various incidents in your demodulated signals Optionally the trigger signal used by the R amp S FSW can be output to a connected device and an external trigger signal from a connected device can be used by the R amp S FSW Trigger settings are identical to the base unit except for the available trigger sources Gating is not available for Analog Demodulation measurements For background information on trigger settings trigger output and working with external triggers see the R amp S FSW User Manual The trigger settings are configured in the Trigger dialog box LEE User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 93 R amp S FSW K7 Configuration Trigger Configuration Trigger Source Trigger In Out Trigger Source IF Power Trigger Level IbgeT emo Vial 0 0 s Trigger Offset Slope Rising Hysteresis Holdoff gt To display this dialog box do one of the following e Select the Trigger button in the Analog Demodulation Overview e Select the TRIG key and then the Trigger Config softkey HR lee Source SONOS E 94 Trigger Input and Output SettingS 0 22 ccceeecccccceedeceeeesdceeceeesaaaseecneesedanaecneeeeade 99 5 5 1 Trigger Source Settings The trigger source settings are configured in the Trigger Source tab of the Trigger dialog box liis EE 95 DM EE 95 L External Trigger 219 95 d et 95 Mi alor NNI RT 96 L Baseband Power 96 Ur A CNN E A i 96 L FM AM PM RF Offline 97 o UNT Tc PERS 97
133. used for demodulation also apply to the online output seechapter 5 8 3 AF Filter on page 112 Remote command OUTPut ADEMod ONLine AF CFRequency on page 224 Phones Output In addition to sending the output to the IF VIDEO DEMOD OUTPUT connector on the rear panel of the R amp S FSW it can also be output to headphones connected on the front panel PHONES connector CAUTION Risk of hearing damage To protect your hearing make sure that the volume setting is not too high before putting on the headphones Note If you do not hear output on the connected headphones despite having enabled both general online demodulation output see Online Demodulation Output State e s User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 124 R amp S FSW K7 Configuration a SS SS SS d mie J Viger Automatic Settings on page 123 and Phones Output adjust the volume setting using the rotary knob on the front panel Remote command OUTPut ADEMod ONLine PHONes on page 224 5 10 Automatic Settings Some settings can be adjusted by the R amp S FSW automatically according to the current measurement settings To activate the automatic adjustment of a setting select the corresponding function in the AUTO SET menu or in the configuration dialog box for the setting where available MSRA operating mode In MSRA opera
134. which can also be connected to the BASEBAND INPUT I connector Frequency sweep measurements on probe input You can perform RF measurements measurements in the time or frequency domain by connecting a probe to the BASEBAND INPUT I connector and switching the input source to this connector in the RF input configuration see Input Connector on page 57 The probe s attenuation is compensated automatically by the R amp S FSW using a trans ducer named Probe on Baseband Input The probe can only be connected on I as only input at the connector can be redirected to the RF path A comment is assigned that includes the type name and serial number of the detected probe The transducer is deleted as soon as the probe is disconnected For details on transducers see the General Instrument Setup section in the R amp S FSW User Manual For more information on the BASEBAND INPUT connector R amp S FSW B7 1 see the R amp S FSW R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input User Manual 4 7 3 Using Probes As an alternative means of input to the R amp S FSW active probes from Rohde amp Schwarz can be connected to the optional BASEBAND INPUT connectors if the Analog Baseband Interface option R amp S FSW B71 is installed These probes allow you to perform voltage measurements very flexibly and precisely on all sorts of devices to be tested without interfering with the signal Connecting probes Probes are automatically detected when you plug them
135. 0 02 13 40 R amp S FSW K7 Measurement Basics Receiving Data Input and Providing Data Output as required If normalization is activated NOR is displayed in the channel bar next to the indication that an external generator is being used Ext Gen The normalized trace from the calibration sweep is a constant 0 dB line as lt calibration trace gt lt reference trace gt 0 As long as the same settings are used for measurement as for calibration the normalized measurement results should not contain any inherent frequency or power distortions Thus the measured DUT values are very accurate Approximate normalization As soon as any of the calibration measurement settings are changed the stored refer ence trace will no longer be identical to the new measurement results However if the measurement settings do not deviate too much the measurement results can still be normalized approximately using the stored reference trace This is indicated by the APX label in the channel bar instead of NOR This is the case if one or more of the following values deviate from the calibration settings e coupling RBW VBW SWT e reference level RF attenuation e Start or stop frequency e Output level of external generator e detector max peak min peak sample etc e frequency deviation at a maximum of 1001 points within the set sweep limits corre sponds to a doubling of the span Differences in level settings between
136. 0 02 13 43 R amp S FSW K7 Measurement Basics SSS ees Receiving Data Input and Providing Data Output Source Freq RE Une Offset Denominator Output frequency of the generator 4 1 where F Generator OUtput frequency of the generator Fanalyzer Current frequency at the RF input of the R amp S FSW Numerator multiplication factor for the current analyzer frequency Denominator division factor for the current analyzer frequency Forse frequency offset for the current analyzer frequency for example for frequency converting measurements or harmonics measurements The value range for the offset depends on the selected generator The default setting is 0 Hz Offsets other than 0 Hz are indicated by the FRQ label in the channel bar see also chapter 4 7 4 8 Displayed Information and Errors on page 45 Swept frequency range The Fanalyzer Values for the calibration sweep start with the start frequency and end with the stop frequency defined in the Frequency settings of the R amp S FSW The resulting output frequencies Result Frequency Start and Result Frequency Stop are displayed in the External Generator Measurement Configuration for reference If the resulting frequency range exeeds the allowed ranges of the signal generator an error message is displayed see chapter 4 7 4 8 Displayed Information and Errors on page 45 and the Result Frequency Start and Result Frequency Stop values are corrected to compl
137. 0 02 13 9 Conventions Used in the Documentation The term select may refer to any of the described methods i e using a finger on the touchscreen a mouse pointer in the display or a key on the instrument or on a keyboard R amp S FSW K7 Welcome to the Analog Demodulation Application Starting the Analog Demodulation Application 2 Welcome to the Analog Demodulation Appli cation The R amp S FSW K7 AM FM PM measurement demodulator option converts the R amp S FSW into an analog modulation analyzer for amplitude frequency or phase modulated sig nals It measures not only characteristics of the useful modulation but also factors such as residual FM or synchronous modulation The digital signal processing in the R amp S FSW used in the Spectrum application for digital IF filters is also ideally suited for demodulating AM FM or PM signals The firmware option R amp S FSW K7 provides the necessary measurement functions The R amp S FSW K7 features e AM FM and PM demodulation with various result displays Modulation signal versus time Spectrum of the modulation signal FFT RF signal power versus time Spectrum of the RF signal e Determining maximum minimum and average or current values in parallel over a selected number of measurements e Maximum accuracy and temperature stability due to sampling digitization already at the IF and digital down conversion to the baseband I Q e Error free AM to F
138. 00 0 MHz CF 500 0 MHz 4 Result Summary Carrier Power 10 33 dBm Carrier Offset 694 78 Hz iPeak RMS Mod Freq SINAD Peak Peak FM 52 799 kHz 51 025 kHz 51 912 kHz 34 931 kHz 10 000 kHz Fig 9 2 Auto scaled measurement of 10 signal periods continuous 7 Display the RF spectrum of the measured signal to determine the required demod ulation bandwidth Select the Display Config softkey and add an RF Spectrum window to the display User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 159 R amp S FSW K7 Measurement Example Demodulating an FM Signal MultiView 33 Spectrum Analog Demod Ref Level 0 00 dBm Att 10d8 AQT 10ms DBW z Freq 500 0 MHz CF 500 0 MHz _ 0 1 0 ms 5 RF Spectrum 1AP Clrw CF 500 0 MHz 1004 pts Span 5 0 MHz Summary Carrier Power 10 40 dBm Carrier Offset 642 31 Hz Peak Peak HU RMS Mod Freq SINAD 52 705 kHz 51 811 kHz 52 258 kHz 34 984 kHz 10 0000 kHz Fig 9 3 RF spectrum of FM signal with default demodulation bandwidth 5 MHz 8 As you can see in the default demodulation bandwidth of 5 MHz is much too large the actual signal takes up only a small part of the displayed range That means that any noise or additional signals apart from the FM signal of interest may be included in the measured results Select the Demod BW softkey and reduce the value to 200 kHz MultiView SS Spectrum Analog Demod Ref Level 0 00 d m RBW Att 10dB AQT 10ms DBW 200 Freq 500 0 MHz 5 RF Spectrum C
139. 11 1 4 Introduction If the result of a remote command can also be achieved in manual operation a link to the description is inserted Long and Short Form The keywords have a long and a short form You can use either the long or the short form but no other abbreviations of the keywords The short form is emphasized in upper case letters Note however that this emphasis only serves the purpose to distinguish the short from the long form in the manual For the instrument the case does not matter Example SENSe FREQuency CENTer is the same as SENS FREQ CENT Numeric Suffixes Some keywords have a numeric suffix if the command can be applied to multiple instan ces of an object In that case the suffix selects a particular instance e g a measurement window Numeric suffixes are indicated by angular brackets n next to the keyword If you don t quote a suffix for keywords that support one a 1 is assumed Example DISPlay WINDow lt 1 4 gt ZOOM STATe enables the zoom in a particular mea surement window selected by the suffix at WINDow DISPlay WINDow4 ZOOM STATe ON refers to window 4 Optional Keywords Some keywords are optional and are only part of the syntax because of SCPI compliance You can include them in the header or not Note that if an optional keyword has a numeric suffix and you need to use the suffix you have to include the optional keyword Otherwise the suffix
140. 1173 9240 02 13 297 R amp S FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements Analyzing Results To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchronization to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single sweeps See also INI Tiate CONTinuous on page 271 The unit depends on the application of the command Table 11 6 Analog demodulation measurements Parameter measuring function or result display Output unit AM result display R amp S FSW K7 lin dB log FM result display R amp S FSW K7 Hz lin dB log PM result display R amp S FSW K7 rad deg lin dB log RF result display R amp S FSW K7 dB Range Log or Range Linear Range Linear Return values lt Position gt Position of the delta marker in relation to the reference marker or the fixed reference Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode INIT WAI Starts a sweep and waits for its end CALC DELT2 ON Switches on delta marker 2 CALC DELT2 Y Outputs measurement value of delta marker 2 Usage Query only 11 8 1 2 General Marker Settings The following commands control general marker functionality See also Fixed Reference Marker Settings on page 304 CALC ulate MARKER e EE 298 GALGCulate MARKer m dI NK iinan AE AEAEE RENAE RATON EEEa 299 DISPlay MTABle CALCulate MARKer X SSIZe lt StepSize gt
141. 13 51 R amp S FSW K7 Configuration a a SHe PH Configuration According to Digital Standards Digital standard settings are available via the Digital Standards softkey in the MEAS menu or the Overview PHS WS SEAT ANG EE 52 L Selecting the Storage Location Drive Path Elles ecce 52 GA 52 Er 005 EE 52 L Save Standard sided A tee ade baa d 52 L Delete Standard eoe ene RE E Sabe de e aues ainiaan 52 L Restore Standard Eiles tnter snae 53 Setup Standard Opens a file selection dialog box to select a predefined setup file The predefined settings are configured in the R amp S FSW Analog Demodulation application This allows for quick and easy configuration for commonly performed measurements Selecting the Storage Location Drive Path Files Setup Standard Select the storage location of the settings file on the instrument or an external drive The Drive indicates the internal C or any connected external drives e g a USB stor age device The Path contains the drive and the complete file path to the currently selected folder The Files list contains all subfolders and files of the currently selected path The default storage location for the settings files is C FSW user predefined AdemodPredefined File Name Setup Standard Contain the name of the data file without the path or extension For details on the file name and location see the Data Management topic in the R amp
142. 182 SENSe MIXer STATe State Activates or deactivates the use of a connected external mixer as input for the measure ment This command is only available if the R amp S FSW B21 option is installed and an external mixer is connected E N User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 180 R amp S FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements NN ee a ee Configuring the Measurement Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example MIX ON Manual operation See External Mixer State on page 58 SENSe MIXer BIAS HIGH lt BiasSetting gt This command defines the bias current for the high second range This command is only available if the external mixer is active see SENSe MIXer STATe on page 180 Parameters lt BiasSetting gt RST 0 0A Default unit A Manual operation See Bias Settings on page 62 SENSe MIXer BIAS LOW lt BiasSetting gt This command defines the bias current for the low first range This command is only available if the external mixer is active see SENSe MIXer STATe on page 180 Parameters lt BiasSetting gt RST 0 0A Default unit A Manual operation See Bias Settings on page 62 SENSe MIXer LOPower Level This command specifies the LO level of the external mixer s LO port Parameters Level numeric value Range 13 0 dBm to 17 0 dBm Increment 0 1 dB RST 15 5 dBm Example MIX LOP 16 0dBm Manual operation See LO
143. 2 13 125 R amp S FSW K7 Configuration REENEN Automatic Settings Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level Automatically determines the optimal reference level for the current input data At the same time the internal attenuators and the preamplifier for analog baseband input the fullscale level are adjusted so the signal to noise ratio is optimized while signal com pression clipping and overload conditions are minimized In order to do so a level measurement is performed to determine the optimal reference level You can change the measurement time for the level measurement if necessary see Changing the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Manual on page 126 Remote command SENSe ADJust LEVel on page 262 Resetting the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Auto Resets the measurement duration for automatic settings to the default value Remote command SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation MODE on page 261 Changing the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Manual This function allows you to change the measurement duration for automatic setting adjustments Enter the value in seconds Remote command SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation MODE on page 261 SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation on page 261 Upper Level Hysteresis When the reference level is adjusted automatically using the Auto Level function the internal attenuators and the preamplifier are also adjusted In order to avoid
144. 225 Center Frequency Stepsize Defines the step size of the center frequency The step size can be coupled to the demodulation bandwidth or it can be manually set to a fixed value 0 1 Demod Sets the step size for the center frequency to 10 of the demodulation BW bandwidth This is the default setting User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 92 R amp S9FSW K7 Configuration 5 5 Trigger Configuration 0 5 Demod Sets the step size for the center frequency to 50 of the demodulation Bw bandwidth X Demod Sets the step size for the center frequency to a manually defined factor Bw of the demodulation bandwidth The X Factor defines the percentage of the demodulation bandwidth Values between 1 and 100 in steps of 1 are allowed The default setting is 10 9o Center Sets the step size to the value of the center frequency and removes the coupling of the step size to the demodulation bandwidth The used value is indicated in the Value field Manual Defines a fixed step size for the center frequency Enter the step size in the Value field Remote command SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK on page 226 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK FACTor on page 226 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP on page 225 Trigger Configuration Triggering means to capture the interesting part of the signal Choosing the right trigger type and configuring all trigger settings correctly allows you
145. 30 Switches on 30 dB preamplification Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Input Settings on page 88 See Preamplifier option B24 on page 88 11 4 5 4 Scaling the Y Axis DISPlay WINDow n ETRAGe Y SCALe iiie caedere ea di e 231 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe AUTO ONCE A 232 DiSblavlfWiNDow nzTRACevtSCALelMODE eene nennen 232 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe Y SCALe RPOSition esee esee 232 DISPlayEWINDow n T TRAGe Y SPAGCiIng teniente eurn tto nnt R RR n nen aiia 233 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe Range This command defines the display range of the y axis User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 231 R amp S FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements REESEN Configuring the Measurement Parameters lt Range gt If the y axis shows the power the unit is dB with a range from 10 dB to 200 dB If the y axis shows the frequency the unit is Hz with a variable range RST 100 dB frequency domain 500 kHz time domain Example DISP TRAC Y 110dB Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Range on page 118 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe Y SCALe AUTO ONCE Automatic scaling of the y axis is performed once then switched off again Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Auto Scale Once on page 118 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe Y SCALe MODE Mode This command selects the type of scaling of the y axis When the di
146. 30 dBm for power sensor 2 Manual operation See Reference Value on page 83 CALCulate lt n gt PMETer lt p gt RELative MAGNitude AUTO ONCE This command sets the current measurement result as the reference level for relative measurements Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters ONCE Example CALC PMET2 REL AUTO ONCE Takes the current measurement value as reference value for rel ative measurements for power sensor 2 Usage Event Manual operation See Setting the Reference Level from the Measurement Meas gt Ref on page 83 CALCulate lt n gt PMETer lt p gt RELative STATe lt State gt This command turns relative power sensor measurements on and off Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC PMET2 REL STAT ON Activates the relative display of the measured value for power sensor 2 FETCh PMETer lt p gt This command queries the results of power sensor measurements Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index SSS a User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 205 R amp S FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements AMEN K H P ee ae ee ee ee Configuring the Measurement Return values lt Level gt Power level that has been measured by a power sensor The unit is either dBm absolute measurements or dB relati
147. 303 Search Next Minimum Sets the selected marker delta marker to the next higher minimum of the selected trace If no marker is active marker 1 is activated Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m MINimum NEXT on page 302 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MINimum NEXT on page 303 Emr A User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 139 R amp S FSW K7 Analysis Marker Function Configuration 6 5 Marker Function Configuration Special marker functions can be selected via the Marker Function dialog box To display this dialog box do one of the following e Press the MKR FUNC key then select the Select Marker Function softkey e Inthe Overview select Analysis and switch to the vertical Marker Function Con fig tab Select Marker Function Reference Fixed All Functions Off Traces Marker Marker Functions Peak List Lines Valls AM Spectrum Not all marker functions are available for all evaluations The following table indicates which functions are available for which evaluations Evaluation n dB down Phase Noise Reference Fixed AF time S X AF spectrum X X X RF time X X RF spectrum X X X For details on the special marker functions see the R amp S FSW User Manual The remote commands required to define these settings are described in chap
148. 4 3 times the analyzer frequency Manual operation See Automatic Source Frequency Numerator Denominator Offset on page 77 SOURce EXTernal FREQuency OFFSet lt Offset gt This command defines the frequency offset of the generator with reference to the ana lyzer frequency Select the offset such that the frequency range of the generator is not exceeded if the following formula is applied to the start and stop frequency of the analyzer Source Freq mp HIE onset Denominator Parameters lt Offset gt numeric value specified in Hz kHz MHz or GHz rounded to the nearest Hz RST 0 Hz Example SOUR EXT FREQ OFFS 10HZ Sets an offset of the generator output frequency compared to the analyzer frequency of 10 Hz Manual operation See Automatic Source Frequency Numerator Denominator Offset on page 77 SOURce EXTernal POWer LEVel Level This command sets the output power of the selected generator Parameters Level numeric value RST 20 dBm Example SOUR EXT POW 30dBm Sets the generator level to 30 dBm Manual operation See Source Power on page 76 SOURce EXTernal STATe State This command activates or deactivates the connected external generator p V User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 215 R amp S FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measureme
149. 56 gt lt float gt 134 lt float gt lt float gt 142 lt float gt lt float gt 140 lt float gt lt ArrayOfFloat gt lt Min gt lt Max gt lt ArrayOfFloat length 256 gt lt float gt 70 lt float gt lt float gt 71 lt float gt float 69 float ArrayOfFloat Max lt PowerVsTime gt lt Spectrum gt lt Min gt lt ArrayOfFloat length 256 gt lt float gt 133 lt float gt lt float gt 111 lt float gt lt float gt 111 lt float gt LEE User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 336 R amp S9FSW K7 I Q Data File Format iq tar B 2 UO Data Binary File ArrayOfFloat Min Max lt ArrayOfFloat length 256 gt float 67 float float 69 float float 70 float float 69 float ArrayOfFloat Max Spectrum IQ lt Histogram width 64 height 64 gt 0123456789 0 lt Histogram gt lt IQ gt lt Channel gt lt ArrayOfChannel gt lt PreviewData gt UO Data Binary File The I Q data is saved in binary format according to the format and data type specified in the XML file see Format element and DataType element To allow reading and writing of streamed I Q data all data is interleaved i e complex values are interleaved pairs of and Q values and multi channel signals contain interleaved complex samples for channel 0 channel 1 channel 2 etc If the NumberOfChannels element is not defined one channel is presumed
150. 73 9240 02 13 26 Demodulation Process Circuit Description Software demodulator RF spectrum Trace Arithmetic trace Trace AF spectrum Arithmetic trace ang frequency modulation COC AF trigger frequency ooo lowpass carrier AM demodulator EN power amplitude RF power polation g E 3 LEO E fe Ud ED e modulation data frequency Q data Trace Inter Trace AM trace peak peak 152 pk pk rms modulation Counter depth modulation frequency carrier lowpass frequency FM demodulator x offset Coupling Trace Inter Trace peii gt FM vaco peak FM peak Detectors 112 pk pk a rms Counter modulation frequency PM demodulator COUDIiTia E arctan Q I phase r Inter Trace PM trace peak 32 pk pk ms Je Counter modulation frequency Fig 4 1 Block diagram of software demodulator R amp S FSW K7 Measurement Basics BESSERES Demodulation Bandwidth The AM DC FM DC and PM DC raw data of the demodulators is fed into the Trace Arithmetic block that combines consecutive data sets Possible trace modes are Clear Write Max Hold Min Hold and Average The output data of the Trace Arithmetic block can be read via remote control SENS ADEM lt evaluation gt RES see SENSe ADEMod AM ABSolute TDOMain RESult on page 282 The collected measured values are evaluated by the selected detector The result is displayed on
151. 74 EE 38 MTS ge EP ERE Power sensor Reference level sse 86 90 Updating Result display e reb treten 104 Result display remote seseessss 325 Upper Level Hysteresis Scl 126 E un 8 User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 356 V View filter Limit UE 147 Visible Limit UE 146 Ww Weighting filter AP HEES sec ern sexist echte REESE r ade ties 114 Windows Adding remote Closing remote ae Cohfigutinig DEE Layout remote Maximizing remote 275 Querying remote 277 Replacing remote 278 Splitting remote 275 Types remote 276 Window title bar information ee 13 X X axis Bug RESET 149 X Offset Bee Ur sorore e tetro bas copa 147 X value Es 134 Y Y axis Bug Hr 149 ele WE 119 YIG preselector Activating Deactivating sees 56 Activating Deactivating remote 179 Y Offset Bee UN 147 Z Zeroing POWYS SENSOM isrannet idiren 82 Zero Phase Reference Position Reference Position remote Zooming Activating remote ccceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeneeeaees 323 Area Multiple mode remote sssss 323 Area remote Deactivalilig tentent yer tns Multiple mode ce 5 rtt ns 151 Multiple mode remote 323 324
152. 78 87 341 kHz 96 167 kHz 91 754 kHz 49 469 kHz 4 7121 rad 3 0697 rad 3 8909 rad 1 5513 rad For details on the MSRA operating mode see the R amp S FSW MSRA User Manual SSS r 49 User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 R amp S9FSW K7 Configuration Default Settings for Analog Demodulation 5 Configuration QD 5 1 Analog demodulation measurements require a special application on the R amp S FSW which you activate using the MODE key on the front panel When you activate an Analog Demodulation application the first time a set of parameters is passed on from the currently active application see chapter 5 1 Default Settings for Analog Demodulation on page 50 After initial setup the parameters for the mea surement channel are stored upon exiting and restored upon re entering the channel Thus you can switch between applications quickly and easily When you activate the Analog Demodulation application a Analog Demodulation mea surement for the input signal is started automatically with the default configuration It can be configured in the Analog Demodulation Overview dialog box which is displayed when you select the Overview softkey from any menu The main configuration settings and dialog boxes are also available via the Analog Demod menu which is displayed when you press the MEAS CONFIG key The remote commands required to perform these tasks are de
153. 8 s 1 6 MHz 2MHz 500 ns 800 ms 800 ms 104 8576 s 800 kHz 1 MHz 1us 1 6s 1 6s 209 7152 s 400 kHz 500 kHz 2 us 3 2s 3 2s 419 4304 s 200 kHz 250 kHz 4 us 6 4s 6 4s 838 8608 s 100 kHz 125 kHz 8 us 12 8s 12 8s 1677 7216 s 50 kHz 62 5 kHz 16 us 25 6s 25 6 s 3355 4432 s 25 kHz 31 25 kHz 32 us 51 2s 51 2 s 6710 8864 s 12 5 kHz 15 625 kHz 64 us 102 4 s 102 4 s 13421 7728 s 6 4 kHz 7 8125 kHz 128 us 204 8 s 204 8 s 26843 5456 s 3 2 kHz 3 90625 kHz 256 us 409 6 s 409 6 s 53687 0912 s 1 6 kHz 1 953125 kHz 512 us 819 2 s 819 2 s 107374 1824 s 800 Hz 976 5625 Hz 1 024 ms 1638 4 s 1638 4 s 214748 3648 s 400 Hz 488 28125 Hz 2 048 ms 3276 8 s 3276 8 s 429496 7296 s 200 Hz 244 140625 Hz 4 096 ms 6553 6 s 6553 6 s 858993 4592 s User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 29 R amp S FSW K7 Measurement Basics M ae es Se Sample Rate Measurement Time and Trigger Offset Demod band Sample rate Measurement time Trigger offset width Min Max Min Max 100 Hz 122 0703125 8 192 ms 13107 2s 13107 2s 1717986 918 s Hz 1 only available with option B28 2 only available with option B40 3 only available with option B80 only available with option B160 5 only available with option B320 Table 4 2 Sample Rate Measurement Time and Trigger Offset using a Gaussian demodulation filter Demod band Sample rate Measu
154. AB ON Activates the marker table See Marker Table Display on page 135 User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 299 R amp S9FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements 11 8 1 3 11 8 1 4 Analyzing Results Marker Search Settings The following commands define criteria for searches CAL Culate nzM Abker PE vCursion nnne nennen neni nne aerea andae n sa anna 300 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer PEXCursion Excursion This command defines the peak excursion The peak excursion sets the requirements for a peak to be detected during a peak search The unit depends on the measurement Application Result display Unit Spectrum dB ADEMOD RF dB ADEMOD AM PCT ADEMOD FM kHz ADEMOD PM RAD Parameters The excursion is the distance to a trace maximum that must be attained before a new maximum is recognized or the distance to a trace minimum that must be attained before a new minimum is recognized RST Excursion 5 PCT in AM displays 50 kHz in FM displays 0 5 RAD in PM displays CALC MARK PEXC 10dB Defines peak excursion as 10 dB Example Manual operation See Peak Excursion on page 138 Positioning the Marker The following remote commands are required to position the marker on a trace e Positioning Markers ecce urne e rna erred ee una et aen Eun ege Eun ud 300 Positioning Delta Makes eene AAA 302 Positioning Markers The following commands pos
155. ANGe Be ET LU EE 199 INPULDIQISRATV EE 199 INPULDIO SRA TG AUTO EE 199 LEE User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 196 R amp S FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements REESEN Configuring the Measurement INPut DIQ CDEVice This command queries the current configuration and the status of the digital UO input from the optional Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 For details see the section Interface Status Information for the Digital Baseband Inter face R amp S FSW B17 in the R amp S FSW UO Analyzer User Manual Return values lt ConnState gt Defines whether a device is connected or not 0 No device is connected 1 A device is connected lt DeviceName gt Device ID of the connected device lt SerialNumber gt Serial number of the connected device lt PortName gt Port name used by the connected device lt SampleRate gt Maximum or currently used sample rate of the connected device in Hz depends on the used connection protocol version indicated by lt SampleRateType gt parameter lt MaxTransferRate gt Maximum data transfer rate of the connected device in Hz lt ConnProtState gt State of the connection protocol which is used to identify the con nected device Not Started Has to be Started Started Passed Failed Done lt PRBSTestState gt State of the PRBS test Not Started Has to be Started Started Passed Failed Done lt SampleRateType gt 0 Maximum sample rate is displayed 1
156. ATio on page 210 Meas Time Average Selects the measurement time or switches to manual averaging mode In general results are more precise with longer measurement times The following settings are recommen ded for different signal types to obtain stable and precise results Short Stationary signals with high power gt 40dBm because they require only a short measurement time and short measurement time provides the highest repetition rates Normal Signals with lower power or modulated signals Long Signals at the lower end of the measurement range 50 dBm or Signals with lower power to minimize the influence of noise Manual Manual averaging mode The average count is set with the Average Count Number of Readings setting Remote command SENSe PMETer lt p gt MTIMe on page 207 SENSe PMETer lt p gt MTIMe AVERage STATe on page 208 Setting the Reference Level from the Measurement Meas gt Ref Sets the currently measured power as a reference value for the relative display The reference value can also be set manually via the Reference Value setting Remote command CALCulate n PMETer p RELative MAGNitude AUTO ONCE on page 205 Reference Value Defines the reference value for relative measurements in the unit dBm Remote command CALCulate n PMETer p RELative MAGNitude on page 204 Use Ref Lev Offset If activated takes the reference level offset defined for the an
157. CISPR is selected additional detectors are available even if EMI measurement is not active Remote command SENSe WINDow DETector lt trace gt FUNCtion on page 268 SENSe WINDow DETector lt trace gt FUNCtion AUTO on page 269 Hold If activated traces in Min Hold Max Hold and Average mode are not reset after specific parameter changes have been made Normally the measurement is started anew after parameter changes before the mea surement results are analyzed e g using a marker In all cases that require a new mea surement after parameter changes the trace is reset automatically to avoid false results e g with span changes For applications that require no reset after parameter changes the automatic reset can be switched off The default setting is off Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE HCONtinuous on page 264 Average Mode Defines the mode with which the trace is averaged over several sweeps A different averaging mode can be defined for each trace This setting is only applicable if trace mode Average is selected SSC User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 129 R amp S FSW K7 Analysis Trace Settings How many sweeps are averaged is defined by the Average Count on page 130 Linear The power level values are converted into linear units prior to averaging After the averaging the data is converted back into its original unit Logarithmic For loga
158. Checked on page 146 Checking the Results of a Limit Check CAL Culatel IMt CLEartMMedatel eene nennen 321 CALCurate LIMIS KAFA Eaa aaa a a aa aa aaa aa 322 CALCulate LIMit CLEar IMMediate This command deletes the result of the current limit check The command works on all limit lines in all measurement windows at the same time Example CALC LIM CLE Deletes the result of the limit check Usage SCPI confirmed I User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 321 R amp S9FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements 11 8 3 11 8 3 1 Analyzing Results CALCulate LIMit lt k gt FAIL This command queries the result of a limit check To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchronization to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single sweeps See also INITiate CONTinuous on page 271 Return values lt Result gt 0 PASS 1 FAIL Example INIT WAI Starts a new sweep and waits for its end CALC LIMS3 FAIL Queries the result of the check for limit line 3 Usage SCPI confirmed Zooming into the Display Using the Single Zoom BISPIay WINBoOwshn ZODM AREA irice rna ote egeret rene ep rote ree nete nenne nece 322 DISPlay WINDowen ZOOM STATO atrae cuo annui nnno nnn ia nnn nnt arent nnne 323 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM AREA lt x1 gt lt y1 gt lt x2 gt lt y2 gt This command defines the zoom area To defi
159. D WINDow on page 276 PM Spectrum Displays the phase deviations of the demodulated PM signal in rad or dB versus AF span The spectrum is calculated from the demodulated AM signal in the time domain via FFT LEE User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 20 R amp S FSW K7 Measurements and Result Displays Deg Evaluation Methods for Analog Demodulation 2 PM Spectrum 1AP Clrw Ref 10 00 rad AF Start 0 0 Hz 1001 pts AF Stop 1 0 MHz Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH XTIMe PM AFSPektruml see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 276 RF Time Domain Displays the RF power of the input signal versus time The level values represent the magnitude of the UO data set er S User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 21 R amp S FSW K7 Measurements and Result Displays EE Evaluation Methods for Analog Demodulation 1 RF Time Domain e1AP Clrw CF 100 0 MHz 1001 pts Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH XTIM AM see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 276 RF Spectrum Displays the spectrum of the input signal In contrast to the Spectrum application the frequency values are determined using FFT from the recorded I Q data set ES User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 22 R amp S FSW K7 Measurements and Result Displays Evaluation Methods for Analog Demodulation 2 RF Spectrum 1AP Clrw CF 100 0 MHz 1001 pts Span 1 0 MHz Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH XTIM SPECTRUM
160. DELTamarker m STATe essere ennemi n eren rennen e e ei RE CALOCulate n MARKer FUNCtion ADEMod AFRequency RE Gu 286 CAL Culate cnz MAbRkerEUNCHon ADEMod GlNad RE Gutts 287 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer FUNCtion ADEMod THD RESUIt lt t gt ooo ccc ceccceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeeae 288 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer PEXCursion CAL Culate cnz MAb ker m1z LINK TOMARkR erem 293 CALCulatesn gt MARKersm gt iAOF EE 293 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion FPEaks ANNotation LABel S TATe sese 306 CAlCulate cnzM Abkercmz FUNGCiontbtakellGt LE 206 CAL Culate cnz MAb ker mz FUNGCion bake GOHT eene enne nnn nnne 307 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FPEaks STAT CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion FPEaks IMMediate sess 306 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion NDBDoOwn sessesesessseeeene enne nennen nennen nrnnr nn tnnt nennen nsn 308 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion NDBDown FREQuengcy essere nenne 308 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion NDBDown RESUIt essent 309 CAL Culate cnz MAb ker mz FUNGCioncNDBown GTATe nennen nennen nnne 310 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion NDBDown TIME CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion REFerence esssssssssseseseseeeeren ener nennen entren CAL Culate cnz MAbRker mz MAvimum LEET CAL Culate cnz MAb ker mz MAvimum NENT CALCula
161. DEM BAND 5 MHz Sets the demodulation bandwidth to 5 MHz ADEM AF SPAN FULL Sets the AF span to 2 5 MHz Manual operation See AF Full Span on page 110 SENSe JADEMod AF STARt Frequency This command sets the start frequency for AF spectrum result display Parameters Frequency RST 0 MHz e V B S e User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 252 R amp S FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements SS SS ee Ee ee ee Configuring the Measurement Example ADEM AF STAR 0 kHz Sets the AF start frequency to 0 kHz ADEM AF STOP 500 kHz Sets the AF stop frequency to 500 kHz Manual operation See AF Start on page 110 SENSe JADEMod AF STOP Frequency This command sets the stop frequency for AF spectrum result display Parameters Frequency RST 9 MHz Example ADEM AF STAR 0 kHz Sets the AF start frequency to 0 kHz ADEM AF STOP 500 kHz Sets the AF stop frequency to 500 kHz Manual operation See AF Stop on page 110 RF evaluation These settings are only available for RF evaluation both in time and frequency domain Useful commands described elsewhere SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 225 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth DEMod on page 236 Specific commands I SENSe dADEMod SPEC SPANIZOGOM uiae dera C eee bec dde ataca dete ep de RR FRU Me Rea Ra
162. DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SPACing on page 233 E N User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 258 R amp S9FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements 11 4 8 7 11 4 8 8 Configuring the Measurement Specific commands DiSblavlfWiNDow nzTRACevtSCALelbRVAl ue enne nennen 259 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe RVALue Value This command defines the reference value assigned to the reference position in the specified window Separate reference values are maintained for the various displays Parameters Value RST AM time domain 0 PCT FM time domain 0 Hz PM time domain 0 rad AM spectrum 100 PCT FM spectrum 250 kHz PM spectrum 10 rad Example DISP TRAC Y RVAL 0 Sets the value assigned to the reference position to 0 Hz Manual operation See Reference Value on page 117 Scaling for RF Evaluation These commands are required for RF evaluations and the result summary DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe RPOSition on page 218 e DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SPACing on page 233 e DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe on page 231 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe MODE on page 232 Units The units define how the demodulated data is displayed IM gr Te ur TIT 259 ECKER le m 259 UNIT ANGLe lt Unit gt This command selects the unit for angles for PM display This command is identical to CALC UNIT ANGL Parameters lt Unit gt DEG
163. Demodulation Measurements 11 4 8 5 11 4 8 6 Configuring the Measurement Example FILT LPAS FREQ MAN 150kHz The AF results are restricted to frequencies lower than 150 kHz Manual operation See Low Pass on page 113 SENSe FILTer n L PASs FREQuency RELative FilterType This command selects the relative low pass filter type for the specified evaluation For details on the low pass filter refer to Low Pass on page 113 Parameters lt FilterType gt 5PCT 10PCT 25PCT RST 25PCT Example FILT LPAS FREQ REL 25PCT Selects the low pass filter as 25 of the demodulation bandwidth Manual operation See Low Pass on page 113 SENSe FILTer n L PASs STATe State This command activates deactivates the selected low pass filter for the specified evalu ation For details on the low pass filter refer to Low Pass on page 113 Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example FILT LPAS ON Activates the selected low pass filter Manual operation See Low Pass on page 113 Defining the Scaling and Units The scaling parameters define the range of the demodulated data to be displayed Scaling for AF Evaluation These settings are only available for AF evaluations Useful commands described elsewhere SENSe ADJust SCALe Y AUTO CONTinuous on page 263 SENSe ADEMod lt n gt AF COUPling on page 248 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe RPOSition on page 218 e
164. Demodulation Measurements REESEN Analyzing Results Parameters lt Mode gt ABSolute Limit line is defined by absolute physical values Hz or s RELative Limit line is defined by relative values related to the center fre quency frequency domain or the left diagram border time domain RST ABSolute CALCulate LIMit lt k gt CONTrol OFFSet lt Offset gt This command defines an offset for a complete limit line Compared to shifting the limit line an offset does not actually change the limit line defi nition points Parameters lt Offset gt Numeric value The unit depends on the scale of the x axis RST 0 Manual operation See X Offset on page 147 CALCulate LIMit lt k gt CONTrol SHIFt lt Distance gt This command moves a complete limit line horizontally Compared to defining an offset this command actually changes the limit line definition points by the value you define Parameters lt Distance gt Numeric value The unit depends on the scale of the x axis Manual operation See Shift x on page 150 CALCulate LIMit lt k gt CONTrol SPACing lt InterpolMode gt This command selects linear or logarithmic interpolation for the calculation of limit lines from one horizontal point to the next Parameters lt InterpolMode gt LINear LOGarithmic RST LIN Example CALC LIM CONT SPAC LIN CALCulate LIMit lt k gt LOWer DATA lt LimitLinePoints gt This command defines the vertical definition
165. Demodulation application the commands to define tha analysis interval are the same as those used to define the actual data acquisition see chapter 11 4 6 Configuring Data Acquisition on page 233 Be sure to select the correct measurement channel before executing these commands In addition a capture offset can be defined i e an offset from the start of the captured data to the start of the analysis interval for the Analog Demodulation measurement Remote commands exclusive to MSRA applications The following commands are only available for MSRA application channels GAL Culate MSRA ALINE le E 325 CAL GCulate MSRA ALINSEMVALUS iater teer tee tee eae ath ieee ade 325 CAL CulateMSbRAVWiNDow cnz NAU 325 IEN EE 325 SENSe MSRACCAP Tite OFF EE 326 T User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 324 R amp S FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements AMEN K SS a a Analyzing Results CALCulate MSRA ALINe SHOW This command defines whether or not the analysis line is displayed in all time based windows in all MSRA applications and the MSRA Master Note even if the analysis line display is off the indication whether or not the currently defined line position lies within the analysis interval of the active application remains in the window title bars Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST ON CALCulate MSRA ALINe VALue lt Position gt This command defines the position of the analysis line for a
166. Dth RESolution seen 235 SENSe ADEMod SPECtrum RESUIE eese esee eee ennt nennen nennen rennen ddata 282 SENSe ADEMod SPECtrum SPAN MAXimum sees rennen nenne nenennneis 254 SENS JADEMod SPECtr mpT YPE cie stat tret tre t thee a EEEE E pe Re ERER 266 SENSe ADEMod SQUelch LEVel 1 1 erret t treten tnter enr ttp aeta oa seh orina eR head e nu go 249 SENSe ADEMod SQUelch STATe essere nnne eneren neret nnreenerrn reet rns en reset nennen 249 SENS RG KT ME 235 IGENZGe ADEMod cnz AF CGOUbPimg essent nrennnrrneneennrset eren enr se trennen entes 248 SENSe ADEModsn gt ZOOMILENGn AAA 250 SENSe JADEMod n ZOOM LENGIh MODE essent nennen rne nree tenente en nnns 250 SENSe ADEMod lt n gt ZOOM STARt SENSe JADEMod lt n gt ZOOM STATE ccscescenseascenesnceneeecessnascenessconceasoncauseasesneancanacsesaaseuesneateereeasanseanenseemes 251 je IHR PAUCI 260 SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation eese enne enne ree neret nnne t eret nre n rne rerne 261 SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation MODE sess enne neret nennen etre nnns 261 SENSe ADJust CONFigure HYS Teresiel Ower 262 TE a User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 344 R amp S FSW K7 List of Remote Commands AnalogDemod SENSe ADJust CONFigure HYSTeresis UPPer sesssssssseseeeeeenee
167. E MAX HOLD MINHOLD Detector AUTOPEAK Detector set AUTOPEAK MAXPEAK MINPEAK AVER AGE RMS SAMPLE QUASIPEAK Values 1001 Number of measurement points 10000 10 3 15 7 10130 11 5 16 9 10360 12 0 17 4 Measured values x value lt y1 gt lt y2 gt lt y2 gt being available only with detector AUTOPEAK and containing in this case the smallest of the two measured values for a measurement point Data section for individual trace Trace 2 Next trace in same window Data section for individual window Window 2 Data section for individual trace Name of next window Trace 1 First trace User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 291 R amp S FSW K7 11 8 11 8 1 11 8 1 1 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements Analyzing Results Analyzing Results The following remote commands are required to configure general result analysis settings concerning the trace markers lines etc in a remote environment They are identical to the analysis functions in the base unit except for some special marker functions and spectrograms which are not available in the Analog Demodulation application More details are described for manual operation in chapter 6 Analysis on page 127 e Working with Markers Remote eiae eiie renean ter Rus u dienen raa 292 e Defining Limit CEIGOKS eee eene nete nre eene dE eu Renner ee e betonen EE 312 e Zooming into the DISpl
168. EE 145 Peak List State Activates deactivates the marker peak list If activated the peak list is displayed and the peaks are indicated in the trace display For each listed peak the frequency time X value and level Y value values are given Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FPEaks STAT on page 307 Sort Mode Defines whether the peak list is sorted according to the x values or y values In either case the values are sorted in ascending order Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FPEaks SORT on page 307 Maximum Number of Peaks Defines the maximum number of peaks to be determined and displayed Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion FPEaks LIST SIZE on page 306 Peak Excursion Defines the minimum level value by which a signal must rise or fall so that it will be identified as a maximum or a minimum by the search functions Entries from 0 dB to 80 dB are allowed the resolution is 0 1 dB The default setting for the peak excursion is 6 dB Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer PEXCursion on page 300 User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 144 R amp S9FSW K7 Analysis 6 7 6 7 1 6 7 2 6 7 1 Limit Line Settings and Functions Displaying Marker Numbers By default the marker numbers are indicated in the diagram so you can find the peaks from the list However for large numbers of peaks the marker numbers may decrease readability i
169. EMod nsAF COLIPling 2 12 2 e ctio reor epe eder ere eren SEENEN 248 ISENSG IADEMOOq PMIRPOLII UE 249 SENSe JADEMod SQUelch STATe center tentent tentes 249 SENSe JADEMod SOllelchib EVel 2 22 2 2 etri a vade d de tuat ENN 249 SENSe ADEMod n AF COUPIing Coupling This command selects the coupling of the AF path of the analyzer in the specified window Parameters Coupling AC DC RST AC PM DC FM Example ADEM AF COUP DC Switches on DC coupling Manual operation See AF Coupling on page 107 User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 248 R amp S FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements REESEN Configuring the Measurement SENSe JADEMod PM RPOint X lt Time gt This command determines the position where the phase of the PM demodulated signal is set to 0 rad The maximum possible value depends on the measurement time selected in the instrument this value is output in response to the query ADEM PM RPO X MAX Parameters lt Time gt 0 s to measurement time RST 0s Example ADEM PM RPO 500us Sets the position where the phase to 0 rad setting to 500 us Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Zero Phase Reference Position PM Time Domain only on page 108 SENSe JADEMod SQuelch STATe State This command activates the squelch function i e if the signal falls below a defined threshold see SENSe ADEMod SQUelch LEVel on page 249 the
170. EOuencv UNK SENSe PMETersp gt iMlIM ee eege SEANCE aes EES IEN Ge IpME Ter pz M lMeAvtERaoeCOUNt nennen neret rennen nnne enne ens SENSe PMETer lt p gt MTIMe AVERage STATe SENSe PMETer p ROFFSselt S TATe rire rr reli eni tea dep gea mv e bee dea dade SENSe PMETer p TRIGger DT Me enun nennen nnne these g Na atn a ridona initan IEN Ge PME Iernz TRlGoerHOL Doft A SENSe PMETer p TRIGger HYSTeresis essssssessseeseeeee nennen ennt neennreenernn reser rsen enne nnne SENSe PMETersp TRIGger LEVel norte eve ectetuer tii gei aee gi tel paste p eda det us Eder IGENGe PME Iernz RlGoerGtObe eene nennen ten nnnr sinn eren nent rnnt diner nts nena IEN Ge PME Iernz TRiGoertGTATel ener nnns een nnts nen nnns s nennt rsen nnns rnnt SENS PMETer lt p gt UPDate STATel enne enne reet nennen nnne nnne enne SENSe PMETer lt p gt STATe IEN Ge ID OBe p 1D PDAbTnumber nee rnnt nnne nnns 200 EIST e Ee ER TE RE le 200 SENSe PROB lt p gt SETUp MODE twas iin fen Att baat Dee ep C Pit es das pet Apes atts od textus 200 SENSe PROBe p SETup NAME eesseeseseseeeeee enses aiti ai lisaainena pinhona iaaa nnne sensns 201 SENSe PROBe sp SETUp STATO 3 ecce ee ied p a e teda The Re e Eid ee i praes etude aadi 201 IEN Ge IDROe cp GE TupTWDEN eene neneren rester etes terrere trennen nnne enne 201 Eis EU X 195 SENSe SW
171. Eep C OU NE iecit nieder hates rra rena erga ua Beo Sra eo ie ee a Rage ciet ap c Ex i Ea 237 SENSe SWEep POINts SENSe WINDow DETector trace FUNCtion sessi 268 IGENGe IDWINDow Dt Techor ziracezfEUNGC ont AUTO 269 SSE T User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 346 R amp S FSW K7 Index SOP EE 238 Analog Baseband connector FRE IN DUE T M 34 A Analog Baseband Interface B71 Amplitude settings cc cece c eee ceeeeeeeneeeeeeneees 89 Aborting put selte eiert ege ee tete rr an tes 70 Sweep ERES 103 104 Analog Demodulation AC DC coupling 28 56 89 107 117 124 Measurement examples esee 158 Activating QUIDUE e 123 Analog Demodulation measurements remote Output settings ecd te eher rentes 123 172 Analysis Active probe Marker functions eieiei ni euir 140 Microbutton Remote control ep re ia 292 S eltlihgs EE 127 AF Auto Scale Analysis interval Softkey sss 118 126 Configuration MSRA remote sss 324 AF center MSRA E Softkey EEN 110 Analysis ne eiert Seite centre ert nita 48 AF GF Linens 194 Configuration MSRA remote sss 324 AF coupling 107 117 124 APX AF filters EEN 29 External generator ssss esses 40 45 A weighted aseene 114 AQT CCIR 114 see Measurement time seessssssee 13 CCITT
172. Evaluation method sssssssseeeeeeee 17 Ports External Mixer B21 remote control 187 Position Limit line values erret tert 150 Power sensors Activating Deactivating sss 81 Average CoUrit EE 84 Configuration i Configuration softkey sss 80 Continuous Value Update saeseeeee aeeie eeen nene 82 Duty cycle External power trigger eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeee 84 External trigger level esee 84 Frequency Frequency Coupling Measurement time sssssssseenenee Number of readings i Reference level A Reference level offset sess 83 Selecting Settings Trigger mode d cc oer rte itte 97 Unit Scale E te nl e Preamplifier riu e M REQ 88 ie 88 Preset Bands External Mixer B21 remote control 183 External Mixer B21 sss 59 Presetting ec rc 54 Default values rrr 50 de Le TEE 98 Probes MicroDU ttOn 5 rrr ettet rene 72 EI c T aadi 72 Programming examples External Mixer B21 sess 191 Protection les Ile cc fete cfc ern ire ieri eite te 33 RF input remote sssrini iinit 177 Q Quick Config Dep HR R 130 R IERT Uer E 69 R amp S EX IQ BOX ellen 69 R a
173. Export and Import I Q Data Capturing and exporting UO data 1 Press the PRESET key 2 Press the MODE key and select the IQ Analyzer or any other application that sup ports UO data Configure the data acquisition Press the RUN SINGLE key to perform a single sweep measurement Select the E Save icon in the toolbar Select the UO Export softkey In the file selection dialog box select a storage location and enter a file name o NO a PR 9o Select Save The captured data is stored to a file with the extension iq tar Importing UO data 1 Press the MODE key and select the IQ Analyzer or any other application that sup ports UO data If necessary switch to single sweep mode by pressing the RUN SINGLE key Select the ll Open icon in the toolbar Select the UO Import softkey Select the storage location and the file name with the iq tar file extension o 0 F o Nm Select Open The stored data is loaded from the file and displayed in the current application Previewing the UO data in a web browser The iq tar file format allows you to preview the I Q data in a web browser 1 Useanarchive tool e g WinZip or PowerArchiver to unpack the iq tar file into a folder 2 Locate the folder using Windows Explorer 3 Open your web browser e a M User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 154 How to Export and Import UO Data 4 Drag the UO parameter XML file e g example xml into your web browse
174. F 500 0 MHz 100 pts Span 200 0 kHz 4 Result Summary Carrier Power 10 34 dBm Carrier Offset 679 70 Hz Peak Peak Peak 2 RMS Mod Freq SINAD FM 49 853 kHz 48 649 kHz 49 251 kHz 34 914 kHz 10 000 kHz Fig 9 4 RF spectrum with demodulation bandwidth 200 kHz The span is automatically reduced to 200 kHz as well as only the demodulated range can be displayed User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 160 R amp S FSW K7 Measurement Example Demodulating an FM Signal 9 Now the RF spectrum shows that part of the FM signal is cut off The missing signal parts are not included in the calculated results Increase the demodulation bandwidth to 400 kHz to include the entire signal but no interfering frequencies The span is not automatically increased for the wider DBW since it may be useful to display only a small range from the demodulated bandwidth However this means the RF spectrum will still not show the entire signal 10 Increase the span manually to show the entire demodulated bandwidth a Select the RF Spectrum window b Press the SPAN key c Select the Full Span softkey MultiView 33 Spectrum Analog Demod B AQT 10 ms z Freq 500 0 MHz 1 FM Time Domain AP Clnw Ref 0 00 Hz DC CF 500 0 MHz 10 tpts 5 RF Spectrum 1001 pts Span 400 0 kHz 4 Result Summary Carrier Power 10 35 dBm Carrier Offset 667 85 Hz Peak Peak iPeak 2 RMS Mod Freq SINAD FM 50 031 kHz 48 717 kHz 49 374 kHz 34 941 kHz 10 000 kHz
175. FM AFSPectrum RESUIt essere nennen nennen nnns 282 SENSe ADEMod FM AFSPectrum TYPE essent nennen nennen nnne 265 SENSe JADEMOG FM OFFSGI eh cer egene Bee eges ete ce paa sae age Ue nde edenda De ance 288 IGENZGe IADEMod FMI TDOMainl RE Gu 282 SENSe ADEMod FM TDOMain TpEL esent rennes 265 SENSeJADEMOG M IMG risecsectccsccsseutsievtiegedacsnstiscennschavetatnesia denis Lene be Ehe dE dd 234 IEN Ge IADE Mod PM AF Gbechum REGO nennen rennen nnne 282 SENSe ADEMod PM AFSPectrum TYPE esses nnne nrennnreneren nent nret neret rennes 266 SENSe JADEMod PM RPOirit X iere aate oet erepta pea gu revel aes SEENEN 249 SENSe JADEMod PM RPOint X erroe torino rd eta eene e hr eie Acer yix uc VES EY e eaa Ve E EUR RE FERE ER 289 IGENZGe IADEMod PDMI TDOMainl RE Gut 282 SENSe ADEMod PN TDOMain TY PE cceceseeecesseeeeeeseeaceeaeesecenecaeceecaeceesaesenessecaeeeaeeaeeeaeeaeeeaeeaeeees 265 SENSe JADEMod PRESet RES Tore c cesconeanersecreesconsenenneceeesceasestenteaesereenentnsbecsesanesensetesosnenenensdarensegae 176 SENSe JADEMoG PRESOESTORSe EE 177 SENSe ADEMod PRESet STANdarq esses nnne rennen eene neren rsen reete etre enne 176 SENSe JADEMOG RLENGIh eee c edd ca id rd gv ee Erat dde oat pene dae ne ce xh 234 Ja Eripe 234 ISENGelADEMod GPEC SPAN ZOOM AANEREN 253 SENSe JADEMod SPECtrum BANDwidth BWI
176. IG key and then the Demod Config softkey Win Ref 10 00rad Q2 PM Tine um Demod AF Filter Scaling Unit Settings Time Domain Zoom Squelch State State On Squelch Level icd 0 0 s Selected Trace PM Settings Zero Phase Ref Pos Phase Wrapping Keier 2 PM Time Domain ee EES 107 SmwE E 107 tolo 107 Selected RE 107 Blanne Ee e EE 107 GE 108 User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 106 R amp S FSW K7 Configuration BREET Demodulation p act aan ieee saunas ee 108 SEENEN 108 L Time per Division tnnt tene 108 Zero Phase Reference Position PM Time Domain only 108 Phase Wrap On Off PM Time Domain pb wie bite ente onde Redde ends 109 Squelch State Activates the squelch function i e if the signal falls below a defined threshold the demodulated data is automatically set to 0 This is useful for example to avoid demod ulation noise during transmission breaks Remote command SENSe ADEMod SQUelch STATe on page 249 Squelch Level Defines the level threshold below which the demodulated data is set to 0 if squelching is enabled The squelch level is an absolute value Remote command SENSe ADEMod SQUelch LEVel on page 249 AF Coupling Controls the automatic correction of the frequency offset and phase offset of the input signal This function is only available for FM or PM time domain evaluations e FM time evaluation If DC is selected
177. IqTar xsd xmlns xsi http www w3 org 2001 XMLSchema instance lt Name gt FSV K10 lt Name gt lt Comment gt Here is a comment lt Comment gt lt DateTime gt 2011 01 24T14 02 49 lt DateTime gt lt Samples gt 68751 lt Samples gt Clock unit Hz gt 6 5e 006 lt Clock gt lt Format gt complex lt Format gt lt DataType gt float32 lt DataType gt lt ScalingFactor unit V gt 1 lt ScalingFactor gt lt NumberOfChannels gt 1 lt NumberOfChannels gt DataFilename xyz complex float32 DataFilename lt UserData gt lt UserDefinedElement gt Example lt UserDefinedElement gt lt UserData gt lt PreviewData gt lt PreviewData gt lt RS_IQ TAR FileFormat Element Description RS IQ TAR File Format The root element of the XML file It must contain the attribute ileFormatVersion that contains the number of the file format definition Currently fileFormatVersion 2 is used Name Optional describes the device or application that created the file Comment Optional contains text that further describes the contents of the file DateTime Contains the date and time of the creation of the file Its type is xs dateTime see RsIqTar xsd User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 334 R amp S9FSW K7 I Q Data File Format iq tar UO Parameter XML File Specification Element Samples Description Contains the number of samples of the UO da
178. LCulate EIMitsks PPer T HR shold tnnt ttt terrere nnne EH 319 CALGulate EIMitske UPPer DATA iret eot tu ee rtr ere e teri eere eere ire Eed 317 CAL Culate MAbRkerFUNC Hon ADE Mod AMIRE Gutt 286 CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion ADEMod CARRier RESult CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion ADEMod FERRor RESult t essen 287 CAL Culate MAbRker FUN non ADE Mod FMIREGuetrlI 286 CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion ADEMod PM RESUlt t essen 286 CAL CulateMAbRkerFUNGC non FPE akeCOUND enema 306 CAL CulateMAbkerFUNGCion FbPteoake NV 307 CAL CulateMAbkerFUNGC non FbPteoke Vd 308 CAL Culate MAbRker FUN on NDBDown OP ACIord eee eeee eee eeeeeeneeseeseeeeeseeesseeseeseeeseeeseeeeeeees 309 CAL Culate MARKER Eege td tiere deer 298 CAL Culate MARKersim gt LINK orere ninenin enen i Ea anaE eena a EO eae daaa a ege 299 CAL Culate MSRACALINe SEIOQW iuter rne e ter Re p hte ena eremi aa een DEn E aE EEN ai dnia 325 LEE User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 339 R amp S FSW K7 List of Remote Commands AnalogDemod CAL CulateMSbRA ALINetVAL ue 325 CAL CulateMSbRAWiNDow cnc MAL 325 CALCulate cnz DEI Tamarker AO 295 CAL Culatesn DELTamarker MOBDPBE 2 ern ere sie sities ate dee gekegAeERd ENNEN 296 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarker m1z LINK TOMARR erem 295 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarker mz EUNGCionFl edRbOmt MA simumf PDEART eee 204 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarker mz FEUNGCionFlx edRbOmt
179. LYZER Selects the IQ Analyzer channel INIT REFR Refreshes the display for the UO Analyzer channel Usage Event Manual operation See Refresh on page 104 SENSe MSRA CAPTure OFFSet Offset This setting is only available for applications in MSRA mode not for the MSRA Master It has a similar effect as the trigger offset in other measurements Parameters Offset This parameter defines the time offset between the capture buffer start and the start ofthe extracted application data The offset must be a positive value as the application can only analyze data that is contained in the capture buffer Range 0 to Record length RST 0 Manual operation See Capture Offset on page 102 Importing and Exporting UO Data and Results The I Q data to be evaluated in the Analog Demodulation application can not only be measured by the Analog Demodulation application itself it can also be imported to the application provided it has the correct format Furthermore the evaluated UO data from the Analog Demodulation application can be exported for further analysis in external applications For details on importing and exporting UO data see chapter 7 UO Data Import and Export on page 152 MMEMory Be een VE 326 MMEMory STORGIG COMMOn EE 327 TEE STORE IGS ME 327 MMEMory LOAD IQ STATe 1 lt FileName gt This command restores UO data from a file LSS N User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 326 R amp S9FSW K7
180. LiIcale gute SEENEN 172 INS TrumebtoREStep NEW riii decree erre SEANCE np e RR Pey ee 172 INSTrumentCREate REPLACE aiti edd edd EENS 173 INS Vr Oel eege ege See idee Irene e e re e rea EM TERES 173 ll REN RE 173 INS Tromenb RENAME codec ra tace eon eto eae occ Rx ed dd qr y e e idc uni eR ERENA 175 INSTrument SEEecl oret ra tet ra toic reri eee er cia eed ee Ruins 175 A HRH EE e TE TU EE 175 INSTrument CREate DUPLicate This command duplicates the currently selected measurement channel i e starts a new measurement channel of the same type and with the identical measurement settings The name of the new channel is the same as the copied channel extended by a con secutive number e g Spectrum gt Spectrum 2 The channel to be duplicated must be selected first using the INST SEL command This command is not available if the MSRA Master channel is selected Example INST SEL Spectrum INST CRE DUPL Duplicates the channel named Spectrum and creates a new mea surement channel named Spectrum 2 Usage Event INSTrument CREate NEW lt ChannelType gt lt ChannelName gt This command adds an additional measurement channel The number of measurement channels you can configure at the same time depends on available memory Parameters lt ChannelType gt Channel type of the new channel For a list of available channel types see table 11 1 User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 172 R amp S FSW K7
181. M RELative TDOMain TYPE SENSe JADEMod AM RELative AFSPectrum TYPE SENSe JADEMod FM TDOMain TYPE SENSe JADEMod FM AFSPectrum TYPE SENSe JADEMod PM TDOMain TYPE E N User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 265 R amp S FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements REESEN Configuring the Measurement SENSe JADEMod PM AFSPectrum TYPE SENSe JADEMod SPECtrum TYPE lt TraceMode1 gt lt TraceMode2 gt lt TraceMode3 gt lt TraceMode4 gt lt TraceMode5d gt lt TraceMode6 gt This command selects the trace modes of the evaluated signal to be measured simulta neously For each of the six available traces a mode can be defined The trace modes are configured identically for all windows with a specific evaluation The following table indicates which command syntax refers to which evaluation method Command syntax Evaluation method AM ABSolute TDOMain RF time domain AM RE Lative TDOMain AM time domain AM RELative AFSPectrum AM spectrum FM TDOMain FM time domain FM AFSPectrum FM spectrum PM TDOMain PM time domain PM AFSPectrum PM spectrum SPECtrum RF spectrum Note The trace modes for each trace and each window can also be configured individ ually using the DISP TRAC MODE command see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE on page 263 Parameters lt TraceMode gt WRITe Overwrite mode the trace is overwritten by each sweep This is
182. M conversion and vice versa without deviation errors frequency response or frequency drift at DC coupling This user manual contains a description of the functionality that the application provides including remote control operation All functions not discussed in this manual are the same as in the base unit and are described in the R amp S FSW User Manual The latest version is available for download at the product homepage http www2 rohde schwarz com product FSW html Installation You can find detailed installation instructions in the R amp S FSW Getting Started manual or in the Release Notes 2 1 Starting the Analog Demodulation Application Analog Demodulation is a separate application on the R amp S FSW To activate the Analog Demodulation application 1 Press the MODE key on the front panel of the R amp S FSW A dialog box opens that contains all operating modes and applications currently available on your R amp S FSW e P O xe User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 11 R amp S FSW K7 Welcome to the Analog Demodulation Application Understanding the Display Information 2 Select the Analog Demodulation item Analog Demod The R amp S FSW opens a new measurement channel for the Analog Demodulation application The measurement is started immediately with the default settings It can be
183. Manual operation See X Axis on page 149 CALCulate LIMit lt k gt LOWer OFFSet lt Offset gt This command defines an offset for a complete lower limit line Compared to shifting the limit line an offset does not actually change the limit line defi nition points ERREUR RU RA EIE SSS User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 315 R amp S FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements REESEN Analyzing Results Parameters lt Offset gt Numeric value RST 0 Default unit dB Manual operation See Y Offset on page 147 CALCulate LIMit lt k gt LOWer SHIFt lt Distance gt This command moves a complete lower limit line vertically Compared to defining an offset this command actually changes the limit line definition points by the value you define Parameters lt Distance gt Defines the distance that the limit line moves The unit depends on CALCulate LIMit k UNIT on page 317 Manual operation See Shift y on page 150 CALCulate LIMit lt k gt LOWer SPACing lt InterpolType gt This command selects linear or logarithmic interpolation for the calculation of a lower limit line from one horizontal point to the next Parameters lt InterpolType gt LINear LOGarithmic RST LIN Manual operation See X Axis on page 149 See Y Axis on page 149 CALCulate LIMit lt k gt LOWer STATe lt State gt This command turns a lower limit line on and off Before you can use the command you have to select
184. N User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 156 R amp S FSW K7 How to Perform Measurements in the Analog Demodulation Application Deeg e Configure a trace to display the average over a series of sweeps on the Trace tab if necessary increase the Sweep Count in the Data Acquisition settings e Configure markers and delta markers to determine deviations and offsets within the demodulated signal on the Marker tab e Use special marker functions to calculate phase noise or an n dB down bandwidth on the Marker Config tab e Configure a limit check to detect excessive deviations on the Lines tab 10 Start a new sweep with the defined settings In MSRA mode you may want to stop the continuous measurement mode by the Sequencer and perform a single data acquisition a Select the Sequencer icon R from the toolbar b Set the Sequencer state to OFF c Press the RUN SINGLE key 11 Optionally export the trace data of the demodulated signal to a file a Inthe Traces tab of the Analysis dialog box switch to the Trace Export tab b Select Export Trace to ASCII File c Define a file name and storage location and select OK rear User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 157 R amp S FSW K7 Measurement Example Demodulating an FM Signal 9 Measurement Example Demodulating an FM Signal A practical example for a basic Analog Demodulation measurement is provided here It demonstrates how operating and measurement error
185. R amp S9FSW K7 Analog Demodulation Measuremen Option User Manual CCF 1 0 GH 1 Il FM Time Domain ng Start 0 0 s 1001 pts LO ms Af CF 5 0 kHz 94 Result Summary y De Carrier Power j dBm Peak Peak 75 860 kHz 813 D MS SINAD THe 75 837 kHz 53 035 kHz 1000 00 88 499 4B 98 865 dB 1173 9240 02 13 ROHDE amp SCHWARZ Test amp Measurement User Manual This manual applies to the following R amp S9FSW models with firmware version 1 70 and higher e R amp S FSW8 1312 8000K08 e R amp S FSW13 1312 8000K13 e R amp S9FSW26 1312 8000K26 R amp S FSW43 1312 8000K43 e R amp S FSW50 1312 8000K50 The following firmware options are described es R amp S FSW K7 1313 1339 02 The firmware of the instrument makes use of several valuable open source software packages For information see the Open Source Acknowledgement on the user documentation CD ROM included in delivery Rohde amp Schwarz would like to thank the open source community for their valuable contribution to embedded computing 2013 Rohde amp Schwarz GmbH amp Co KG M hldorfstr 15 81671 M nchen Germany Phone 49 89 41 29 0 Fax 49 89 41 29 12 164 E mail info rohde schwarz com Internet www rohde schwarz com Subject to change Data without tolerance limits is not binding R amp S is a registered trademark of Rohde amp Schwarz GmbH amp Co KG Trade names are trademarks of the owners The f
186. RACe Y SCALe RVALue on page 259 AF Coupling Controls the automatic correction of the frequency offset and phase offset of the input signal This function is only available for FM or PM time domain evaluations e FM time evaluation If DC is selected the absolute frequency is displayed i e an input signal with an offset relative to the center frequency is not displayed symmetrically with respect to the zero line If AC is selected the frequency offset is automatically corrected i e the trace is always symmetric with respect to the zero line e PM time evaluation If DC is selected the phase runs according to the existing frequency offset In addi tion the DC signal contains a phase offset of rr If AC is selected the frequency offset and phase offset are automatically corrected i e the trace is always symmetric with respect to the zero line Remote command SENSe ADEMod n AF COUPling on page 248 Deviation Switches between logarithmic and linear display of the modulation depth or the phase deviation or the frequency deviation Remote command DISPlay WINDowcn TRACe Y SPACing on page 233 a 5 User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 117 R amp S FSW K7 Configuration 5 8 4 2 Demodulation AF Auto Scale Activates automatic scaling of the y axis for AF measurements RF power and RF spec trum measurements are not affected by the auto scaling Remote
187. Remote command DISPlay WINDowcn TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet on page 228 Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level Reference Level Automatically determines the optimal reference level for the current input data At the same time the internal attenuators and the preamplifier for analog baseband input the fullscale level are adjusted so the signal to noise ratio is optimized while signal com pression clipping and overload conditions are minimized In order to do so a level measurement is performed to determine the optimal reference level You can change the measurement time for the level measurement if necessary see Changing the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Manual on page 126 Remote command SENSe ADJust LEVel on page 262 Mechanical Attenuation Defines the mechanical attenuation for RF input This function is not available for input from the R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSW B17 Attenuation Mode Value Mechanical Attenuation The RF attenuation can be set automatically as a function of the selected reference level Auto mode This ensures that the optimum RF attenuation is always used It is the default setting By default and when Using Electronic Attenuation Option B25 is not available mechanical attenuation is applied This function is not available for input from the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 In Manual mode you can set the RF att
188. S FSW User Manual Load Standard Setup Standard Loads the selected measurement settings file Remote command SENSe ADEMod PRESet STANdard on page 176 Save Standard Setup Standard Saves the current measurement settings for a specific standard as a file with the defined name Remote command SENSe ADEMod PRESet STORe on page 177 Delete Standard Setup Standard Deletes the selected standard Standards predefined by Rohde amp Schwarz can also be deleted A confirmation query is displayed to avoid unintentional deletion of the standard Note Restoring predefined standard files The standards predefined by Rohde amp Schwarz available at the time of delivery can be restored using the Restore Stand ards softkey ERREUR RA N User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 52 R amp S FSW K7 Configuration 5 3 CR Ca Overview Configuration Overview See Restore Standard Files on page 53 Restore Standard Files Setup Standard Restores the standards predefined by Rohde amp Schwarz available at the time of delivery Note that this function will overwrite customized standards that have the same name as predefined standards Remote command SENSe ADEMod PRESet RESTore on page 176 Configuration Overview Throughout the measurement configuration an overview of the most important currently defined settings is provided in the Overview The Overview
189. SENSe FILTer lt n gt CCIR WEIGhted STATe lt State gt This command activates deactivates the weighted CCIR filter for the specified evaluation For details on weighting filters see Weighting on page 114 Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example FILT CCIR WEIG ON Activates the weighted CCIR filter Manual operation See Weighting on page 114 SENSe FILTer lt n gt CCIR UNWeighted STATe State This command activates deactivates the unweighted CCIR filter in the specified window For details on weighting filters see Weighting on page 114 Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example FILT CCIR UNW ON Activates the unweighted CCIR filter Manual operation See Weighting on page 114 SENSe FILTer n CCIT State This command activates deactivates the CCITT CCITT P 53 weighting filter for the specified evaluation For details on weighting filters see Weighting on page 114 Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example FILT CCIT ON Activates the CCITT weighting filter Manual operation See Weighting on page 114 SENSe FlLTer lt n gt DEMPhasis TCONstant This command selects the deemphasis for the specified evaluation For details on deemphasis refer to Deemphasis on page 114 ERREUR RA A User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 255 R amp S FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements SSS SS ee ee ee ee Configuring the Measurement
190. STATe on page 180 Parameters Frequency numeric value Example MIX ON Activates the external mixer MIX FREQ HAND 78 0299GHz Sets the handover frequency to 78 0299 GHz Manual operation See Handover Freq on page 59 SENSe MIXer FREQuency STARt This command queries the frequency at which the external mixer band starts Example MIX FREQ STAR Queries the start frequency of the band Usage Query only Manual operation See RF Start RF Stop on page 58 SENSe MIXer FREQuency STOP This command queries the frequency at which the external mixer band stops Example MIX FREQ STOP Queries the stop frequency of the band Usage Query only Manual operation See RF Start RF Stop on page 58 SENSe MIXer HARMonic BAND PRESet This command restores the preset frequency ranges for the selected standard waveguide band Note Changes to the band and mixer settings are maintained even after using the PRESET function Use this command to restore the predefined band ranges LEE User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 183 R amp S9FSW K7 Remote Commands fo r Analog Demodulation Measurements Example Usage Manual operation MIX HARM BAND PRI Configuring the Measurement E ES Presets the selected waveguide band Event See Preset Band on page 59 SENSe MIXer HARMonic BAND VALue Band This command selects the external mixer band The query returns the currently sel
191. SW User Manual Parameters lt Name gt lt Generator name as string value gt RST SMUO2 Example SYST COMM RDEV GEN2 TYPE SMEO2 Selects SME02 as generator 2 Manual operation See Generator Type on page 74 SYSTem COMMunicate TCPip RDEVice GENerator ADDRess Address Configures the TCP IP address for the external generator Parameters Address TCP IP address between 0 0 0 0 and 0 255 255 255 RST 0 0 0 0 Example SYST COMM TCP RDEV GEN ADDR 130 094 122 195 Manual operation See GPIB Address TCP IP Address on page 74 Source Calibration The following commands are required to activate the calibration functions of the external tracking generator However they are only available if external generator control is active see SOURce EXTernal STATe on page 215 Remote commands exclusive to source calibration DISPlay WINDow n TRACe Y SCALe RPOSition esee 218 DiSblavlfWiNDow nzTRACevtSCALelbRVAl ue enne nnne 219 SENSe CORRection COLLect ACQuire 2222 0 re rete rnt ttn atn ennt iR de inna 219 Eed EN TN ET 220 SENS amp J CORR amp cIoOnEECall 2 1 2 ek heaters tied decease eee aa 220 SENSeICORReCHON S TAT EE 220 ISENZGeICObRechon TRAhNSsducer GENerator enne 221 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe RPOSition Position This command defines the vertical position of the reference level on the display grid The R am
192. SaveAs Be careful however to adhere to the required syntax and commands Errors will only be detected and displayed when you try to use the new generator see also chapter 4 7 4 8 Displayed Information and Errors on page 45 For details see chapter 4 7 4 3 Generator Setup Files on page 39 Frequency Min Frequency Max For reference only Lower and upper frequency limit for the generator Level Min Level Max For reference only Lower and upper power limit for the generator Measurement Settings The measurement settings for external generator control are configured in the Mea surement Configuration subtab of the External Generator tab Cie s Spectrum i Input Source Power Sensor Tracking Generator Measurement Configuration Measurement Configuration Interface Source Power 20 0 dBm TERET 0 0 dB Configuration K J Source Calibration Freg ling CoUPIDO Sate ee b 1 1 Source Freq RF SE DR Result Frequency Start Result Frequency Stop ere 76 SOUE POWT E 76 SOURCE ONSON UE 76 source Fred ency COUPING DEE 76 Manual Source PIEQUOMCY EE 76 Automatic Source Frequency Numerator DenorminatoriOftset 77 FROSUIUPIGQUONGY Sae E 77 Result F requefiey SIOD acinsar aariaid iieii 77 User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 75 R amp S FSW K7 Configuration REESEN Input and Frontend Settings Source State Activates or deactivates control
193. Se MIXer PORTs on page 187 Mixer Settings Harmonics Configuration The harmonics configuration determines the frequency range for user defined bands see Band on page 59 E N User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 59 R amp S FSW K7 Configuration aS X m a a Input and Frontend Settings Harmonic Type Mixer Settings Harmonics Configuration Defines if only even only odd or even and odd harmonics can be used for conversion Depending on this selection the order of harmonic to be used for conversion changes see Harmonic Order on page 60 Which harmonics are supported depends on the mixer type Remote command SENSe MIXer HARMonic TYPE on page 185 Range 1 2 Mixer Settings Harmonics Configuration Enables the use of a second harmonic to cover the band s frequency range For each range you can define which harmonic to use and how the Conversion loss is handled Remote command SENSe MIXer HARMonic HIGH STATe on page 184 Harmonic Order Mixer Settings Harmonics Configuration Defines which of the available harmonic orders of the LO is used to cover the frequency range By default the lowest order of the specified harmonic type is selected that allows con version of input signals in the whole band If due to the LO frequency the conversion is not possible using one harmonic the band is split For the band USER the order of harmonic is defined by the user The order of harmonic can be betw
194. T 6dB Example CALC MARK FUNC NDBD 3dB Sets the distance to the reference marker to 3 dB CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion NDBDown FREQuency This command queries the position of the n dB down markers on the x axis when meas uring in the frequency domain User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 308 R amp S FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements RAM E Q JA sew Analyzing Results To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchronization to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single sweeps See also INI Tiate CONTinuous on page 271 Return values Frequency frequency 1 absolute frequency of the n dB marker to the left of the reference marker in Hz frequency 2 absolute frequency of the n dB marker to the right of the reference marker in Hz Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode CALC MARK FUNC NDBD ON Switches on the n dB down function INIT WAI Starts a sweep and waits for the end CALC MARK FUNC NDBD FREQ This command would return for example 100000000 200000000 meaning that the first marker position is at 100 MHz the second marker position is at 200 MHz Usage Query only Manual operation See n dB down Delta Value on page 143 CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion NDBDown QFACtor This command q
195. T OUTPUT connector on the front panel Trigger 3 TRIGGER 3 INPUT OUTPUT connector on the rear panel Trigger 1 is INPUT only Note Providing trigger signals as output is described in detail in the R amp S FSW User Manual Input The signal at the connector is used as an external trigger source by the R amp S FSW No further trigger parameters are available for the connec tor E User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 124 R amp S FSW K7 Configuration Output Settings Output The R amp S FSW sends a trigger signal to the output connector to be used by connected devices Further trigger parameters are available for the connector Note For offline AF or RF triggers no output signal is provided Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel on page 246 OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt DIRection on page 246 Output Type Trigger 2 3 Type of signal to be sent to the output Device Trig Default Sends a trigger when the R amp S FSW triggers gered Trigger Sends a high level trigger when the R amp S FSW is in Ready for trig Armed ger state This state is indicated by a status bit in the STATus OPERation reg ister bit 5 as well as by a low level signal at the AUX port pin 9 For details see the description of the STATus OPERation register in the R amp S FSW User Manual and the description of the AUX port in the R amp S FSW Getting Started manual User Defined Sends a trigger when user selects Send T
196. Tem COMMunicate RDEVice GENerator TE 218 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice PME Ter COUND nene 202 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice PMETer p CONFigure AUTO STATe eee 202 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice PMETer lt p gt DEFine SYSTem COMMunicate TCPip RDEVice GENerator ADDRESS eee cee cess eeeee cess eeeeeseneeeseeeeeseeseaeees 218 Sv Tem bt Ger CHANnelt EXECUTE ENNEN 175 SY STEM ESE QUENGCE E 274 BENEKE KEE 283 TRlGoert St OuencelDGBbower HOL Doft 238 TRIGger SEQuence DTIMe TRIGger SEQuence HOLDoff TIME 239 TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HOLDoffa cc ccccccscccacseeveedecssecucsbaceuecessaceecsacuschevsateepecsuasteasatacosediacsecaseseseesdeses 239 TRiGger SEQuence IF PowWer HYSTEresis c sccssssscseasensstenssensenenseseesteensanenseeeesseeasseensceceaagnesnestenensnes 239 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel AM RELative eeseessesssessseseeeeneeneee nen nennen ren rsnnenee trees nnns 241 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel AM ABSolute cessent nennen nennen nnne 242 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel BBPower TRIGger SEQuence LEVel FM nre rrt erre tenent ecran re rire TRIGger SEQuence LP EVeLIEPGOWSLE nun rere ennt rtr eben eet et rau prenne nerd e ea need gene tnus TRIGger SEQuence LEVel IQPOWer ert rent tnn nnn enne eroe do tnn toan thi reb serbe ENSACA TRIGger SEQuence LEVel PM Eeer dee eek Ek dank Yao eae dude dE TRIGger SEQuence LEVel REPOWSer oret n
197. Xed RPOint X on page 304 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion FIXed RPOint MAXimum PEAK on page 304 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion PNOise AUTO on page 311 2 Switching All Phase Noise Measurements Off Deactivates phase noise measurement for all markers Remote command CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion PNOise STATe on page 311 6 5 2 ndB Down Marker A special marker can be defined to determine a characteristic bandwidth or time span in a measured signal n dB down markers are configured in the N dB Down Config dialog box using the n dB down function To display the N dB Down Config dialog box do one of the following e Press the MKR FUNC key then select the Select Marker Function softkey Then select the n dB down button Select the N dB Down Config softkey e Inthe Overview select Analysis and switch to the vertical Marker Function Con fig tab Then select the n dB down button Select the N dB Down Config softkey User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 142 R amp S FSW K7 Analysis Marker Peak List Configuration Marker n dB down N dB Down Value 3 008 ndi dowh MARKET EE 143 We Ee ee Bella EE EE 143 n dB down Marker State Activates or deactivates the special n dB down marker function Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion NDBDown STATe on page 310 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt
198. a limit line with CALCulate LIMit lt k gt NAME on page 317 Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Visibility on page 146 CALCulate LIMit lt k gt LOWer THReshold Threshold This command defines a threshold for relative limit lines LEE User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 316 R amp S FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements REESEN Analyzing Results The R amp S FSW uses the threshold for the limit check if the limit line violates the threshold Parameters lt Threshold gt Numeric value The unit depends on CALCulate LIMit k UNIT on page 317 RST 200 dBm Manual operation See Threshold on page 149 CALCulate LIMit lt k gt NAME lt Name gt This command selects a limit line that already exists or defines a name for a new limit line Parameters lt Name gt String containing the limit line name RST REM1 to REM8 for lines 1 to 8 Manual operation See Name on page 149 CALCulate LIMit lt k gt UNIT lt Unit gt This command defines the unit of a limit line Parameters lt Unit gt If you select dB as the limit line unit the command automatically turns the limit line into a relative limit line RST DBM Manual operation See Y Axis on page 149 CALCulate LIMit lt k gt UPPer DATA lt LimitLinePoints gt This command defines the vertical definition points of an upper limit line Parameters lt LimitLinePoints
199. a marker position CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MREF Reference This command selects a reference marker for a delta marker other than marker 1 The reference may be another marker or the fixed reference Parameters Reference 1 to 16 Selects markers 1 to 16 as the reference FIXed Selects the fixed reference as the reference Example CALC DELT3 MREF 2 Specifies that the values of delta marker 3 are relative to marker 2 Manual operation See Reference Marker on page 134 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt STATe State This command turns delta markers on and off If necessary the command activates the delta marker first No suffix at DELTamarker turns on delta marker 1 Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC DELT2 ON Turns on delta marker 2 Manual operation See Marker State on page 133 See Marker Type on page 134 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt TRACe Trace This command selects the trace a delta marker is positioned on LEE User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 296 R amp S FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements a_a a a a MM a M Analyzing Results Note that the corresponding trace must have a trace mode other than Blank If necessary the command activates the marker first Parameters lt Trace gt Trace number the marker is assigned to Example CALC DELT2 TRAC 2 Positions delta marker 2 on trace 2 CALCula
200. abel in the channel bar Negative offsets can be used to define reverse sweeps For more information on coupling frequencies and reverse sweeps see chapter 4 7 4 7 Coupling the Frequencies on page 43 For more information on error messages and the channel bar see chapter 4 7 4 8 Displayed Information and Errors on page 45 Remote command SOURce EXTernal FREQuency FACTor DENominator on page 214 SOURce EXTernal FREQuency FACTor NUMerator on page 214 SOURce EXTernal FREQuency OFFSet on page 215 Result Frequency Start For reference only The start frequency for the generator calculated from the configured generator frequency and the start value defined for the R amp S FSW Result Frequency Stop For reference only The stop frequency for the generator calculated from the configured generator frequency and the stop value defined for the R amp S FSW Source Calibration Functions The calibration functions of the external generator are available in the Source Calibra tion subtab of the External Generator tab but only if external generator control is active see Source State on page 76 e User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 7T R amp S FSW K7 Configuration a SS SS SS Input and Frontend Settings d 7 Input Source Power Sensor Tracking Generator LU Measurement Configuration Inte
201. able on page 24 See Marker Peak List on page 25 See Marker Position X value on page 134 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt Y This command queries the position of a marker on the y axis If necessary the command activates the marker first To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchronization to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single sweeps See also 1NTTiate CONTinuous on page 271 If the analog demodulator option Analog Demodulation R amp S FSW K7 is activated the query result is output in the following units in the specified window Result display Output unit AM 96 FM Hz PM rad deg defined with UNIT ANGLe on page 259 RF dB Range Log or Range Linear Range Linear dB Return values lt Result gt Result at the marker position User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 294 R amp S FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements REESEN Analyzing Results Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single measurement mode CALC MARK2 ON Switches marker 2 INIT WAI Starts a measurement and waits for the end CALC MARK2 Y Outputs the measured value of marker 2 Usage Query only Manual operation See Marker Table on page 24 See Marker Peak List on page 25 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker AOFF This command turns all delta markers off Example CALC DELT AOFF Turns all delta marke
202. able for the Analog Demodulation application are displayed in the evaluation bar in SmartGrid mode when you do one of the following Select the EJ SmartGrid icon from the toolbar e Select the Demod Display button in the Overview e Press the MEAS key e Select the Display Config softkey in the main Analog Demod menu Up to six evaluation methods can be displayed simultaneously in separate windows The Analog Demodulation evaluation methods are described in chapter 3 Measurements and Result Displays on page 15 o For details on working with the SmartGrid see the R amp S FSW Getting Started manual 5 8 Demodulation Demodulation parameters can be configured in the Demodulation Settings dialog box which is displayed when you select the Demod Settings button in the Overview LEE User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 105 R amp S FSW K7 Configuration Demodulation e Basic Demodulation Measurement Parameters UDemod 106 EE ee DEN Lee ET 109 XE dlc desse ge See E neil aes 112 WGA e EE 115 S UNNS arina hee 119 5 8 1 Basic Demodulation Measurement Parameters Demod The basic demodulation measurement parameters define how the measurement is per formed They are configured in the Demod tab of the Demodulation Settings dialog box gt To display this dialog box do one of the following e Select the Demod Settings button in the Analog Demodulation Overview and select the Demod tab e Select the MEAS CONF
203. age Event p H V H X User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 262 R amp S FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements 11 4 10 Configuring the Measurement Manual operation See Reference Level on page 86 See Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level on page 87 SENSe JADJust SCALe Y AUTO CONTinuous lt State gt Activates automatic scaling of the y axis in all diagrams according to the current mea surement results Currently auto scaling is only available for AF measurements RF power and RF spectrum measurements are not affected by the auto scaling Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example SENS ADJ SCAL Y AUTO ON Manual operation See AF Auto Scale on page 118 Configuring Standard Traces Useful commands for trace configuration described elsewhere DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SPACing on page 233 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe on page 231 Remote commands exclusive to trace configuration DISPlayEWINBowens E TRAGest MODE iieietecci inuidia eere at Ene e ua 2a eR c DUE spain deae 263 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t MODE HCONtinuous eese 264 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t SELect sss enne nnne nnne 265 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t STATe cessisse nnne nnn 265 SENSe ADEMod AM ABSolute TDOMain TYPE
204. age Event Manual operation See Peak Search on page 139 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum RIGHt This command moves a marker to the next lower peak The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker position Usage Event Manual operation See Search Mode for Next Peak on page 137 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum LEFT This command moves a marker to the next minimum value The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker position Usage Event Manual operation See Search Mode for Next Peak on page 137 Ee User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 301 R amp S FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements a_a a a M M Analyzing Results CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum NEXT This command moves a marker to the next minimum value Usage Event Manual operation See Search Mode for Next Peak on page 137 See Search Next Minimum on page 139 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum PEAK This command moves a marker to the minimum level If the marker is not yet active the command first activates the marker Usage Event Manual operation See Search Minimum on page 139 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum RIGHt This command moves a marker to the next minimum value The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker position Usage Event Manual operation See Search Mode for Next P
205. alyzer into account for the measured power see Shifting the Display Offset on page 86 If deactivated takes no offset into account Remote command SENSe PMETer p ROFFset STATe on page 209 LEE User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 83 R amp S FSW K7 Configuration i X a a i Input and Frontend Settings Average Count Number of Readings Defines the number of readings averages to be performed after a single sweep has been started This setting is only available if manual averaging is selected Meas Time Average setting The values for the average count range from 0 to 256 in binary steps 1 2 4 8 For average count 0 or 1 one reading is performed The general averaging and sweep count for the trace are independent from this setting Results become more stable with extended average particularly if signals with low power are measured This setting can be used to minimize the influence of noise in the power sensor measurement Remote command SENSe PMETer lt p gt MTIMe AVERage COUNt on page 208 Duty Cycle Sets the duty cycle to a percent value for the correction of pulse modulated signals and activates the duty cycle correction With the correction activated the sensor calculates the signal pulse power from this value and the mean power Remote command SENSe PMETer lt p gt DCYCle STATe on page 206 SENSe PHETer p DCYCle VALue on page 206 Using the power sensor
206. ameters lt Frequency gt numeric value Range 10 Hz to DemodBW 10 300 kHz for active demod ulation output RST 100 Hz Example OUTP ADEM ONL AF CFR 100Hz Manual operation See AC Cutoff Frequency on page 124 OUTPut ADEMod ONLine PHONes State In addition to sending the output to the IF VIDEO DEMOD OUTPUT connector on the rear panel of the R amp S FSW it can also be output to headphones connected on the front panel PHONES connector p D o User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 224 R amp S9FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements 11 4 4 Configuring the Measurement CAUTION To protect your hearing make sure that the volume setting is not too high before putting on the headphones If you do not hear output on the connected headphones despite having enabled both general online demod output OUTPut ADEMod ONLine STATe on page 223 and this command adjust the volume setting using the rotary knob on the front panel Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example OUTP ADEM PHON ON Manual operation See Phones Output on page 124 Frequency Settings SENS amp TIFREDQ ency t CENITSE uii drei rec eee ie dete date ecu rose E 225 Ei Ee el NEE 225 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK eeesesssseeeeeee eren nennen eene nn tnter nnne 226 SENSe FREOUus
207. ameters lt Unit gt DBM WATT W RST DBM Example UNIT PMET POW DBM Manual operation See Unit Scale on page 83 UNIT lt n gt PMETer lt p gt POWer RATio lt Unit gt This command selects the unit for relative power sensor measurements Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters lt Unit gt DB PCT RST DB Example UNIT PMET POW RAT DB Manual operation See Unit Scale on page 83 Triggering with Power Sensors SENSeJPMETereps Tee acad naa teta aii aiiai causa b Rad iaaiiai 210 SENS amp JTJPMETersp TRIGgerHOLDBOofr uei acted etat use i enc reete 211 SENSE PME Terp TRIGE HYS NEE 211 IGENZGe DM TercpzTRilGoerL Eve 212 SENS amp PMETerspTRIGger SLOPE eenegen 212 SENS amp PMETersp TRIGgerES TATe ca inicr aE EEn NN ENEA 212 SENSe PMETer lt p gt TRIGger DTIMe lt Time gt This command defines the time period that the input signal has to stay below the IF power trigger level before the measurement starts UU User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 210 R amp S FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements a_a E a u Se ee ee ea Configuring the Measurement Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters lt Time gt Range Os to 1s Increment 100 ns RST 100 us Example PMET2 TRIG DTIMe 0 001 SENSe PMETer lt p gt TRIGger HOLDoff lt Holdoff gt This command defines the trigger holdoff for external power triggers Suffix lt p gt
208. anaging Settings and Results e Setting Up the Instrument e Using the Status Register Channel specific commands Apart from a few general commands on the R amp S FSW most commands refer to the currently active channel Thus always remember to activate an Analog Demodulation channel before starting a remote program for an Analog Demodulation measurement Oh WU E EE 166 11 1 1 Conventions used in Descrptions 2 ccc ce cece cece c eee eeeeenecaeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeteeeenaaees 167 1141 2 Long and Short Form rette REESEN 168 11 1 3 NUMONC SUTIIXOS EE 168 11 1 4 Optional KeyWOEFds iecna creber EEA Rae endian 168 11 1 5 Alternative Keywords erint Hee eben ndr pena hie 169 R NNEN 169 11 2 COMMON Suffixaes niece recte tereti ASRASA TAAA RSRS 171 11 3 Activating Analog Demodulation Measurements eene 172 RETE RU UE e e 1 ALLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLULL UU User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 165 R amp S9FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements 11 4 11 4 1 11 4 2 11 4 3 11 4 4 11 4 5 11 4 6 11 4 7 11 4 8 11 4 9 11 4 10 11 5 11 6 11 6 1 11 6 2 11 7 11 7 1 11 7 2 11 7 3 11 7 4 11 7 5 11 8 11 8 1 11 8 2 11 8 3 11 8 4 11 9 11 10 11 11 11 1 Introduction Configuring the Measurement eeeeeeeeeeeeneeen nennen nnne nnne nnne 175 Managing Standard Gettings emnes 176 Configuring the Input 177 Conf
209. and AVERage the previous results are reset on restarting the measurement You can synchronize to the end of the measurement with OPC OPC or WAI For details on synchronization see the Remote Basics chapter in the R amp S FSW User Manual e V a User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 271 R amp S FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements NN SS ss ss Capturing Data and Performing Sweeps Example For Spectrum application INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode DISP WIND TRAC MODE AVER Switches on trace averaging SWE COUN 20 Sets the sweep counter to 20 sweeps INIT WAI Starts the measurement and waits for the end of the 20 sweeps Manual operation See Single Sweep RUN SINGLE on page 104 INITiate SEQuencer ABORt This command stops the currently active sequence of measurements The Sequencer itself is not deactivated so you can start a new sequence immediately using INITiate SEQuencer IMMediate on page 272 To deactivate the Sequencer use SYSTem SEQuencer on page 274 Usage Event INITiate SEQuencer IMMediate This command starts a new sequence of measurements by the Sequencer Its effect is similar to the INITiate IMMediate command used for a single measurement Before this command can be executed the Sequencer must be activated see SYSTem SEQuencer
210. and Exporting UO Data and Results eeneeeeeee 326 Commands for Compatibility eeeeeeeeeeeeeneeneneenenn nennen nennen nnn 327 Programming Example 2 tinere nennen gne tR oth ka axe eee tu FR e Revue e kae eee nad 328 Reference Predefined Standards and Settings 331 UO Data File Format iq tar eeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 333 UO Parameter XML File Specification eeueeeeeseeeeeereeeeeenees 334 VQ Data Binary A TE 337 User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 4 R amp S9FSW K7 Preface About this Manual 1 Preface 1 1 About this Manual This Analog Demodulation User Manual provides all the information specific to the application All general instrument functions and settings common to all applications and operating modes are described in the main R amp S FSW User Manual The main focus in this manual is on the measurement results and the tasks required to obtain them The following topics are included Welcome to the Analog Demodulation Application Introduction to and getting familiar with the application Measurements and Result Displays Details on supported measurements and their result types Measurement Basics Background information on basic terms and principles in the context of the measure ment Configuration Analysis A concise description of all functions and settings
211. anual 1173 9240 02 13 327 R amp S9FSW K7 11 11 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements AMEN E G a Programming Example CALCulate n FEED Evaluation This command selects the evaluation method of the measured data that is to be displayed in the specified window Note that this command is maintained for compatibility reasons only Use the LAYout commands for new remote control programs see chapter 11 6 2 Working with Windows in the Display on page 275 Parameters Evaluation Type of evaluation you want to display See the table below for available parameter values Example INST SEL ADEM Activates analog demodulator CALC F 2 ED XTIM FM Selects the display of the FM signal Table 11 7 lt Evaluation gt parameter values for the AnalogDemod application Parameter Evaluation XTIM AM RELative AM Time Domain XTIM AM RELative AFSPectrum AM Spectrum XTIM FM FM Time Domain XTIM FM AFSPectrum FM Spectrum XTIM PM PM Time Domain XTIM PM AFSPectrum PM Spectrum XTIM SPECtrum RF Spectrum XTIM AM XTIM RFPower RF Time Domain RF power XTIM AMSummary XTIM AMSummary RELative XTIM FMSummary XTIM FMSummary RELative XTIM PMSummary XTIM PMSummary RELative XTIM SUMMary R
212. arameters and a data section containing the trace data Optionally the header can be excluded from the file see Include Instrument Measurement Settings on page 131 The data of the file header consist of three columns each separated by a semicolon parameter name numeric value basic unit The data section starts with the keyword Trace lt n gt lt n gt number of stored trace followed by the measured data in one or several columns depending on the measurement which are also separated by a semi colon The results are output in the same order as they are displayed on the screen window by window trace by trace and table row by table row Generally the format of this ASCII file can be processed by spreadsheet calculation pro grams e g MS Excel Different language versions of evaluation programs may require a different handling of the decimal point Thus you can define the decimal separator to be used decimal point or comma see Decimal Separator on page 132 Table 11 5 ASCII file format for trace export File contents Description Header data Type R amp S FSW Instrument model Version 5 00 Firmware version Date 01 Oct 2006 Date of data set storage Mode ANALYZER Operating mode Preamplifier OFF Preamplifier status Transducer OFF Transducer status Center Freq 55000 Hz Center frequency Freq Offset 0 Hz Frequency offset Start 10000 Hz S
213. arker Numbers on page 145 CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion FPEaks COUNt This command queries the number of peaks that have been found during a peak search The actual number of peaks that have been found may differ from the number of peaks you have set to be found because of the peak excursion Return values lt NumberOfPeaks gt Example CALC MARK FUNC FPE COUN Queries the number of peaks Usage Query only CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FPEaks IMMediate lt Peaks gt This command initiates a peak search Parameters lt Peaks gt This parameter defines the number of peaks to find during the search Note that the actual number of peaks found during the search also depends on the peak excursion you have set with CALCulate lt n gt MARKer PEXCursion Range 1 to 200 Example CALC MARK PEXC 5 Defines a peak excursion of 5 dB i e peaks must be at least 5 dB apart to be detected as a peak CALC MARK FUNC FPE 10 Initiates a search for 10 peaks on the current trace CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FPEaks LIST SIZE lt MaxNoPeaks gt This command defines the maximum number of peaks that the R amp S FSW looks for during a peak search User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 306 R amp S FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements Se Analyzing Results Parameters lt MaxNoPeaks gt Maximum number of peaks to be determined Range 1 to 200 RST 50
214. as an external trigger If activated the power sensor creates a trigger signal when a power higher than the defined External Trigger Level is measured This trigger signal can be used as an external power trigger by the R amp S FSW This setting is only available in conjunction with a compatible power sensor For details on using a power sensor as an external trigger see the R amp S FSW User Man ual Remote command SENSe PMETer lt p gt TRIGger STATe on page 212 TRIG SOUR PSE See TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 243 External Trigger Level Using the power sensor as an external trigger Defines the trigger level for the power sensor trigger For details on supported trigger levels see the data sheet Remote command SENSe PMETer lt p gt TRIGger LEVel on page 212 Hysteresis Using the power sensor as an external trigger Defines the distance in dB to the trigger level that the trigger source must exceed before a trigger event occurs Setting a hysteresis avoids unwanted trigger events caused by noise oscillation around the trigger level Remote command SENSe PMETer lt p gt TRIGger HYSTeresis on page 211 Ee User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 84 R amp S FSW K7 Configuration Input and Frontend Settings Trigger Holdoff Using the power sensor as an external trigger Defines the minimum time in seconds that must pass between two trigger events Trig ger events that oc
215. aseband Input Connector Radio Frequency State x ice nere e Ded aire ti eee ete edo e eta nutre eee 56 MNput Coupling E EMT 56 MTV SAMO e ey va taste EE 56 High Pass Filtar ET EE 56 ue EEN 56 wer l iere 57 User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 55 R amp S FSW K7 Configuration mA OR H m Input and Frontend Settings Radio Frequency State Activates input from the RF INPUT connector Remote command INPut SELect on page 179 Input Coupling The RF input of the R amp S FSW can be coupled by alternating current AC or direct current DC This function is not available for input from the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 or from the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 AC coupling blocks any DC voltage from the input signal This is the default setting to prevent damage to the instrument Very low frequencies in the input signal may be dis torted However some specifications require DC coupling In this case you must protect the instrument from damaging DC input voltages manually For details refer to the data sheet Remote command INPut COUPling on page 178 Impedance The reference impedance for the measured levels of the R amp S FSW can be set to 50 O or 75 Q 75 Q should be selected if the 50 Q input impedance is transformed to a higher impedance using a 75 Q adapter of the RAZ type 25 Q in series to the i
216. at32 e xyz polar 1ch float64 e xyzreal 1ch int16 e xyz complex 16ch int8 User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 335 R amp S FSW K7 UO Data File Format iq tar aS SS a es Se UO Parameter XML File Specification Element Description UserData Optional contains user application or device specific XML data which is not part of the iq tar specification This element can be used to store additional information e g the hardware configuration User data must be valid XML content PreviewData Optional contains further XML elements that provide a preview of the I Q data The preview data is determined by the routine that saves an iq tar file e g R amp S FSW For the definition of this element refer to the RsIqTar xsd schema Note that the preview can be only displayed by current web browsers that have JavaScript enabled and if the XSLT stylesheet open IqTar xml file in web browser xslt is available Example ScalingFactor Data stored as int16 and a desired full scale voltage of 1 V ScalingFactor 1 V maximum int16 value 1 V 215 3 0517578125e 5 V Scaling Factor Numerical value Numerical value x ScalingFactor Minimum negative int16 value 215 32768 1V Maximum positive int16 value 215 1 32767 0 999969482421875 V Example PreviewData in XML lt PreviewData gt lt ArrayOfChannel length 1 gt lt Channel gt lt PowerVsTime gt lt Min gt lt ArrayOfFloat length 2
217. ata is evaluated It is configured in the Spectrum tab of the Demodulation Settings dialog box gt To display this dialog box do one of the following e Select the Demod Settings button in the Analog Demodulation Overview and select the Spectrum tab e Select the MEAS CONFIG key and then the Demod Config softkey Then select the Spectrum tab Depending on the evaluation AF or RF display the settings vary e AF Evaluation ied cer eode excede ne ee er dob necs p Es a Do eUUN 109 e RP VG UO sce Ee ited ented edie ee 110 5 8 2 1 AF Evaluation These settings are only available for AF Spectrum evaluations not in the time domain Demod Spectrum AfFilter Scaling Unit Settings AF Center AF Start AF Stop AF Span AF Full Span s 2 AM Spectrum t User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 109 R amp S FSW K7 Configuration a Demodulation AE E E A E E E EE E E EEEE E T E 110 AF Siana ee a a ee 110 TEE 110 AF SPAM EP 110 zzi TT 110 AF Center Defines the center frequency of the demodulated data to evaluate Remote command SENSe ADEMod AF CENTer on page 252 AF Start Defines the start frequency of the demodulated data to evaluate Remote command SENSe ADEMod AF STARt on page 252 AF Stop Defines the stop frequency of the demodulated data to evaluate The maximum AF stop frequency
218. ation See Peak Search on page 139 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum RIGHt This command moves a delta marker to the next higher value The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker position Usage Event Manual operation See Search Mode for Next Peak on page 137 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum LEFT This command moves a delta marker to the next higher minimum value The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker position Usage Event Manual operation See Search Mode for Next Peak on page 137 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum NEXT This command moves a marker to the next higher minimum value Usage Event Manual operation See Search Mode for Next Peak on page 137 See Search Next Minimum on page 139 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum PEAK This command moves a delta marker to the minimum level If the marker is not yet active the command first activates the marker Usage Event Manual operation See Search Minimum on page 139 LEES User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 303 R amp S9FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements 11 8 1 5 Analyzing Results CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum RIGHt This command moves a delta marker to the next higher minimum value The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker position Usage Even
219. ave vector of complex cartesian I Q data i e iqiqiq N 100 iq randn 1 N 1j randn 1 N fid fopen xyz complex float32 w for k 1 length iq fwrite fid single real iq k float32 fwrite fid single imag iq k float32 end fclose fid R amp S FSW K7 List of Remote Commands AnalogDemod List of Remote Commands AnalogDemod ABOR m 269 EE BT ee 320 CALCulate EIMit CEEar IMMediate 23 1 prre berita terre rin Aana aani EK ben tete ped 321 CAL Gulate EIMIEGOMMIBTIE s nets ettet ene dne ne ener m hene ene tete eerte ree neci 313 CALCulate LIMit k CONTrol DOMain eese eene nente nennen nnne nnne nennen tnr tnn annees innate sanas 313 CAL Culate LIMitsks CONTEOEMOBDE tetendit nette ite do bete Eier inge 313 CAL Culate LIMit lt k gt CONTFOEOFESet ciiin en eio tte ect nenne cemere eee enda ba resins Debes 314 CALCulate LIMit lt k gt CONTrol SHIFt CALCulate LIMit k CONTrol SPACing esses nnne nn nenne nitentes inns iri tn sensns 314 CAECulate EIMitske CONTEFOI DATA iate ttn th rta tnnt te tte ENEE 313 EE BO ee EE 320 CAL Culate LIMItsk gt DEMete irria aee e it ea aa copa EE E ENEN e iaieiiea adiis i aSa EENS 320 CAE Gulate EIMiESK UE 322 CAL Culate EIMitsks EOWher MAR GIR eni rro ten trennen terreni bate thc
220. ay cseuc itta t 2E acce ratas ta zoe E Eva dave uan dug 322 e Configuring an Analysis Interval and Line MSRA mode only 324 Working with Markers Remotely In the Analog Demodulation application up to 16 markers or delta markers can be acti vated for each window simultaneously More details are described for manual operation in chapter 6 5 Marker Function Con figuration on page 140 e Setting Up Individual Markers eese nnne nnns 292 e General Marker Sotgan ru Eaton Y az ei veda uu adde 298 e Marker Search Setllngs aider erret aee E Led Fe se Reda 300 e Positioning the MarKGF eecenc erre repere ente EE 300 e Configuring Special Marker Futictiori coiiicenc ei cient eade te 304 Setting Up Individual Markers The following commands define the position of markers in the diagram CAL Culate nz M AbkercmzACOEtF nnne 293 CAL Culate nz M Abker m1z LINK TOMAbkercm z hene nh nen ss ense anas 293 CALCulate n MARKer m STATe eicere eite a aai inaia iia aiaia 293 CAL Culate nz M bkercmz TR ACe sese nh este ntssasessti sisse setis sss senis 293 GAECulatesmMARKerSIms EE 294 CAL GCulatesmnsMARK rems EE 294 GALGulate en DEETamoarketAOFF 2 2 Leto n noa inne ce Rn ntpote EES 295 CAL Culate nz DEL TamarkercmzUNk 295 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m1 gt LINK TOMAbkercm z nennen enn nnns 295 GALGulate n DELETamarker MODE eite aiana
221. by about 15 dB E N User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 88 R amp S9FSW K7 Configuration 5 4 3 2 Input and Frontend Settings 30 dB The RF input signal is amplified by about 30 dB Remote command INPut GAIN STATe on page 230 INPut GAIN VALue on page 231 Input Coupling Input Settings The RF input of the R amp S FSW can be coupled by alternating current AC or direct current DC This function is not available for input from the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 or from the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 AC coupling blocks any DC voltage from the input signal This is the default setting to prevent damage to the instrument Very low frequencies in the input signal may be dis torted However some specifications require DC coupling In this case you must protect the instrument from damaging DC input voltages manually For details refer to the data sheet Remote command INPut COUPling on page 178 Impedance lt Input Settings The reference impedance for the measured levels of the R amp S FSW can be set to 50 O or 75 Q 75 Q should be selected if the 50 Q input impedance is transformed to a higher impedance using a 75 Q adapter of the RAZ type 25 Q in series to the input impedance of the instrument The correction value in this case is 1 76 dB 10 log 750 500 This value also affects the unit conversion see Reference Level on page 86 This function is not available for in
222. can be positioned in any MSRA application or the MSRA Master and is then adjusted in all other applications Thus you can easily analyze the results at a specific time in the mea surement in all applications and determine correlations If the marked point in time is contained in the analysis interval of the application the line is indicated in all time based result displays such as time symbol slot or bit diagrams By default the analysis line is displayed however it can be hidden from view manually In all result displays the AL label in the window title bar indicates whether or not the analysis line lies within the analysis interval or not e orange AL the line lies within the interval e white AL the line lies within the interval but is not displayed hidden e no AL the line lies outside the interval User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 48 Measurement Basics R amp S9FSW K7 m M ii Analog Demodulation in MSRA Operating Mode MSRA View MSRA Master Analog Demod Ref Level 0 00 dBm Att 10dB AQT 62 5ys DBW SMHz Freq t 1 PM Time Dor LAP Clew Ref J AC 2FM Time Domain Analysis Int CF 1 0 GHZ 1001 pts 6 25 ust CF 1 0 GHz 1001 pts 5 AM Time Domain CF 1 0 GHz 100 pts Result Summary Analysis Interval 0s 0 79 dBm E ffs 11 03 kHz Mod Depth 1 57 Peak De RMS Mod Freq SINAD 1 6277 1 5654 0 519
223. can be configured via the TRACE key in the Traces dialog box or in the vertical Traces tab of the Analysis dialog box In the Analog Demodulation application when you configure the traces for a window with a specific evaluation e g AM time domain the traces in all windows with the same evaluation are configured identically User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 127 R amp S FSW K7 Analysis Trace Settings Trace data can also be exported to an ASCII file for further analysis For details see chapter 6 2 Trace Export Settings on page 131 Traces Trace Export CopyTrace Trace Math Spectrogram Mode Auto Type Hold Trace 1 Clear Write fg RS os Lad e Linear vepe LI so e I e I Sa ES a Em a SE T Quick Config Preset All Traces Set Trace Mode Set Trace Mode Max Avg Min Max Clrwrite Min Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 Trace 5 Trace 6 128 jo s 128 Ren d P 129 lon 129 Average MOOG MM 129 PV OVA Ee 130 Predefined Trace Settings Quick Conftg 130 Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 Goftkevys AA 130 Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 Trace 5 Trace 6 Selects the corresponding trace for configuration The currently selected trace is high lighted orange Remote command Selected via numeric suffix of TRACe lt 1 6 gt commands Trace Mode Defines the update m
224. ce remote control Function configuration essseeeesss Linked in AF spectrum display Linked in time domain z DUKA EE Olli TT EE Minimum remote control de MOB GOWN P n dB down remote control sssssss Next minimum is Next minimum remote control Next peak ret terreni ees Next peak remote control as is Peak qe EEN Peak remote control seeseses Peak list remote control Phase noise measurement Phase noise measurement remote control 311 Position xe ono Hm 138 Positioning remote control ssssse 292 Querying position remote ssss 294 User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 R amp S9FSW K7 Index Remote control 5 ener 292 Search settings remote ssssssssssss 300 Setting up remote control ante SAS M SEH S ZE eved ease Step size remote control Sg HEITE Table evaluation method sssssssssss Table remote control m ii HK KEE Marker table Evaluation method 0 0 00 ee cece eeeneeeseneeeeeee 24 Marker to Trace SOFIKOV 5 netter EP e rire 134 Maximizing Windows remote ss 275 Measurement accuracy External ge
225. channel bar at the top of the measurement channel tab to change a specific setting Preset Channel Select the Preset Channel button in the lower lefthand corner of the Overview to restore all measurement settings in the current channel to their default values Note that the PRESET key on the front panel restores all measurements in all mea surement channels on the R amp S FSW to their default values For details see chapter 5 1 Default Settings for Analog Demodulation on page 50 Remote command SYSTem PRESet CHANnel EXECute on page 175 Setup Standard Opens a file selection dialog box to select a predefined setup file See Setup Stand ard on page 52 Specifics for The measurement channel may contain several windows for different results Thus the settings indicated in the Overview and configured in the dialog boxes vary depending on the selected window Select an active window from the Specifics for selection list that is displayed in the Overview and in all window specific configuration dialog boxes The Overview and dialog boxes are updated to indicate the settings for the selected window Input and Frontend Settings The source and characteristics of the input signal to be demodulated are configured in the Input and Frontend Settings dialog box For background information on working with power sensors see the R amp S FSW User Manual gt To display this dialog box do one of the f
226. command is only available with option B21 External Mixer installed Usage Query only E N User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 188 R amp S FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements REESEN Configuring the Measurement SENSe CORRection CVL CLEAr This command deletes the selected conversion loss table Before this command can be performed the conversion loss table must be selected see SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 191 This command is only available with option B21 External Mixer installed Example CORR CVL SEL LOSS TAB 4 Selects the conversion loss table CORR CVL CLE Usage Event Manual operation See Delete Table on page 64 SENSe CORRection CVL COMMent Text This command defines a comment for the conversion loss table Before this command can be performed the conversion loss table must be selected see SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 191 This command is only available with option B21 External Mixer installed Parameters Text Example CORR CVL SEL LOSS TAB 4 Selects the conversion loss table CORR CVL COMM Conversion loss table for FS 260 Manual operation See Comment on page 66 SENSe CORRection CVL DATA lt Freq gt lt Level gt This command defines the reference values of the selected conversion loss tables The values are entered as a set of frequency level pairs A maximum of 50 frequency level pairs
227. corresponds to half the demodulation bandwidth Remote command SENSe ADEMod AF STOP on page 253 AF Span Defines the span around the center frequency of the demodulated data to evaluate The maximum span is DBW 2 Remote command SENSe ADEMod AF SPAN on page 252 AF Full Span Sets the span around the center frequency of the demodulated data to the maximum of DBW 2 Remote command SENSe ADEMod AF SPAN FULL on page 252 5 8 2 2 RF Evaluation These settings are only available for RF evaluation both in time and frequency domain Note that for RF data the center frequency and demodulation bandwidth correspond to the settings defined in the Input and Data Acquisition configuration User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 110 R amp S FSW K7 Configuration Demodulation Demod Spectrum Scaling Unit Center 13 25 GHz Span Demodulation Bandwidth 5 0 MHz RF Full Span DBW SJelaeliie piem 6 RF Time Domain E Center Defines the normal center frequency of the signal The allowed range of values for the center frequency depends on the frequency span span gt 0 SPAN min 2 ES fcenter ES fmax d SPAN min 2 fmax and span j are specified in the data sheet Remote command SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 225 Span Defines the frequency span The center frequency is kept constant The following range is allowed span 0 0 Hz span gt 0 Spanmin
228. cur during the holdoff time are ignored Remote command SENSe PHETer p TRIGger HOLDoff on page 211 Drop Out Time Using the power sensor as an external trigger Defines the time the input signal must stay below the trigger level before triggering again Slope Using the power sensor as an external trigger Defines whether triggering occurs when the signal rises to the trigger level or falls down to it Remote command SENSe PHETer p TRIGger SLOPe on page 212 5 4 3 Amplitude The amplitude is configured in the Amplitude tab of the Input Frontend dialog box Amplitude settings are identical to the base unit For background information on amplitude settings see the R amp S FSW User Manual gt To display this dialog box do one of the following e Select the Input Frontend button in the Analog Demodulation Overview and Switch to the Amplitude tab e Select the AMPT key and then the Amplitude Config softkey 5 4 3 1 Amplitude Settings for RF Input Amplitude settings can be configured via the AMPT key or in the Amplitude dialog box To display the Amplitude dialog box do one of the following e Select Amplitude from the Overview e Select the AMPT key and then the Amplitude Config softkey The remote commands required to define these settings are described in chapter 11 4 5 Configuring the Vertical Axis Amplitude Scaling on page 227 User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 85
229. d fixed filters are not avail able In this case the frequency for the low pass filter must be defined manually see also chapter 5 9 2 Analog Demodulation Output Settings on page 123 If a filter was already configured when online demodulation output is activated it is replaced by a manual filter that provides corresponding results if possible e Relative low pass filters Relative filters 3 dB can be selected in of the demodulation bandwidth The filters are designed as 5th order Butterworth filter 30 dB octave and active for all demod ulation bandwidths e None deactivates the AF low pass filter default Remote command SENSe FILTer lt n gt LPASs STATe on page 258 SENSe FILTer n LPASs FREQuency ABSolute on page 257 ENSe FILTer lt n gt LPASs FREQuency RELative on page 258 ENSe FILTer lt n gt LPASs FREQuency MANual on page 257 Weighting Selects a weighting AF filter By default no weighting filter is active A weighted Switches on the A weighted filter The weighting filter is active in the following demodulation bandwidth range 100 kHz lt demodulation bandwidth lt 800 kHz CCITT Switches on a CCITT P 53 weighting filter The weighting filter is active in the following demodulation bandwidth range 20 kHz lt demodulation bandwidth lt 3 MHz CCIR weigh Switches on the CCIR weighted filter The weighting filter is active in ted the following demodulation bandwi
230. d 253 SENSe JADEMed SPECtrum SPAN MAX mun 1222522 cea iL aana iana no tae 254 SENSe ADEMod SPEC SPAN ZOOM Span This command sets the span around the center frequency for RF spectrum result dis play The span is limited to the demodulation bandwidth see SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth DEMod on page 236 Parameters Span RST 5MHz Example ADEM SPEC SPAN ZOOM 200 kHz Sets the rF span to 200 kHz Manual operation See Span on page 111 E M User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 253 R amp S FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements PRAEMIA e T P P P P r u Configuring the Measurement SENSe JADEMod SPECtrum SPAN MAXimum lt FreqRange gt Sets the DBW to the specified value and the span around the center frequency of the RF data to be evaluated to its new maximum the demodulation bandwidth Parameters lt FreqRange gt RST 5 MHz Default unit Hz Manual operation See Span on page 111 See RF Full Span on page 112 11 4 8 4 Post processing AF Filters The AF filter reduces the evaluated bandwidth of the demodulated signal and can define a weighting function AF filters are only available for AM or FM time domain evaluations SENS amp JFIETer n AWEIghted S TAT nicer aa aiaia 254 EE TE Kn e EE 254 SENSe
231. d Interface R amp S FSW B17 is active D User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 228 R amp S FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements AMEN SS SSS SS ee ae ee ee ee es Configuring the Measurement Parameters lt Attenuation gt Range see data sheet Increment 5 dB RST 10 dB AUTO is set to ON Example INP ATT 30dB Defines a 30 dB attenuation and decouples the attenuation from the reference level Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Mechanical Attenuation on page 87 See Attenuation Mode Value on page 87 INPut ATTenuation AUTO lt State gt This command couples or decouples the attenuation to the reference level Thus when the reference level is changed the R amp S FSW determines the signal level for optimal internal data processing and sets the required attenuation accordingly This function is not available if the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 is active Parameters lt State gt ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example INP ATT AUTO ON Couples the attenuation to the reference level Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Mechanical Attenuation on page 87 See Attenuation Mode Value on page 87 INPut EATT lt Attenuation gt This command defines an electronic attenuation manually Automatic mode must be switched off INP EATT AUTO OFF see INPut EATT AUTO on page 230 If the current reference level is not compatible with an attenuation that has been set manual
232. d Interface R amp S FSW B71 is installed Remote command INPut SELect on page 179 UO Mode Defines the format of the input signal For more information on UO data processing modes see the R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input User Manual jQ The input signal is filtered and resampled to the sample rate of the application Two inputs are required for a complex signal one for the in phase com ponent and one for the quadrature component EE User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 70 R amp S FSW K7 Configuration Input and Frontend Settings Only Low IF I The input signal at the BASEBAND INPUT I connector is filtered and resampled to the sample rate of the application If the center frequency is set to 0 Hz the real baseband signal is dis played without down conversion Real Baseband l If a center frequency greater than 0 Hz is set the input signal is down converted with the center frequency Low IF I Q Only Low IF Q The input signal at the BASEBAND INPUT Q connector is filtered and resampled to the sample rate of the application If the center frequency is set to 0 Hz the real baseband signal is dis played without down conversion Real Baseband Q If a center frequency greater than 0 Hz is set the input signal is down converted with the center frequency Low IF Q Remote command INPut IQ TYPE on page 195 Input configuration Defines whether the input is provided as a differential signal via al
233. d and a sequential measurement is started immediately OFF 0 The Sequencer is deactivated Any running sequential measure ments are stopped Further Sequencer commands INIT SEQ are not available RST 0 Example SYST SEQ ON Activates the Sequencer INIT SEQ MODE SING Sets single Sequencer mode so each active measurement will be performed once INIT SEQ IMM Starts the sequential measurements SYST SEQ OFF 11 6 Configuring the Result Display The following remote commands are required to configure the screen display in a remote environment The tasks for manual operation are described in chapter 3 1 Evaluation Methods for Analog Demodulation on page 15 e General Window Comma 2 cccccccecseseccensessesececececsecanausseseeseeenenececaneas 274 e Working with Windows in the Display tcrra ener etre 275 11 6 1 General Window Commands The following commands are required to configure general window layout independant of the application Note that the suffix n always refers to the window in the currently selected measure ment channel see INSTrument SELect on page 175 DISPlay e EE 275 DISPlay WINDOwWweps S TEE 275 User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 274 R amp S FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements REESEN Configuring the Result Display DISPlay FORMat lt Format gt This command determines which tab is displayed Parameters lt Format g
234. d for transmission of trace data from the R amp S FSW to the controlling computer Note that the command has no effect for data that you send to the R amp S FSW The R amp S FSW automatically recognizes the data it receives regardless of the format Parameters lt Format gt ASCii ASCii format separated by commas This format is almost always suitable regardless of the actual data format However the data is not as compact as other formats may be REAL 32 32 bit IEEE 754 floating point numbers in the definite length block format In the Spectrum application the format setting REAL is used for the binary transmission of trace data For HO data 8 bytes per sample are returned for this format set ting RST ASCII Example FORM REAL 32 Usage SCPI confirmed TRACe lt n gt DATA lt ResultType gt This command queries current trace data and measurement results The data format depends on FORMat DATA Query parameters lt ResultType gt Selects the type of result to be returned TRACE1 TRACE6 Returns the trace data for the corresponding trace For details see table 11 4 Return values lt TraceData gt For more information see tables below User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 283 R amp S9FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements 11 7 2 Retrieving Results lt TraceData gt Returns the sweep point values as shown in the result display If you are measuring with the auto peak
235. d functions are available to configure the output in the Analog Demodulation application They can be configured via the INPUT OUTPUT key in the Output dialog box in the Analog Demod tab Note that the audio frequency AF filter settings used for demodulation also apply to the online output seechapter 5 8 3 AF Filter on page 112 However a maximum of two high pass low pass or deemphasis filters can be active at the same time if analog demodulation output is active Output Digital IQ Analog Demod Online Demod Output o Output Selection AC Cutoff Frequency 100 0 Hz Phones Output Online Demodulation Output Gtaie nne 123 E ET EH 123 Meo e EE 124 AC Cutoff E UE 124 Phones 0010 E 124 Online Demodulation Output State Enables or disables online demodulation output If enabled the demodulated audio fre quencies are output to the IF VIDEO DEMOD output connector on the rear panel of the R amp S FSW and optionally to the PHONES connector on the front panel see Phones Output on page 124 Remote command OUTPut ADEMod ONLine STATe on page 223 Output Selection Selects the result display whose results are output Only time domain results can be selected All currently active time domain result displays are listed User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 123 R amp S FSW K7 Configuration Output Settings Current Focus dynamically switches to the currently selected window Thus you can easi
236. d power sensor Manual operation See Meas Time Average on page 83 SENSe PMETer lt p gt MTIMe AVERage COUNt lt NumberReadings gt This command sets the number of power readings included in the averaging process of power sensor measurements Extended averaging yields more stable results for power sensor measurements espe cially for measurements on signals with a low power because it minimizes the effects of noise Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters lt NumberReadings gt An average count of 0 or 1 performs one power reading Range 0 to 256 Increment binary steps 1 2 4 8 Example PMET2 MTIM AVER ON Activates manual averaging PMET2 MTIM AVER COUN 8 Sets the number of readings to 8 Manual operation See Average Count Number of Readings on page 84 SENSe PMETer lt p gt MTIMe AVERage STATe lt State gt This command turns averaging for power sensor measurements on and off Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example PMET2 MTIM AVER ON Activates manual averaging Manual operation See Meas Time Average on page 83 E N User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 208 R amp S FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements AMEN SS SS ee ee ee ee ee Configuring the Measurement SENSe PMETer lt p gt ROFFset STATe lt State gt This command includes or excludes the reference level offset o
237. detector the command returns positive peak values only For the Magnitude and Spectrum result displays in the UO Ana lyzer application this command returns the magnitude of the and Q values I jQ for each sweep point 21001 values For the Real Imag I Q result display the command returns first the real parts for each trace point then the imaginary parts Joan Du Hanna For the I Q Vector result display the and Q values for each trace point are returned 1001 pairs of and Q values For analog baseband input in real baseband processing mode I or Q only only the positive spectrum is returned The values for the missing component in the Real Imag I Q and the UO vector result displays are all 0 Example TRAC TRACE3 Queries the data of trace 3 Usage SCPI confirmed Table 11 4 Return values for TRACE1 to TRACE6 parameter The trace data consists of a list of power levels that have been measured The number of power levels in the list depends on the currently selected number of sweep points The unit depends on the measurement and on the unit you have currently set Exporting Trace Results Trace results can be exported to a file For more commands concerning data and results storage see the R amp S FSW User Man ual MMEMory STOR lt n gt TRACE cccceeeeeee cree cece eee ee ee eae eee aa eee te teeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeaeeaeaeaaeaaaneneeeees 284 EE EE DS EE between ees 285 FORMatDEXPOoRtHEADLE 1
238. dth range 100 kHz x demodulation bandwidth lt 3 0 MHz CCIR Switches on the CCIR unweighted filter which is the combination of the unweighted 20 Hz highpass and 23 kHz low pass filter The weighting filter is active in the following demodulation bandwidth range 50 kHz s demodulation bandwidth x 1 6 MHz Remote command SENSe FILTer lt n gt CCIT on page 255 SENSe FILTer lt n gt CCIR UNWeighted STATe on page 255 ENSe FILTer lt n gt CCIR WEIGhted STATe on page 255 ENSe FILTer lt n gt AWEighted STATe on page 254 Deemphasis Activates a deemphasis filter with the given time constant Sometimes a modulated signal is extorted by a pre emphasis filter before transmission for example to eliminate frequencies that are more prone to interferences In this case the emphasis function must be reversed after demodulation This is done by the deem phasis filter The deemphasis filter is active in the following demodulation bandwidth range e M s User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 114 R amp S9FSW K7 Configuration 5 8 4 5 8 4 1 Demodulation 25 ys 25 kHz lt demodulation bandwidth lt 40 MHz 50 us 6 4 kHz lt demodulation bandwidth lt 18 MHz 75 ys 6 4 kHz lt demodulation bandwidth lt 18 MHz 750 ys 800 Hz lt demodulation bandwidth lt 3 MHz Depending
239. e CORRection METHod on page 220 To obtain a correct reference measurement a complete sweep with synchronization to the end of the sweep must have been carried out This is only possible in the single sweep mode This command is only available if external generator control is active see SOURce EXTernal STATe on page 215 Parameters lt MeasType gt THRough TRANsmission mode calibration with direct connection between external generator and device input REFLection mode calibration with short circuit at the input OPEN only allowed in REFLection mode calibration with open input SS D M User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 219 R amp S FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements REESEN Configuring the Measurement Example INIT CONT OFF Selects single sweep operation CORR METH TRAN Selects a transmission measurement CORR COLL THR WAI Starts the measurement of reference data using direct connection between generator and device input and waits for the sweep end Usage Setting only SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Calibrate Reflection Short on page 78 See Calibrate Reflection Open on page 79 SENSe CORRection METHod This command selects the type of measurement to be performed with the external gen erator This command is only available if external generator control is act
240. e Bil HE 149 n dB down Delta UE 143 Mater E ni eaen aE EE SNEEN ESS 143 Remote COHtrol aree ecce de rente o8 308 Next Minimum Marker positioning cese 139 Enc 139 Next Peak Marker positioning csse 139 DORK CY sic 139 Noise SOUNCE EE 47 121 NOR External generator esses 40 45 Normalization Approximate external generator 41 External generator esses 40 79 Number of Readings Power S NSOF i i ite d 84 Numerator Frequencies external generator 43 77 O Offset Analysis interval sese 102 Reference level niare e eres 86 91 Open circuit reflection measurement Calibration external generator sssss 79 Options Electronic attenuation B25 ooo eee eee 88 High pass filter B13 sssssesssss 56 178 Preamplifier B24 sss 88 Output Analog Demodulation ssssssssssss Analog Demodulation remote z Configuration softkey cceeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeees INo SG SOUFCO gege cerit erint ER Parameters S ltlirigs iret cet er aei eter ee Bo e Overload External generator AA 40 RF INPUT eL 33 RF inp t remote rerit ect 177 Overloading Externa
241. e SENS ADJ CONF HYST LOW 2 For an input signal level of currently 20 dBm the reference level will only be adjusted when the signal level falls below 18 dBm Manual operation See Lower Level Hysteresis on page 126 SENSe ADJust CONFigure HYSTeresis UPPer Threshold When the reference level is adjusted automatically using the SENSe ADJust LEVel on page 262 command the internal attenuators and the preamplifier are also adjusted In order to avoid frequent adaptation due to small changes in the input signal you can define a hysteresis This setting defines an upper threshold the signal must exceed compared to the last measurement before the reference level is adapted auto matically Parameters Threshold Range O0 dB to 200 dB RST 1dB Default unit dB Example SENS ADJ CONF HYST UPP 2 Example For an input signal level of currently 20 dBm the reference level will only be adjusted when the signal level rises above 22 dBm Manual operation See Upper Level Hysteresis on page 126 SENSe ADJust LEVel This command initiates a single internal measurement that evaluates and sets the ideal reference level for the current input data and measurement settings This ensures that the settings of the RF attenuation and the reference level are optimally adjusted to the signal level without overloading the R amp S FSW or limiting the dynamic range by an S N ratio that is too small Example ADJ LEV Us
242. e 100 See Level on page 100 LEE User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 246 R amp S FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements SSS ee ee ee Configuring the Measurement OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt OTYPe lt OutputType gt This command selects the type of signal generated at the trigger output Note For offline AF or RF triggers no output signal is provided Suffix lt port gt 2 3 Selects the trigger port to which the output is sent 2 trigger port 2 front 3 trigger port 3 rear Parameters lt OutputType gt DEVice Sends a trigger signal when the R amp S FSW has triggered internally TARMed Sends a trigger signal when the trigger is armed and ready for an external trigger event UDEFined Sends a user defined trigger signal For more information see OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel RST DEVice Manual operation See Trigger 2 3 on page 99 See Output Type on page 100 OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt PULSe IMMediate This command generates a pulse at the trigger output Suffix lt port gt 2 3 Selects the trigger port to which the output is sent 2 trigger port 2 front 3 trigger port 3 rear Usage Event Manual operation See Trigger 2 3 on page 99 See Output Type on page 100 See Send Trigger on page 100 OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt PULSe LENGth Length This command defines the length of the pulse generated at the trigger output Suffix port 2 3 Selects the tri
243. e 121 OUTPut ADEMod ONLine STATe State This command enables or disables online demodulation output to the IF VIDEO DEMOD output connector on the rear panel of the R amp S FSW User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 223 R amp S FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements NN i ee ee ee ee Configuring the Measurement Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example OUTP ADEM ON Manual operation See Online Demodulation Output State on page 123 OUTPut ADEMod ONLine SOURce lt WindowName gt This command selects the result display whose results are output Only active time domain results can be selected Parameters lt WindowName gt lt string gt String containing the name of the window By default the name of a window is the same as its index To determine the name and index of all active windows use the LAYout CATalog WINDow query FOCus Dynamically switches to the currently selected window If a win dow is selected that does not contain a time domain result display the selection is ignored and the previous setting is maintained Example OUTP ADEM ONL SOUR AnalogDemod OR DISP WIND1 SEL OUTP ADEM SOUR FOC Manual operation See Output Selection on page 123 OUTPut ADEMod ONLine AF CFRequency Frequency This command defines the cutoff frequency for the AC highpass filter for AC coupling only see SENSe ADEMod lt n gt AF COUPling on page 248 Par
244. e Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements REESEN Configuring the Measurement TRIGger SEQuence SLOPe lt Type gt For all trigger sources except time you can define whether triggering occurs when the signal rises to the trigger level or falls down to it Parameters lt Type gt POSitive NEGative POSitive Triggers when the signal rises to the trigger level rising edge NEGative Triggers when the signal drops to the trigger level falling edge RST POSitive Example TRIG SLOP NEG Manual operation See Slope on page 99 TRIGger SEQuence SOURce Source This command selects the trigger source For triggering with AF AM AMRelative FM and PM trigger sources to be successful the measurement time must cover at least 5 periods of the audio signal For details on trigger sources see Trigger Source on page 95 Note on external triggers If a measurement is configured to wait for an external trigger signal in a remote control program remote control is blocked until the trigger is received and the program can con tinue Make sure this situation is avoided in your remote control programs User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 243 R amp S9FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements Parameters Source Configuring the Measurement IMMediate Free Run EXTernal Trigger signal from the TRIGGER INPUT connector EXT2 Trigger signal from the TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connector Note Con
245. e GOUPling coire ad cct eara UM rede dete eee 198 INPUtDIQ RANGe UPP Er A 198 Nur DiOhRANGel Uber AUTO 198 INPut DIQ RANGe UPPaer UNIT 2 2 rtt epe tr rette ectetuer eia tva eat thinned nadaa in 199 INPUEDIOISRAV 6 i cetccetece 199 JS hell le MN CIE A e i cce ar t tte nas te n tee Ye nr plagas a ve o teer eee y DR 199 INPut EATT INPUCEATT ME E 230 INPOCEATT STAT EE 230 INPuUtEIETeCHPASSESTATe eie rti neret err rne tiated a te eie apt a scenes re oet d sg Edge 178 INPut FILTSRYIG EST VII enine 179 INPUE GAIN RRE 230 INPut GAIN VALue 231 INPUCIMPEdANCE SH E AN 179 INbPutIO BAL ancedGTATel eterne enne nnns tnnt en rns inris innt rennes Ensenat mnane annann 194 lege B FULLSCAlE AUTO EE 194 ly zio BUB M E eee 195 TTE A a E E E E 195 INPut SELect IN SfrumentChRtate DP lcate eene nnne nnnnr rh nnt nih rrt sah rnnt set rint dt rnn niens 172 INSTr ment GREate TEE 173 INSTrumerntCREate NEW 13 rireteetei ste vindanacadtacesccasben ege dee ere ent eod Lora eege ed 172 Jegen KI EE 173 Lager ue S Te ierann a aeia en kaaa a aap bes ne aa rea iee Er iae Eaa E eE aa E aa 173 INSTrument REName INS Tirument SELEH EE EAYGOUEADDEWINBOW te etre nonet ua t
246. e and data export settings See chapter 6 2 Trace Export Settings on page 131 IQ Export Export Opens a file selection dialog box to select an export file to which the IQ data will be stored This function is only available in single sweep mode and only in applications that process UO data such as the UO Analyzer or optional applications For details see chapter 7 I Q Data Import and Export on page 152 Remote command MMEMory STORe IQ STATe on page 327 MMEMory STORe IQ COMMent on page 327 Import Provides functions to import data IQ Import Import Opens a file selection dialog box to select an import file that contains IQ data This function is only available in single sweep mode and only in applications that process UO data such as the UO Analyzer or optional applications Note that the UO data must have a specific format as described in chapter B I Q Data File Format ig tar on page 333 UO import is not available in MSRA mode For details see chapter 7 I Q Data Import and Export on page 152 Remote command MMEMory LOAD IQ STATe on page 326 How to Export and Import UO Data UO data can only be exported in applications that process UO data such as the I Q Ana lyzer or optional applications EE User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 153 R amp S FSW K7 I Q Data Import and Export mE O cd es How to
247. e c te erreur Holdoff Holdoff Power sensor sesssseessese HySteresis 5t ei need eene Hysteresis Power sensor Level Power sensor ssssessseee Offset value range ax Offset SOftkey inerte tetro deae OUTDUE aciei eot reete tete EES Power sensor Remote control set nne tn S ltlirigs ioi HE Rte nr qe Slope Slope Power sensor sssssee Trigger level External trigger remote sss 240 UO Power remote sesen IF Power remote sess RF Power remote Trigger SOURCE societe rnt rre ert o E reete AF p P AM Offline Sec BB POWER M Digital e EE External i FM Offline 1 eret t rer Free Run UO Power IF Power PM QNE x netten Iii cete ete Power Sensor RE OMNE iioi eee tec ceteris Digi e Settings ges TIME I Troubleshooting 2 casas sets i reet irais Demodulation bandwidth i Input overload sisirin ninn iaai 177 Overload external generator sssssss 46 RF Spectrum e SINAD EE TAD E TTL handshake see TTL synchronization sesssssssss 74 TTL synchronization AUX control external generator susssss 36 External generator usuesesssss 36 44
248. e control 220 Normalize remote control ssssssss 220 Softkeys AF A to Scale e reti icis 118 126 AF Center 110 AF Filter Config ME en W IEE AF Span Manual Zoe LEE Lee EE All Functions Off m AM Offline cde te secet ne ned Amplitude Config esee 85 Auto All a TEE DR 125 Auto Level nete ier 87 91 126 BB Power Capture Offset etienne i Continue Single Sweep Continuous Sweep sssessssssessersesirsssssrrrsesrrrnsserne Demod KEE Demod Config DIGI CONF EE Digital W O EE Display Config m EX POM t Eni ect etg eee D ee tp asst Export COnflg Ert ctn 153 External EM COMING E Free RUF serit nig Ir EO Ebr e Heres Frequency Config VQ Ge IF e E Import Input Source Config IQ Mee EE IQ Import us Line Config sirri aniisi deir ete fers Lower Level Hysteresis 126 Marker Config rne prine edes 132 135 Marker to EE 134 Meas Time zero e eet iR Meastime Auto Meastime Manual 126 II Next Min Next Peak Norm Delta Outputs Config le MI PM Offline 2 Power EE Power Sensor Config sss 80 Preamp bit 2 ris aa n N eai 86 90 Ref Level Onset ose e retrace tin nei 86 91 Refresh EE RF OMIN seriis nan rre r terere oei terrre tn RF Atten Auto Scale Config Search Config Select Marker rrr
249. e depends on the measurement time which is set and can be queried with the SENSe ADEMod MTIMe command If the zoom function is enabled the defined number of sweep points are displayed from the start time specified with this command Parameters Time Range 0 s to measurement time zoom length RST 0s Example ADEM ZOOM STAT ON Switches on the zoom function ADEM ZOOM STAR 500us Sets the starting point of the display to 500 us Manual operation See Time Domain Zoom on page 107 See Start on page 108 SENSe JADEMod lt n gt ZOOM STATe State The command enables or disables the time domain zoom function for the analog demodulated measurement data in the specified window If the zoom function is enabled the defined number of sweep points are displayed from the start time specified with SENSe ADEMod lt n gt ZOOM STARt on page 251 If the zoom function is disabled data reduction is used to adapt the measruement points to the number of points available on the display Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example ADEM ZOOM ON Switches on the zoom function Manual operation See Time Domain Zoom on page 107 See State on page 108 Configuring the Demodulation Spectrum The demodulation spectrum defines which span of the demodulated data is evaluated EE D E EE e DEE 251 RSV AAG sie nee eren Een vxuctadanasytssuaaseeavenacuacdess anaouacves E ta eth 253 AF eva
250. eAvERage COUNT oiriesniaiiieineiriiiiisinnianaidaninnioneiiininana 208 SENSe PMETer p MTIMe AVERage STATe sese nne 208 SENSeJPMETerspe ROFFsel STATS antt tane pereo qu ue ENNEN 209 SENSe PMETersp S E 209 SENSe PMETer p UPDale STATE iinoa tau itd cete th eth doter hh REENEN 209 UNITA PME Ters p gt POWO iore n EE De cree ace alleen BLA DEO se net ER 210 UNIT PMET p POWE EE 210 CALibration PMETer lt p gt ZERO AUTO ONCE This commands starts to zero the power sensor Note that you have to disconnect the signals from the power sensor input before you start to zero the power sensor Otherwise results are invalid Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters ONCE Example CAL PMET2 ZERO AUTO ONCE WAI Starts zeroing the power sensor 2 and delays the execution of further commands until zeroing is concluded Usage Event Manual operation See Zeroing Power Sensor on page 82 CALCulate lt n gt PMETer lt p gt RELative MAGNitude lt RefValue gt This command defines the reference value for relative measurements Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters lt RefValue gt Range 200 dBm to 200 dBm RST 0 User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 204 R amp S FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements REESEN Configuring the Measurement Example CALC PMET2 REL 30 Sets the reference value for relative measurements to
251. eak on page 137 Positioning Delta Markers The following commands position delta markers on the trace CAL Culate nz DEL TamarkercmzMAximumlEET nennen nnns 302 CAL Culate nz DEL TamarkercmzMAximumNENT seen nas 302 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimum PEAK eese nnne 303 CAL Culate nz DEL TamarkercmzMANimumbRlcGHt 303 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarkercmz MiNimum LEET 303 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarker mzMiNimumNENT enhn nnne nnns 303 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m MlINimum PEAK eeeeeeseseseeeee nennen 303 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarker mz MiNimum RICH 304 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum LEFT This command moves a delta marker to the next higher value The search includes only measurement values to the left of the current marker position Usage Event Manual operation See Search Mode for Next Peak on page 137 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum NEXT This command moves a marker to the next higher value User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 302 R amp S FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements NS SSS a a Analyzing Results Usage Event Manual operation See Search Mode for Next Peak on page 137 See Search Next Peak on page 139 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum PEAK This command moves a delta marker to the highest level If the marker is not yet active the command first activates the marker Usage Event Manual oper
252. ear Unit Linear scaling in the unit of the measured signal Linear Per Linear scaling in percentages from 0 to 100 cent Absolute The labeling of the level lines refers to the absolute value of the refer ence level not available for Linear Percent Relative The scaling is in dB relative to the reference level only available for logarithmic units dB The upper always at 0 dB Remote command line of the grid reference level is DISPlay WINDowcn TRACe Y SPACing on page 233 DISPlay WINDowcn TRACe Y SCALe MODI 5 8 5 Units E on page 232 The units define how the demodulated data is displayed They are configured in the Units tab of the Demodulation Settings dialog box gt To display this dialog box do one of the following e Select the Demod Settings button in the Analog Demodulation Overview and select the Units tab e Select the MEAS CONFIG key and then the Scale Config softkey Then select the Units tab User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 119 R amp S FSW K7 5 9 5 9 1 d Configuration Output Settings Demod Spectrum AfFilter Scaling Unit Unit Phase Unit THD Unit dB Din Se 2 AM Spectrum Phase Unit Rad E 120 THO UNR 67 DB EE 120 Phase Unit Rad Deg Sets the phase unit to rad or deg for displaying PM signals Remote command UNIT ANGLe on page 259 THD Unit DB Sets the unit to percent or DB for the calculat
253. easure the total noise power From this value you can determine the noise power of the R amp S FSW Then when you measure the power level of the actual DUT you can deduct the known noise level from the total power to obtain the power level of the DUT The noise source is controlled in the Output settings see Noise Source on page 121 Receiving and Providing Trigger Signals Using one of the variable TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connectors of the R amp S FSW the R amp S FSW can use a signal from an external reference as a trigger to capture data Alter natively the internal trigger signal used by the R amp S FSW can be output for use by other connected devices Using the same trigger on several devices is useful to synchronize the transmitted and received signals within a measurement For details on the connectors see the R amp S FSW Getting Started manual External trigger as input If the trigger signal for the R amp S FSW is provided by an external reference the reference signal source must be connected to the R amp S FSW and the trigger source must be defined as External on the R amp S FSW Trigger output The R amp S FSW can send output to another device either to pass on the internal trigger signal or to indicate that the R amp S FSW itself is ready to trigger The trigger signal can be output by the R amp S FSW automatically or manually by the user If itis sent automatically a high signal is output when the R amp S FSW has t
254. easurement Parameters lt Frequency gt numeric value Range 0 to 3 MHz RST 15kHz Example FILT HPAS FREQ MAN 3MHz The AF results are restricted to frequencies lower than 3 MHz Manual operation See High Pass on page 113 SENSe FILTer n HPASs STATe State This command activates deactivates the selected high pass filter for the specified eval uation For details on the high pass filter refer to High Pass on page 113 Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example FILT HPAS ON Activates the selected high pass filter Manual operation See High Pass on page 113 SENSe FILTer n L PASs FREQuency ABSolute FilterType This command selects the absolute low pass filter type for the specified evaluation For details on the low pass filter refer to Low Pass on page 113 Parameters lt FilterType gt 3kHz 15kHz 150kHz RST 15kHz Example FILT LPAS FREQ 150kHz Selects the low pass filter for the demodulation bandwidth range from 400 kHz to 16 MHz Manual operation See Low Pass on page 113 SENSe FILTer lt n gt LPASs FREQuency MANual Frequency This command selects the cutoff frequency of the low pass filter for the specified evalu ation For details on the low pass filter refer to Low Pass on page 113 Parameters Frequency numeric value Range 0 to 3 MHz RST 15kHz N User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 257 R amp S9FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog
255. ected band This command is only available if the external mixer is active see SENSe MIXer STATe on page 180 Parameters Band Manual operation KA Q U V E W F D G Y J USER Standard waveguide band or user defined band See Band on page 59 Table 11 2 Frequency ranges for pre defined bands Band Frequency start GHz Frequency stop GHz KA A 26 5 40 0 Q 33 0 50 0 U 40 0 60 0 V 50 0 75 0 E 60 0 90 0 Ww 75 0 110 0 F 90 0 140 0 D 110 0 170 0 G 140 0 220 0 J 220 0 325 0 Y 325 0 500 0 USER 32 18 68 22 default default The band formerly referred to as A is now named KA SENSe MIXer HARMonic HIGH STATe State This command specifies whether a second high harmonic is to be used to cover the band s frequency range E N User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 184 R amp S FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements SS Se ee a ee Configuring the Measurement Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example MIX HARM HIGH STAT ON Manual operation See Mixer Settings Harmonics Configuration on page 59 See Range 1 2 on page 60 SENSe MIXer HARMonic HIGH VALue lt HarmOrder gt This command specifies the harmonic order to be used for the high Second range Parameters lt HarmOrder numeric value Range 2 to 61 USER band for other bands see band def inition Example MIX
256. ed If normali zation is activated the offsets in the reference trace are removed from the current mea surement results to compensate for the inherent distortions Reference line The reference line is defined by the Reference Value and Reference Position in the External Generator Source Calibration settings It is similar to the Reference Level defined in the Amplitude settings However as opposed to the reference level this reference ine only affects the y axis scaling in the diagram it has no effect on the expected input power level or the hardware settings The reference line determines the range and the scaling of the y axis just as the refer ence level does The normalized reference trace 0 dB directly after calibration is displayed on this ref erence line indicated by a red line in the diagram By default the reference line is dis played at the top of the diagram If you shift the reference line the normalized trace is shifted as well e D M User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 42 R amp S9FSW K7 Measurement Basics 4 7 4 7 Receiving Data Input and Providing Data Output Shifting the reference line and normalized trace You can shift the reference line and thus the normalized trace in the result display by changing the Reference Position or the Reference Value MultiView SS
257. ed against the current mixer setting before the table can be assigned to the range Before this command can be performed the conversion loss table must be selected see SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 191 This command is only available with option B21 External Mixer installed Parameters Type string Name of mixer with a maximum of 16 characters Example CORR CVL SEL LOSS TAB 4 Selects the conversion loss table CORR CVL MIX FS Z60 Manual operation See Mixer Name on page 66 SENSe CORRection CVL PORTs lt PortNo gt This command defines the mixer type in the conversion loss table This setting is checked against the current mixer setting before the table can be assigned to the range Before this command can be performed the conversion loss table must be selected see SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 191 This command is only available with option B21 External Mixer installed Parameters lt PortType gt 2 3 RST 2 EE User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 190 R amp S FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements Se ee ee ee Configuring the Measurement Example CORR CVL SEL LOSS TAB Ai Selects the conversion loss table CORR CVL PORT 3 Manual operation See Mixer Type on page 67 SENSe CORRection CVL SELect lt FileName gt This command selects the conversion loss table with the specified file name If file name is not available
258. ed for demodulatation For details on the measurement time see chapter 4 3 Sample Rate Measurement Time and Trigger Offset on page 29 Remote command SENSe ADEMod MTIMe on page 234 p M User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 104 R amp S FSW K7 Configuration DREES Demodulation Display Sweep Points Defines the number of measured values to be collected during one sweep All values from 101 to 32001 can be set The default value is 1001 sweep points Remote command SENSe SWEep POINts on page 237 Sweep Average Count Defines the number of sweeps to be performed in the single sweep mode Values from 0 to 200000 are allowed If the values 0 or 1 are set one sweep is performed The sweep count is applied to all the traces in all diagrams If the trace configurations Average Max Hold or Min Hold are set this value also determines the number of averaging or maximum search procedures In continuous sweep mode if sweep count 0 default averaging is performed over 10 sweeps For sweep count 1 no averaging maxhold or minhold operations are per formed Remote command SENSe SWEep COUNt on page 237 SENSe AVERage COUNt on page 267 5 7 Demodulation Display The demodulated signal can be displayed using various evaluation methods All evalu ation methods avail
259. ed to the start and stop frequency of the analyzer Numerator Source Freq RF Offset Denominator Parameters lt Value gt lt numeric value gt RST 1 Example SOUR EXT FREQ NUM 4 SOUR EXT FREQ DEN 3 Sets a multiplication factor of 4 3 i e the transmit frequency of the generator is 4 3 times the analyzer frequency Manual operation See Automatic Source Frequency Numerator Denominator Offset on page 77 SOURce EXTernal FREQuency FACTor NUMerator lt Value gt This command defines the numerator of the factor with which the analyzer frequency is multiplied in order to obtain the transmit frequency of the selected generator Select the multiplication factor such that the frequency range of the generator is not exceeded if the following formula is applied to the start and stop frequency of the analyzer Numerator Source Freq RF 4 Offset Denominator e User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 214 R amp S FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements REESEN Configuring the Measurement Parameters lt Value gt lt numeric value gt RST 1 Example SOUR EXT FREQ NUM 4 SOUR EXT FREQ DEN 3 Sets a multiplication factor of 4 3 i e the transmit frequency of the generator is
260. ee chapter 6 4 1 Marker Search Settings on page 137 2 Marker Peak List No Sti 1 Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH PEAK see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 276 Results CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X on page 294 CALCulate n MARKer m Y on page 294 LEE User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 25 R amp S FSW K7 Measurement Basics Demodulation Process Circuit Description 4 Measurement Basics Some background knowledge on basic terms and principles used in Analog Demodula tion measurements is provided here for a better understanding of the required configu ration settings 4 1 Demodulation Process Circuit Descriptton 26 Demeodilgtuom Ne et DEET 28 Sample Rate Measurement Time and Trigger Offset 29 tele 31 JAP PARQ mE 31 TANG DOM AUN LOO EE 32 Receiving Data Input and Providing Data Output 33 Analog Demodulation in MSRA Operating Mode 48 Demodulation Process Circuit Description The software demodulator runs on the main processor of the analyzer The demodulation process is shown in figure 4 1 All calculations are performed simultaneously with the same UO data set Magnitude amplitude and phase of the complex UO pairs are determined The frequency result is obtained from the differential phase For details on general I Q data processing in the R amp S FSW refer to the reference part of the UO Analysis remote control description in the R amp S FSW User Manual User Manual 11
261. een 2 and 61 the lowest usable frequency being 26 5 GHZ Remote command SENSe MIXer HARMonic LOW on page 185 SENSe MIXer HARMonic HIGH VALue on page 185 Conversion loss Mixer Settings Harmonics Configuration Defines how the conversion loss is handled The following methods are available Average Defines the average conversion loss for the entire range in dB E N User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 60 R amp S FSW K7 Configuration Input and Frontend Settings Table Defines the conversion loss via the table selected from the list Prede fined conversion loss tables are often provided with the external mixer and can be imported to the R amp S FSW Alternatively you can define your own conversion loss tables Imported tables are checked for com patibility with the current settings before being assigned Conversion loss tables are configured and managed in the Managing Conversion Loss Tables tab For details on conversion loss tables see the External Mixer description in the R amp S FSW User Manual For details on importing tables see Import Table on page 64 Remote command Average for range 1 SENSe MIXer LOSS LOW on page 186 Table for range 1 SENSe MIXer LOSS TABLe LOW on page 186 Average for range 2 SENSe MIXer LOSS HIGH on page 186 Table for range 2 SENSe MIXer LOSS TABLe HIGH on page 186 Basic Settings The basic settings concern general
262. efault unit dB Marker Peak Lists Useful commands for peak lists described elsewhere CALCulate lt n gt MARKer PEXCursion on page 300 MMEMory STORe LIST on page 308 Remote commands exclusive to peak lists CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion FPEaks ANNotation LABel S TATe 306 CAL CulateMAb kertUNCHon FPtakeCOUNG 306 CAL Culate nzM AbkermzFUNGCHontbtakslIMMedlatel ner eeorsreee nene 306 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion FPEaks LIST SIZE eese 306 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FPEaks SORT cccccecccsseeceeceeseseceseecececeeeeeeees 307 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FPEaks STAT ccccsccccescececeeceeceseesseceaceeceaeeeenees 307 CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion Fbteakey ens sh enhn sese rsen senta s 307 CAL CulateM Ab kertUNCHon Fbteakey ness ea enhn sesenta aan snas 308 MMEMOm STORE US EE 308 E a User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 305 R amp S FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements Analyzing Results CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FPEaks ANNotation LABel STATe lt State gt This command turns labels for peaks found during a peak search on and off The labels correspond to the marker number in the marker peak list Parameters lt State gt ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example CALC MARK FUNC FPE ANN LAB STAT OFF Removes the peak labels from the diagram Manual operation See Displaying M
263. eference level of 10 dBm and at a external generator output level of the same value the R amp S FSW operates without overrange reserve That means the R amp S FSW is in dan ger of being overloaded if a signal is applied whose amplitude is higher than the reference line In this case either the message RF OVLD for overload or IF OVLD for exceeded display range clipping of the trace at the upper diagram border overrange is displayed in the status line Overloading can be avoided as follows e Reducing the output level of the external generator Source Power on page 76 in External Generator Measurement Configuration e Increasing the reference level Reference Level in the Amplitude menu User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 46 R amp S9FSW K7 Measurement Basics 4 7 5 4 7 6 Receiving Data Input and Providing Data Output Input from Noise Sources The R amp S FSW provides a connector NOISE SOURCE CONTROL with a voltage supply for an external noise source By switching the supply voltage for an external noise source on or off in the firmware you can activate or deactive the device as required External noise sources are useful when you are measuring power levels that fall below the noise floor of the R amp S FSW itself for example when measuring the noise level of an amplifier In this case you can first connect an external noise source whose noise power level is known in advance to the R amp S FSW and m
264. eferenceLevel gt This command defines the reference level With a reference level offset 0 the value range of the reference level is modified by the offset Parameters lt ReferenceLevel gt The unit is variable Range see datasheet RST 0 dBm Example DISP TRAC Y RLEV 60dBm Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Reference Level on page 86 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet Offset This command defines a reference level offset Parameters Offset Range 200 dB to 200 dB RST OdB Example DISP TRAC Y RLEV OFFS 10dB Manual operation See Reference Level on page 86 See Shifting the Display Offset on page 86 Configuring the Attenuation NPUEAT TOnbllaliof x edd gedd 228 INP UAT erin ur e EE 229 INPOC EAT T 229 INPHUHEATEAUT EE 230 INPUEEATTISTAT EE 230 INPut ATTenuation lt Attenuation gt This command defines the total attenuation for RF input If an electronic attenuator is available and active the command defines a mechanical attenuation see INPut EATT STATe on page 230 If you set the attenuation manually it is no longer coupled to the reference level but the reference level is coupled to the attenuation Thus if the current reference level is not compatible with an attenuation that has been set manually the command also adjusts the reference level This function is not available if the Digital Baseban
265. el and only for a channel defined sequence In this case a channel in single sweep mode is swept only once by the Sequencer Furthermore the RUN SINGLE key on the front panel controls the Sequencer not indi vidual sweeps RUN SINGLE starts the Sequencer in single mode If the Sequencer is off only the evaluation for the currently displayed measurement channel is updated For details on the Sequencer see the R amp S FSW User Manual Remote command INITiate IMMediate on page 271 Continue Single Sweep After triggering repeats the number of sweeps set in Sweep Count without deleting the trace of the last measurement While the measurement is running the Continue Single Sweep softkey and the RUN SINGLE key are highlighted The running measurement can be aborted by selecting the highlighted softkey or key again Remote command INITiate CONMeas on page 270 Refresh This function is only available if the Sequencer is deactivated and only for MSRA appli cations The data in the capture buffer is re evaluated by the currently active application only The results for any other applications remain unchanged This is useful for example after evaluation changes have been made or if a new sweep was performed from another application in this case only that application is updated automatically after data acquisition Remote command INITiate REFResh on page 325 Measurement Time AQT Defines how long data is acquir
266. en 213 RF Input INPut NTTeriuation PROT ctioniiRESet cerei cest ease kite deua ESEE Eni 177 leie ele 178 ET ee Te DEE 178 INPurFIL TerHPASS ESTATE 5 ree petat e Edu a uer salad aa E a aa aa Aa aaa 178 INPOGUFIET GR YIGES WE ME c 179 li Se EE 179 IPE SEC E 179 INPut ATTenuation PROTection RESet This command resets the attenuator and reconnects the RF input with the input mixer after an overload condition occured and the protection mechanism intervened The error status bit bit 3 in the STAT QUES POW status register and the INPUT OVLD message in the status bar are cleared For details on the status register see the R amp S FSW User Manual The command works only if the overload condition has been eliminated first Usage Event e User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 177 R amp S FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements AME SS SS ee se ee ee ee ee Configuring the Measurement INPut CONNector lt ConnType gt Determines whether the RF input data is taken from the RF input connector or the optional Analog Baseband connector This command is only available if the Analog Baseband interface R amp S FSW B7 1 is installed and active for input For more information on the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 see the R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input User Manual Parameters lt Couplin
267. en nennen nne nnne nennen reete ennt 224 OUTPUut ADEModQ ONLirne S TATe tiri eroe tete eta tree re t rec e b rete 223 OUTPut T RIGgersport DIRCLOE eor rtp rrt peer NE arena pneri reine bred En nes 246 OUTPutTRiGger lt port gt LEV DEEN 246 OUTPut TRIGgersport O AN d re Feet es uma cud ruentem eda arn Feu onte EYES bx RE ERN Neben ce ERA 247 OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt PULSe IMMediate cccecccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeseeeeeseeeeeseeeeseneeeeeeas 247 OUTPut TRIGger port PULSe LENGIRh essere neret rennes 247 FREAD zm cry Eelere 206 SOURce EXTemal FREQuUency 2 intrent ere er ht HERE ped aa rU PER RE RR E Fe E ER Eidi Sri ea ERE E an Rayo SCOUbRce External FRE Ouencv COUPimgatGTATel nnne ennemis SOURce EXTermal FREQuUency OFFSet 5 rre erit nre rnnt ike rie dba n FEE Ea Ea eae Renan SOURce EXTernal F REQuency FACTor DENominator SOURce EXTernal FREQuency FACTor NUMerator esses rennen e a NEIE de EE UE SOURce EXTernal ROSCillator SOURCE nennen nennen nnne nts e nnne nnne SOURCE EX Temal STATE D SOURce POWer LEVel IMMediate OFFSet essent SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB RDEVice GENerator ADDRess 217 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice GENerator INTerface cece cee eeseeeeeeeeneeseaeeeeaeeseaeessaeeseaeesseeeneaees 217 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice GENerator LINK 217 SYS
268. encies outside of this range e g for fullspan measurements the sweep may be aborted and a message indicating the allowed input frequencies is displayed in the status bar A Trigger Offset Trigger Polarity and Trigger Holdoff to improve the trigger stability can be defined for the RF trigger but no Hysteresis This trigger source is not available for input from the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 or the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 If the trigger source RF Power is selected and digital UO or analog baseband input is activated the trigger Source is automatically switched to Free Run Remote command TRIG SOUR RFP see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 243 Power Sensor Trigger Source Uses an external power sensor as a trigger source This option is only available if a power sensor is connected and configured Note For R amp S power sensors the Gate Mode Lvl is not supported The signal sent by these sensors merely reflects the instant the level is first exceeded rather than a time period However only time periods can be used for gating in level mode Thus the trigger ERREUR RA I User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 97 R amp S FSW K7 Configuration EE Trigger Configuration impulse from the sensors is not long enough for a fully gated measurement the mea surement cannot be completed Remote command TRIG SOUR PSE see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 243 Trigg
269. end Settings Table J File Name USERTABLE Comment User defined conversion loss table for USER band Band Settings Harmonic order Mixer S N 123 4567 Bias 1 0 mA Mixer Type Value Position 55 00000000000 GHz 20 00 dB 75 00000000000 GHz 30 00 dB NEN TE H EH MIKOF he 67 O TAE E A ECT TIT TERCER DTE 67 Insert WANG e Mere e Meme ddiscoss eg vedendo Avez due Mexa aia gu Are e d EM DRM ED Ro UR E 67 BI AU eT wu A 67 IEN 67 Si DE 67 67 File Name Defines the name under which the table is stored in the C r_s instr user cvl directory on the instrument The name of the table is identical with the name of the file without extension in which the table is stored This setting is mandatory The ACL extension is automatically appended during storage Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 191 User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 65 R amp S FSW K7 Configuration REESEN Input and Frontend Settings Comment An optional comment that describes the conversion loss table The comment can be freely defined by the user Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL COMMent on page 189 Band The waveguide or user defined band for which the table is to be applied This setting is checked against the current mixer setting before
270. ene sene 315 CALGulate EIMitske EOWeF MODE eerte oer rh e eere euet treten ipt crees Pre reed abc 315 CAL Culat LIMItsk gt LOW GROFF S8 ient teer trt tr ttm thiet meet gege ena au eh ge 315 CALCulate LIMit lt k gt LOWer SHIFt CAL Culate LIMIitsk gt LOWer SPACING seen niacin terae ce edit reete odit trn eed EE daa aas 316 CAL C ulate EIMitsks EOWer STA Te ter tette dente traen rene trece do ses ee rena ee tetra nha 316 CALGulate EIMitsk EOWer THEeshold i Iriure eet EEN ere etes 316 CALGCulate EIMitsk EOWer DATA odio reb rtu tete tatto tne ten ren ettet erbe cec 314 CAbEGulate LIMitske NAME eise re none dne ten dee Pere EE te De tede used cs 317 CAL Culate LIMItSk gt STAT qe 320 CALOCulate LIMit k TRACe t CHEQCK cect eee cs sees seenceeseenseeseessedseesseeseegsedsnegsedseasesensnsseesseneeanaas 321 CAL C late LIMitsk gt UN p cect tcinccnn a e deed geg dE Eegen 317 CALCulate LIMitsk gt UPPerMARGIN tete eate acta etai irte etre ceret tede andes 318 CALCulate EIMitsk PPerMODE nott rtt meter ttn eet duncetdanesnanhannanteshersanneeneatdonsenes 318 CGAECulate EIMitsSk UPPer OEES6GL 5e Ere eb a ete tee etie etc e etas desiit 318 Ee TI USBI es eus 318 CALGulate EIMitsks PPer SPAGCIIg iret erit neret i ere teda ee tette ba t dra rete dt endi 319 CAL CGulate EIMitske PPer S T ATO tenere adr i dett ec terne eed aed sed an e ettet dns es 319 CA
271. enuation in 1 dB steps down to 0 dB also using the rotary knob Other entries are rounded to the next integer value The range is speci fied in the data sheet If the defined reference level cannot be set for the defined RF attenuation the reference level is adjusted accordingly and the warning Limit reached is displayed __L______ SSS SSS User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 87 R amp S FSW K7 Configuration i nS Input and Frontend Settings NOTICE Risk of hardware damage due to high power levels When decreasing the attenuation manually ensure that the power level does not exceed the maximum level allowed at the RF input as an overload may lead to hardware damage Remote command INPut ATTenuation on page 228 INPut ATTenuation AUTO on page 229 Using Electronic Attenuation Option B25 If option R amp S FSW B25 is installed you can also activate an electronic attenuator In Auto mode the settings are defined automatically in Manual mode you can define the mechanical and electronic attenuation separately This function is not available for input from the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 Note Electronic attenuation is not available for stop frequencies or center frequencies in zero span gt 13 6 GHz In Auto mode RF attenuation is provided by the electronic attenuator as much as pos sible to reduce the amount of mechanical switching required Mechanical attenuation may provide a better signal to
272. epending on the used interface and protocol send the following commands e Visa viClear e GPIB ibcir e RSIB RSDLLibclr Now you can send the ABORt command on the remote channel performing the mea surement Example ABOR INIT IMM Aborts the current measurement and immediately starts a new one Example ABOR WAI INIT IMM Aborts the current measurement and starts a new one once abor tion has been completed Usage SCPI confirmed INITiate CONMeas This command restarts a single measurement that has been stopped using INIT CONT OFF or finished in single sweep mode The measurement is restarted at the beginning not where the previous measurement was stopped As opposed to INITiate IMMediate this command does not reset traces in max hold minhold or average mode Therefore it can be used to continue measurements using maxhold or averaging functions Example for Spectrum application INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode DISP WIND TRAC MODE AVER Switches on trace averaging SWE COUN 20 Setting the sweep counter to 20 sweeps INIT WAI Starts the measurement and waits for the end of the 20 sweeps INIT CONM WAI Continues the measurement next 20 sweeps and waits for the end Result Averaging is performed over 40 sweeps p OC V M User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 270
273. er 1 Trigger signal from the TRIGGER INPUT connector on the front panel External Trigger 2 Trigger signal from the TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connector on the front panel Note Connector must be configured for Input in the Outputs con figuration see Trigger 2 3 on page 99 External Trigger 3 Trigger signal from the TRIGGER 3 INPUT OUTPUT connector on the rear panel Note Connector must be configured for Input in the Outputs con figuration see Trigger 2 3 on page 99 Remote command TRIG SOUR EXT TRIG SOUR EXT2 TRIG SOUR EXT3 See TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 243 UO Power Trigger Source This trigger source is not available if the optional Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 or Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 is used for input Triggers the measurement when the magnitude of the sampled UO data exceeds the trigger threshold User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 95 R amp S FSW K7 Configuration Trigger Configuration The trigger bandwidth corresponds to the resolution bandwidth setting for data acquisition see chapter 5 6 Data Acquisition on page 101 Remote command TRIG SOUR IQP see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 243 IF Power Trigger Source The R amp S FSW starts capturing data as soon as the trigger threshold is exceeded around the third intermediate frequency It is not available for input from the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17
274. er Level Defines the trigger level for the specified trigger source For details on supported trigger levels see the data sheet Remote command TRIGger SEQuence LEVel IFPower on page 240 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel IQPower on page 241 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel EXTernal port on page 240 For analog baseband B7 1 or digital baseband B17 input only TRIGger SEQuence LEVel BBPower on page 240 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel RFPower on page 241 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel AM RELative on page 241 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel AM ABSolute on page 242 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel FM on page 242 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel PM on page 242 Trigger Offset Defines the time offset between the trigger event and the start of the sweep offset gt 0 Start of the sweep is delayed offset 0 Sweep starts earlier pre trigger For the Time trigger source this function is not available Remote command TRIGger SEQuence HOLDoff TIME on page 239 Hysteresis Defines the distance in dB to the trigger level that the trigger source must exceed before a trigger event occurs Settting a hysteresis avoids unwanted trigger events caused by noise oscillation around the trigger level This setting is only available for IF Power trigger sources The range of the value is between 3 dB and 50 dB with a step width of 1 dB Remote command TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HYSTeresis on page
275. erator 40 Reflection open measurement external generator 79 Reflection short measurement external generator 78 Restoring settings external generator 41 79 Storing results external generator 40 Transmission measurement external generator 78 Capture offset MSRA applications see 102 a f MM 326 Ge eee t ded ES 102 Capturing UO data remote esseeeeeeeee 269 Carrier oj 24 28 POWGP ives i 24 CCIR filter E 114 CCITT filter AF sci ierit tee aed 114 Center frequency Analog Baseband GB 71 Automatic configuration sss 125 Displayed Hl Step size Channel bar Information external generator seee ceee 45 Circuit description eet etri e tr rette eines 26 Comment Limit lines siiin nre 149 Compatibility Limit lines rrr mre 146 Conditions Meas r mieht coron tnr metior ri inre 26 Configuration Measurement remote sss 175 Procedure deren e ERR 53 Connectors AUX control external generator ussss 36 External generator control seeuussssss 36 cll M 36 Continue single sweep SOMKGY cashes 104 Continuous sweep SOflKGy ge avec fretta m EUREN HER 103 Convent
276. erial number in a string Usage Query only SENSe PROBe lt p gt SETup MODE lt Mode gt Select the action that is started with the micro button on the probe head See also Microbutton Action on page 72 Suffix p 11213 Selects the connector 1 Baseband Input 2 Baseband Input Q 3 RF currently not supported use 1 with RF Input Connector setting Baseband Input LEE User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 200 R amp S9FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements Parameters Mode Manual operation Configuring the Measurement RSINgle Run single starts one data acquisition NOACtion Nothing is started on pressing the micro button RST RSINgle See Microbutton Action on page 72 SENSe PROBe lt p gt SETup NAME Queries the name of the probe Suffix lt p gt Return values lt Name gt Usage 11213 Selects the connector 1 Baseband Input 2 Baseband Input Q 3 RF currently not supported use 1 with RF Input Connector setting Baseband Input I Name string Query only SENSe PROBe lt p gt SETup STATe Queries if the probe at the specified connector is active detected or not active not detected To switch the probe on i e activate input from the connector use INP SEL ATQ see INPut SELect on page 179 Suffix lt p gt Return values lt State gt Usage 11213 Selects the connector 1 Baseband Input 2
277. ert eer eere nia eren initio anaes beens 276 LAvoutCATalogotWINDowlg eene nnns ehnnnrennnnnr snnt ens s sehen sss nent sse nent s sene nn sse n nnns nnn 277 LAYOutIDENtify EWINDOW KE 277 LAYout REMove WINDOW E initiaited neh aise LAY out REPLace WINDow LAY outSPLitleh oerte dpa ca pa ree rene nathan Anda EEN LAvoutVWlNDow cnzs ADD SEEEE EAEE EENEAE EEEE EESEEAEEEANEEEEEEE EEEE ESEE Enen 280 LAY out WINDOWS N gt DENI eege are annar rri Eee ERO n Ea PE EEE Ea UNSERE CE CEP EE GE EPOR EH ER ERES ER 280 EAYout WINDowsn REMoOwYe icerum rerit entr deed EENS dh 280 LAYo ut WINDowsn2 REPLace edic Died pede ed ea EA e ute a Dur alte a dE EENEG 281 MMEMory LOAD IQ STATe MMEMory STORGIO COMME iti sicccccsscccisccsscecsescsessscescessesceveticesetvessstvensctionsepseesehiorsetsasactzsnterseceebaceaedtertetzes 327 MMEMoOrIy STORS IQ STATe ctn opas ruedas be ENEE eR edes PANE Nba SREL cgucchessavehausdaeas 327 MMEMOGOrHy STORS LIST 5 toot et e d E Eg Y Ve ode te v y D E rg ee p Ed eroe neos 308 MMEMorv SGTObe cnzTR ACe Ent EEE EENE AEEAENEAEEEEEEAN EASES EAEAN EEE EE EEEa EEEE nenea 284 I User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 342 R amp S FSW K7 List of Remote Commands AnalogDemod OUTPut ADEModq ONLine AF CFRequency seen 224 OUTPut ADEMod ONEine PEONGS irri tret tt rt edet eee edd e Eta Lube Hd 224 OUTPut ADEMod ONLine SOURCe esses eese nenn
278. es 10 Hz 600 kHz R amp S FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements 11 4 3 Configuring the Measurement TRAC DATA X TRACE1 Retrieve the measured power levels 0 between 10 Hz and 100 kHz below generator minimum frequency nominal 5dBm as of 100 kHz TRAC DATA TRACE1 Retrieve the normalized power levels power offsets from calibration results Should be 0 for all sweep points directly after calibration SENS CORR STAT ON TRAC DATA TRACE1 ia a a it Changing the display of the calibration results Shift the reference line so the 5 dB level is displayed in the center DISP TRAC Y SCAL RVAL 5DB DISP TRAC Y SCAL RPOS 50PCT Configuring the Output QD Configuring trigger input output is described in chapter 11 4 7 2 Configuring the Trigger Output on page 245 DIAGNOSTIC oERVICe NSO le 223 OUTPut ADEMod ONLine STATe center tentent tentent 223 OUTPutrADE Mod ON net GOUlbce sessi eene rente nenne snnt nnne 224 OLH Put ADEMed pONLine FAF CPERegquericy 222222 5 3 22 1112 e AANEREN 224 OUTPut ADEMed ONLineEPHONSGS i eeh etie cuero re ere indeed Rave dede 224 DIAGnostic SERVice NSOurce State This command turns the 28 V supply of the BNC connector labeled NOISE SOURCE CONTROL on the front panel on and off Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example DIAG SERV NSO ON Manual operation See Noise Source on pag
279. es trt ean eee patet etta can tbe aqu onde tp eaa dee sn aen Dna gn 74 GPIB Address TCPAP AdGheSS c ede nee e ic ee enter d Cerea eta eee tutos 74 E e E M 74 Edit Generator Setup EE 75 Frequency Min Frequenpy MAX decere ertt rete eei onere ani 75 Level Min Level Max ntt rene Dt rdc retra re tee dede 75 User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 73 R amp S FSW K7 Configuration Input and Frontend Settings Generator Type Selects the generator type and thus defines the generator setup file to use See also chapter 4 7 4 2 Overview of Generators Supported by the R amp S FSW B10 Option on page 38 For an overview of supported generators see chapter 4 7 4 2 Overview of Generators Supported by the R amp S FSW B10 Option on page 38 For information on generator setup files see chapter 4 7 4 3 Generator Setup Files on page 39 Remote command SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice GENerator TYPE on page 218 Interface Type of interface connection used The following interfaces are currently supported e GPIB e TCP IP not by all generators For details on which signal generators support which interfaces see the documentation of the corresponding signal generator Remote command SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice GENerator INTerface on page 217 TTL Handshake If available for the specified generator type this option activates TTL synchronization via handshake for GPIB connections
280. esult summary Programming Example In this example we will configure and perform an analog demodulation measurement to demonstrate the remote control commands SSS SSS N User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 328 R amp S FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements H Programming Example Signal generator settings e g R amp S SMU Frequency 500 MHz Level 10 dBm Modulation FM Modulation frequency 10 kHz Frequency deviation 50 kHz RST Reset the instrument FREQ CENT 500 MHz Set the center frequency to 500 MHz DISP TRAC Y SCAL RLEV 0 Set the reference level to 0 dBm INST CRE NEW ADEM FMDemodulation Activate an Analog Demodulation measurement channel named FMDemodulation ADEM MTIM ims Set the measurement time to 1 ms 10 periods SENS ADJ SCAL Y AUTO ON Optimize the scaling of the y axis for the current measurement continuously BAND DEM 400 kHz Set the demodulation bandwidth to 400 kHz TRIG SOUR FM Use offline FM trigger TRIG LEV FM 500MHz Trigger when signal reaches 500 MHz LAY ADD WIND 1 BEL XTIM FM AFSP Add an FM Spectrum result display below FM Time Domain ADEM FM AFSP WRIT AVER OFF OFF OFF OFF Defines two traces in the FM Spectrum 1 Clear write 2 average ADEM SET 8MHz 32000 FM POS 500 30 Set analog demodulator to execute 30 sweeps with 32000 samples each at a sample rate of 8 MHz use FM trigger tr
281. f the analyzer for power sensor measurements Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters lt State gt ON 1 Includes the reference level offset in the results OFF 0 Ignores the reference level offset RST 1 Example PMET2 ROFF OFF Takes no offset into account for the measured power Manual operation See Use Ref Lev Offset on page 83 SENSe PMETer lt p gt STATe State This command turns a power sensor on and off Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example PMET1 ON Switches the power sensor measurements on Manual operation See State on page 81 See Select on page 82 SENSe PMETer lt p gt UPDate STATe lt State gt This command turns continuous update of power sensor measurements on and off If on the results are update even if a single sweep is complete Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF E T User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 209 R amp S FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements NN SS ee ee ee a ee Configuring the Measurement Example PMET1 UPD ON The data from power sensor 1 is updated continuously Manual operation See Continuous Value Update on page 82 UNIT lt n gt PMETer lt p gt POWer lt Unit gt This command selects the unit for absolute power sensor measurements Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Par
282. ference level is adjusted to the full scale level automatically if any change occurs Remote command INPut DIQ RANGe COUPling on page 198 Connected Instrument Displays the status of the Digital Baseband Interface connection If an instrument is connected the following information is displayed e Name and serial number of the instrument connected to the Digital Baseband Inter face e Used port e Sample rate of the data currently being transferred via the Digital Baseband Interface Level and unit that corresponds to an UO sample with the magnitude 1 Full Scale Level if provided by connected instrument Remote command INPut DIQ CDEVice on page 197 DiglConf Starts the optional R amp S DiglConf application This softkey is available in the In Output menu but only if the optional software is installed Note that R amp S DiglConf requires a USB connection not LAN from the R amp S FSW to the R amp S EX IQ BOX in addition to the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 connection R amp S DiglConf version 2 20 360 86 Build 170 or higher is required To return to the R amp S FSW application press any key on the front panel The R amp S FSW application is displayed with the Input Output menu regardless of which key was pressed For details on the R amp S DiglConf application see the R amp SGEX IQ BOX Digital Interface Module R amp SGDiglConf Software Operating Manual Note If you close the R amp S DiglConf wind
283. ference point FXD can also be selected instead of another marker Remote command CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MREF on page 296 Linking to Another Marker Links the current marker to the marker selected from the list of active markers If the x axis value of the inital marker is changed the linked marker follows on the same x posi tion Linking is off by default Using this function you can set two markers on different traces to measure the difference e g between a max hold trace and a min hold trace or between a measurement and a reference trace Remote command CALCulate n MARKer ml LINK TO MARKer m2 on page 293 CALCulate n DELTamarker m1 LINK TO MARKer m2 on page 295 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt LINK on page 295 Assigning the Marker to a Trace The Trace setting assigns the selected marker to an active trace The trace determines which value the marker shows at the marker position If the marker was previously assigned to a different trace the marker remains on the previous frequency or time but indicates the value of the new trace N User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 134 R amp S FSW K7 Analysis Marker Settings The marker can also be assigned to the currently active trace using the Marker to Trace softkey in the Marker menu If a trace is turned off the assigned markers and marker functions are also deactivated Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer l
284. ffset e attenuation e Signal source and digital UO input settings e input coupling e YIG filter state After initial setup the parameters for the measurement channel are stored upon exiting and restored upon re entering the channel Thus you can switch between applications quickly and easily Apart from these settings the following default settings are activated directly after the Analog Demodulation application is activated or after a Preset Channel Table 5 1 Default settings for Analog Demodulation channels Parameter Value Sweep mode CONTINUOUS Trigger settings FREE RUN Trigger offset 0 Demodulation BW 5 MHz Measurement time 62 5 us Demodulation filter Flat AF filters none Sample rate 8 MHz Sweep points 1001 Squelch state off Squelch level 20 0 dBm Usable UO Bandwidth 12 228 MHz Traces 1 Clr Wrte Auto Peak detector 2 6 blank Limit check off Evaluations Window 1 FM Time Domain Window 2 Result Summary 5 2 Configuration According to Digital Standards Various predefined settings files for common digital standards are provided for use with the Analog Demodulation application In addition you can create your own settings files for user specific measurements For details on which settings are defined and an overview of predefined standards see chapter A Reference Predefined Standards and Settings on page 331 User Manual 1173 9240 02
285. g n i l In addition the following general information for the input signal is provided Carrier Power the power of the carrier without modulation Carrier Offset the deviation of the calculated carrier frequency to the ideal carrier frequency e Modulation Depth AM or RF Time Domain only the difference in amplitude the car rier signal is modulated with Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH RSUM see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 276 Marker Table Displays a table with the current marker values for the active markers This table may be displayed automatically if configured accordingly see Marker Table Display on page 135 Stimulus Response Function Function Result Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH MTAB see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 276 Results CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X on page 294 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt Y on page 294 SST User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 24 R amp S FSW K7 Measurements and Result Displays EE Evaluation Methods for Analog Demodulation Marker Peak List The marker peak list determines the frequencies and levels of peaks in the spectrum or time domain How many peaks are displayed can be defined as well as the sort order In addition the detected peaks can be indicated in the diagram The peak list can also be exported to a file for analysis in an external application You can define search and sort criteria to influence the results of the analysis s
286. g Demod DBW 5MHz Freq 1 0 GHz Start 0 0 s 100 pts 4 Result Summary Carrier Power 82 23 dBm Peak Peak tPeak 2 RMS FM 85 041 kHz 84 715 kHz 84 878 kHz 50 313 kHz Fig 4 3 FM time domain measurement with time domain zoom Carrier Offset 133 Mod Freq 1APClrw Ref 0 00 Hz DC i Mail TIT Carrier Offset 133 47 kHz Mod Freq SINAD Time per Division x 1AP Clrw Ref 0 00 Hz DC 17 kHz SINAD User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 32 R amp S9FSW K7 Measurement Basics 4 7 4 7 1 Receiving Data Input and Providing Data Output The time domain zoom area affects not only the diagram display but the entire evaluation for the current window In contrast to the time domain zoom the graphical zoom is available for all diagram eval uations However the graphical zoom is useful only if more measured values than trace points are available The time span represented by each measurement point remains the same d d 4 45 4 45 5 Time domain zoom Graphical zoom Receiving Data Input and Providing Data Output The R amp S FSW can analyze signals from different input sources and provide various types of output such as noise or trigger signals RF Input Protection The RF input connector of the R amp S FSW must be protected against signal levels that exceed the ranges specified in the data sheet Therefore the R amp S FSW is equipped with an overload protection
287. gType gt RF RF input connector AIQI Analog Baseband connector RST RF Example INP CONN AIQI Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Input Connector on page 57 INPut COUPling lt CouplingType gt This command selects the coupling type of the RF input Parameters lt CouplingType gt AC AC coupling DC DC coupling RST AC Example INP COUP DC Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Input Coupling on page 56 See Input Settings on page 88 INPut FILTer HPASs STATe lt State gt Activates an additional internal high pass filter for RF input signals from 1 GHz to 3 GHz This filter is used to remove the harmonics of the R amp S FSW in order to measure the harmonics for a DUT for example This function requires option R amp S FSW B13 Note for RF input signals outside the specified range the high pass filter has no effect For signals with a frequency of approximately 4 GHz upwards the harmonics are sup pressed sufficiently by the YIG filter N User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 178 R amp S FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements REESEN Configuring the Measurement Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See High Pass Filter 1 3 GHz on page 56 INPut FILTer YIG STATe State This command turns the YIG preselector on and off Note the special conditions and restrictions for the YIG filter described in YIG Prese
288. gger port to which the output is sent 2 trigger port 2 front 3 trigger port 3 rear p V Y User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 247 R amp S FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements 11 4 8 11 4 8 1 Configuring the Measurement Parameters lt Length gt Pulse length in seconds Manual operation See Trigger 2 3 on page 99 See Output Type on page 100 See Pulse Length on page 100 Configuring Demodulation The following remote commands are required to configure the demodulation parameters in a remote environment The tasks for manual operation are described in chapter 5 8 Demodulation on page 105 e Basic Demodulation Settings 2 ricette t dee redet copo dees 248 Time Domain ZOOM opis eat et ater dee eee decer esed s panca 250 e Configuring the Demodulation Gpechum 251 e Postprocessing AF E 254 e Defining the Scaling and Uifs aec aderire cinere 258 e Scaling for e e 258 e Scaling for RF Evaluation sees een nnne nnne nnns 259 EE E 259 Basic Demodulation Settings The basic demodulation measurement parameters define how the measurement is per formed Useful commands described elsewhere e chapter 11 4 8 2 Time Domain Zoom Settings on page 250 Basic demodulation commands SENSe IAD
289. gs You can configure the Analog Demodulation application using predefined standard set tings This allows for quick and easy configuration for commonly performed measure ments For details see chapter 5 2 Configuration According to Digital Standards on page 51 Provided standard files The instrument comes prepared with the following standard settings e AM Broadcast e FM Narrowband e FM Broadcast e Frequency Settling e None default settings The default storage location for the settings files is C FSW user predefined AdemodPredefined Predefined settings The following parameters can be stored in a standard settings file Any parameters that are not included in the xml file are set to their default values when the standard is loaded Measurement settings e DBW e AQT e Demod Filter e Sweep Points e Squelch State Level e Units Phase THD e RF Span Window display settings e Position e State e Window number e Window type all evaluation methods supported by the Analog Demodulation appli cation see chapter 3 1 Evaluation Methods for Analog Demodulation on page 15 e Scaling Ref Position Dev per Division e Time Domain Zoom State Start Length User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 331 R amp S9FSW K7 AF specific settings e AF Center e AF Span Reference Predefined Standards and Settings SS ES
290. gt Variable number of level values Note that the number of vertical values has to be the same as the number of horizontal values set with CALCulate LIMit lt k gt CONTrol DATA If not the R amp S FSW either adds missing val ues or ignores surplus values The unit depends on CALCulate LIMit lt k gt UNIT on page 317 RST Limit line state is OFF Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Data points on page 150 M User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 317 R amp S FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements SS a M a Analyzing Results CALCulate LIMit lt k gt UPPer MARGin lt Margin gt This command defines an area around an upper limit line where limit check violations are still tolerated Parameters lt Margin gt numeric value RST 0 Default unit dB Manual operation See Margin on page 149 CALCulate LIMit lt k gt UPPer MODE lt Mode gt This command selects the vertical limit line scaling Parameters lt Mode gt ABSolute Limit line is defined by absolute physical values The unit is variable RELative Limit line is defined by relative values related to the reference level dB RST ABSolute Manual operation See X Axis on page 149 CALCulate LIMit lt k gt UPPer OFFSet lt Offset gt This command defines an offset for a complete upper limit line Compared to shifting the limit line an offset does not actually change the limit line defi nition points Parameters lt
291. h Length The command allows you to define the length of the time domain zoom area for the analog demodulated measurement data in the specified window manually If the length is defined manually using this command the zoom mode is also set to manual Parameters Length RST sweep time Length of the zoom area in seconds Example ADEM ZOOM LENG 2s Zoom mode is set to manual and the zoom length to 2 seconds Manual operation See Time Domain Zoom on page 107 See Length on page 108 SENSe ADEMod lt n gt ZOOM LENGth MODE Mode The command defines whether the length of the zoom area for the analog demodulated measurement data is defined automatically or manually in the specified window Parameters lt Mode gt AUTO MAN AUTO Default The number of sweep points is used as the zoom length MAN The zoom length is defined manually using SENSe ADEMod lt n gt ZOOM LENGth RST AUTO Example ADEM ZOOM LENG MODE MAN Zoom function uses the length defined manually Manual operation See Time Domain Zoom on page 107 See Length on page 108 E MN User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 250 R amp S9FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements 11 4 8 3 Configuring the Measurement SENSe ADEMod lt n gt ZOOM STARt Time The command selects the start time for the zoomed display of analog demodulated measurements in the specified window The maximum possible valu
292. h EE lte EE 137 e POSIMOMING FUlCllofis ccm eee i RR eter denne neo cdcdnncetea cd usan nnt ia Ex aAA 138 6 4 4 Marker Search Settings Markers are commonly used to determine peak values i e maximum or minimum values in the measured signal Configuration settings allow you to influence the peak search results These settings are are available as softkeys in the Marker To menu or in the Search Settings tab of the Marker dialog box To display this tab do one of the following e Press the MKR key then select the Marker Config softkey Then select the hori zontal Search Settings tab e Inthe Overview select Analysis and switch to the vertical Marker Config tab Then select the horizontal Search Settings tab Search Mode for Next Peak ceeeeeiuecceetesae centena uera nami ana c rra R dala ENEE 137 Peak EXeOUISION iecit e eet eet toe e e eee te ete ede ee beet een a 138 Search Mode for Next Peak Selects the search mode for the next peak search Left Determines the next maximum minimum to the left of the current peak Absolute Determines the next maximum minimum to either side of the current peak e P M User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 137 R amp S FSW K7 Analysis El Marker Search Settings and Positioning Functions Right Determines the next maximum minimum to the
293. he trace is overwritten by each sweep This is the default setting AVERage The average is formed over several sweeps The Sweep Average Count determines the number of averaging procedures MAXHold The maximum value is determined over several sweeps and dis played The R amp S FSW saves the sweep result in the trace memory only if the new value is greater than the previous one MINHold The minimum value is determined from several measurements and displayed The R amp S FSW saves the sweep result in the trace memory only if the new value is lower than the previous one VIEW The current contents of the trace memory are frozen and dis played BLANk Hides the selected trace RST Trace 1 WRITe Trace 2 6 BLANk Example INIT CONT OFF Switching to single sweep mode SWE COUN 16 Sets the number of measurements to 16 DISP TRAC3 MODE WRIT Selects clear write mode for trace 3 INIT WAI Starts the measurement and waits for the end of the measure ment Manual operation See Trace Mode on page 128 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE HCONtinuous State This command turns an automatic reset of a trace on and off after a parameter has changed The reset works for trace modes min hold max hold and average Note that the command has no effect if critical parameters like the span have been changed to avoid invalid measurement results DU User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 264 R amp S FSW K7 Remote Command
294. hed INIT WAI Return the trace data for the input signal without distortions default screen configuration TRAC DATA TRACE3 Configuring a conversion loss table for a user defined band o PERSEEIEEEERES Preparing the instrument Reset the instrument RST Activate the use of the connected external mixer SENS MIX ON 11 4 2 3 Configuring the Measurement Ji Configuring a new conversion loss table Define cvl table for range 1 of band as described in previous example extended V band SENS CORR CVL SEL UserTable SENS CO SENS CO SENS CO RR CVL COMM User defined conversion loss table for USER band R R SENS COR R R R CVL BAND USER CVL HARM 6 CVL BIAS 1mA CVL MIX FS Z260 CVL SNUM 123 4567 R CVL PORT 3 SENS CO SENS CO SENS CO Conversion loss is linear from 55 GHz to 75 GHz SENS CORR CVL DATA 55GHZ 20DB 75GHZ 30DB DH Ai A A A A ppm snn Configuring the mixer and band settings Use user defined band and assign new cvl table SENS MIX HARM BAND USER Define band by two ranges range 1 covers 47 48 GHz to 80 GHz harmonic 6 cvl table UserTable range 2 covers 80 GHz to 138 02 GHz harmonic 8 average conv loss of 30 dB SENS MIX HARM TYPE EVEN SENS MIX HARM HIGH STAT ON SENS MIX FREQ HAND 80GHz SENS MIX HARM LOW 6 SENS MIX LOSS TABL LOW UserTable SENS MIX HARM HIGH 8 SENS MIX LOSS HIGH 30dB Quer
295. hmic Example DISP TRAC Y SPAC LIN Selects linear scaling in 96 Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Deviation on page 117 See Scaling on page 119 Configuring Data Acquisition The following remote commands are required to configure which data is to be acquired and then demodulated in a remote environment MSRA operating mode In MSRA operating mode only the MSRA Master channel actually captures data from the input signal The data acquisition commands for the Analog Demodulation application in MSRA mode define the analysis interval For details on the MSRA operating mode see the R amp S FSW MSRA User Manual ISENSe JADEMDod V FIM earn aaan aaa aiana EAEE ENRE EA E Rye E 234 ISENSeIADEMod RL ENG 234 BENSE JADEMOd SE reote nete toss eene rece eter ire Ree sieur eee 234 ISENGeJADE Mod GE Cirom BANDwidOblDWIDODTRE Golutton rererere 235 SENSe ADEMOS SRATOT ciccai vases men tado ESA ENEE NEES NP UNES 235 SENSe IBANDNWidth BWIDth DEMOd 2 eerta tenore tee ion rennen dd Nee ct 236 ISENSe BANDwidtllBWIBth DEMoed TYPE uec o tnra enn panna ern nn o e EXEC Rec 236 EEUU RU SS SSS User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 233 R amp S FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements SS SS ee ee ae ee Configuring the Measurement SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution cnc 236 SEN Bo TEE DONE teorie eR Ra Mir femp Mess cma a atai 237 GENSeTSwWEep POINis 237 SENSe JADEM
296. iates a measurement to determine and set the ideal settings for the current task automatically only once for the current measurement This includes e Center frequency e Reference level e Scaling Example ADJ ALL Usage Event Manual operation See Adjusting all Determinable Settings Automatically Auto All on page 125 User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 260 R amp S FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements REESEN Configuring the Measurement SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation Duration In order to determine the ideal reference level the R amp S FSW performs a measurement on the current input data This command defines the length of the measurement if SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation MODE is set to MANual Parameters Duration Numeric value in seconds Range 0 001 to 16000 0 RST 0 001 Default unit s Example ADJ CONF DUR MODE MAN Selects manual definition of the measurement length ADJ CONF LEV DUR 5ms Length of the measurement is 5 ms Manual operation See Changing the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Manual on page 126 SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation MODE Mode In order to determine the ideal reference level the R amp S FSW performs a measurement on the current input data This command selects the way the R amp S FSW determines the length of the measurement Parameters Mode AUTO The R amp S FSW determines the measurement length automatically acco
297. idth see Determining the demodulation bandwidth on page 164 A practical example is described in chapter 9 Measurement Example Demodulating an FM Signal on page 158 User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 28 R amp S9FSW K7 Measurement Basics Sample Rate Measurement Time and Trigger Offset 4 3 Sample Rate Measurement Time and Trigger Offset The maximum demodulation bandwidths that can be obtained during the measurement depending on the sample rate are listed in the tables below for different demodulation filter types The allowed value range of the measurement time and trigger offset depends on the selected demodulation bandwidth and demodulation filter If the AF filter or the AF trigger are not active the measurement time increases by 20 96 Table 4 1 Sample Rate Measurement Time and Trigger Offset using a flat demodulation filter Demod band Sample rate Measurement time Trigger offset width Min Max Min Max 320 MHz 400 MHz 2 5 ns 4 ms 4 ms 0 5243 s 160 MHz 200 MHz 5ns 8ms 8 ms 1 0486 s 80 MHz 128 MHz 7 8125 ns 12 5 ms 12 5 ms 1 6384 s 40 MHz 64 MHz 15 625 ns 25 ms 25 ms 3 2768 s 28 MHz 64 MHz 15 625 ns 25 ms 25 ms 3 2768 s 18 MHz 32 MHz 31 25 ns 50 ms 50 ms 6 5536 s 10 MHz 32 MHz 31 25 ns 50 ms 50 ms 6 5536 s 8 MHz 16 MHz 62 5 ns 100 ms 100 ms 13 1072 s 5MHz 8 MHz 125 ns 200 ms 200 ms 26 2144 s 3 MHz 4 MHz 250 ns 400 ms 400 ms 52 428
298. igger on positive slope with a pretrigger offset of 500 samples User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 329 Programming Example INIT CONT OFF Stop continuous sweep INIT WAI Start a new measurement with 30 sweeps and wait for the end CALC MARK FUNC ADEM CARR Queries the carrier power Result 10 37 dBm CALC2 MARK FUNC ADEM SIN RES Queries the signal to noise and distortion ratio from the FM Spectrum Result 65 026 dB CALC2 MARK FUNC ADEM THD RES Queries the total harmonic distortion of the demodulated signal rom the FM Spectrum Result 66 413 dB CALC MARK FUNC ADEM FERR Queries the FM carrier offset frequency error for the most recent measurement trace 1 Result 649 07 Hz ADEM FM OFFS AVER Queries FM carrier offset averaged over 30 measurements Result 600 Hz TRAC DATA TRACE1 Retrieve the trace data of the most recent measurement trace 1 Result 1 201362252 1 173495054 1 187217355 1 186594367 1 171583891 1 188250422 1 204138160 1 181404829 1 186317205 1 197872400 TRAC DATA TRACE2 Retrieve the averaged trace data for all 30 measurements trace 2 Result 1 201362252 1 173495054 1 187217355 1 186594367 1 171583891 1 188250422 1 204138160 1 181404829 1 186317205 1 197872400 R amp S FSW K7 Reference Predefined Standards and Settings A Reference Predefined Standards and Set tin
299. iguring the Output 223 Frequency Settings iiie tiit eder ni eua eed reu X a d ER YR Ra RR eU YR XAR Yd Rua 225 Configuring the Vertical Axis Amplitude Scaling sseeee 227 Configuring Data Acouteitton eene nnns 233 MIrereisi ee ERN 237 Configuring Demodulatton sess eene nenne 248 Adjusting Settings Automaticallv emm 260 Configuring Standard Traces eene nennen enne 263 Capturing Data and Performing Sweeps eene 269 Configuring the Result Display eene nnne nnn nnn 274 General Window Commande 274 Working with Windows in the Display 275 Retrieving Results 12 eter retenir cdeeebuies cdvevseeccerevseulectveescnecstevstuleeds 281 Retrieving Trace Results 281 Exporting Trace Resauhte enne nennen nenne nnns 284 Retrieving Result Summary Values enne eee 286 Formats for Returned Values ASCII Format and Binary Format 289 Reference ASCII File Export Fommat nennen 290 Analyzing Results 22 cete reete ce etre con crore Fein eei gena dea Ie ea Fara nennen 292 Working with Markers HRemoteh A 292 Defining Limit Check 312 Zooming into the Display 322 Configuring an Analysis Interval and Line MSRA mode only 324 Importing and Exporting UO Data and Results eene 326 Commands for Compatibility eee enne nnn nnns 327 Programming Example
300. ilterType This command defines the type of demodulation filter to be used This command is identical to SENS ADEM BAND DEM TYPE Parameters lt FilterType gt FLAT Standard flat demodulation filter GAUSs Gaussian filter for optimized settling behaviour RST FLAT Manual operation See Demodulation Filter on page 102 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution Bandwidth This command defines the resolution bandwidth and decouples the resolution bandwidth from the span For statistics measurements this command defines the demodulation bandwidth For measurements on UO data in the frequency domain the maximum RBW is 1 MHz Parameters Bandwidth refer to data sheet RST RBW AUTO is set to ON DBW 3MHz Example BAND 1 MHz Sets the resolution bandwidth to 1 MHz Usage SCPI confirmed TE N User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 236 R amp S9FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements 11 4 7 Configuring the Measurement Manual operation See Resolution Bandwidth on page 102 SENSe SWEep COUNt lt SweepCount gt This command defines the number of sweeps that the application uses to average traces In case of continuous sweeps the application calculates the moving average over the average count In case of single sweep measurements the application stops the measurement and cal culates the average after the average count has been reached Parameters lt SweepC
301. inates for remote control of the splitters Parameters Index1 The index of one window the splitter controls Index2 The index of a window on the other side of the splitter Position New vertical or horizontal position of the splitter as a fraction of the screen area without channel and status bar and softkey menu The point of origin x 0 y 0 is in the lower left corner of the screen The end point x 100 y 100 is in the upper right corner of the screen See figure 11 1 The direction in which the splitter is moved depends on the screen layout If the windows are positioned horizontally the splitter also moves horizontally If the windows are positioned vertically the splitter also moves vertically Range 0 to 100 Example LAY SPL 1 3 50 Moves the splitter between window 1 Frequency Sweep and 3 Marker Table to the center 50 of the screen i e in the figure above to the left Example LAY SPL 1 4 70 Moves the splitter between window 1 Frequency Sweep and 3 Marker Peak List towards the top 70 of the screen The following commands have the exact same effect as any com bination of windows above and below the splitter moves the splitter vertically AY SPL 3 2 70 AY SPL 4 1 70 AY SPL 2 1 70 User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 279 R amp S FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements b a O a a lM Configuring the Result Display LAYout WIND
302. ination with the IF Power trigger the R amp S FSW ignores the holding time for frequency sweep FFT sweep zero span and UO data measurements Parameters Period RST 0s Example TRIG SOUR IFP Sets the IF power trigger source TRIG IFP HOLD 200 ns Sets the holding time to 200 ns Manual operation See Trigger Holdoff on page 99 TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HYSTeresis lt Hysteresis gt This command defines the trigger hysteresis which is only available for IF Power trigger Sources Parameters lt Hysteresis gt Range 3 dB to 50 dB RST 3 dB ERREUR RA N User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 239 R amp S FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements TN Se ee ee ee ea Configuring the Measurement Example TRIG SOUR IFP Sets the IF power trigger source TRIG IFP HYST 10DB Sets the hysteresis limit value Manual operation See Hysteresis on page 98 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel BBPower lt Level gt This command sets the level of the baseband power trigger This command is available for the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 and the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 Parameters lt Level gt Range 50 dBm to 20 dBm RST 20 DBM Example TRIG LEV BB 30DBM Manual operation See Trigger Level on page 98 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel EXTernal lt port gt lt TriggerLevel gt This command defines the level the external signal must exceed to cause a trigger event N
303. ined span of the R amp S FSW unless limited by the range of the signal generator Manual The generator uses a single fixed frequency defined by Manual Source Frequency which is displayed when you select Manual cou pling Remote command SOURce EXTernal FREQuency COUPling STATe on page 213 Manual Source Frequency Defines the fixed frequency to be used by the generator Remote command SOURce EXTernal FREQuency on page 213 E N User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 76 R amp S FSW K7 Configuration REESEN Input and Frontend Settings Automatic Source Frequency Numerator Denominator Offset With automatic frequency coupling a series of frequencies is defined one for each sweep point based on the current frequency at the RF input of the R amp S FSW However the frequency used by the generator may differ from the input from the R amp S FSW The RF frequency may be multiplied by a specified factor or a frequency offset can be added or both Note The input for the generator frequency is not validated i e you can enter any values However if the allowed frequency ranges of the generator are exceeded an error mes sage is displayed on the R amp S FSW and the values for Result Frequency Start and Result Frequency Stop are corrected to comply with the range limits The value range for the offset depends on the selected generator The default setting is 0 Hz Offsets lt gt 0 Hz are indicated by the FRQ l
304. ing Data Output EEN 33 4 8 Analog Demodulation in MSRA Operating Mode eee 48 LEE nie et 50 5 1 Default Settings for Analog Demodulation eene 50 5 2 Configuration According to Digital Standards eeeeee 51 5 3 Configuration Overview eeeeeeeeeeeeeeneneenenn nennen nennen nennen nnn tenni nnn nennen 53 5 4 Input and Frontend Settings eeeeeseseeeeeneeeeeenenenennen nnne nnn nnns 54 5 5 Trigger Configuration 1 1 niente tont trn peti ecevevesuanetees 93 56 Data ACQUISITION ERR 101 5 7 Demodulation Display eese nennen nennen nennen nnne nnns 105 5 8 Demodulation iier detinere ti RAEAN ie niii eese EDD AAAA 105 5 9 Output Settirigs eee e eerte ten ie ED LEER 120 5 10 Automatic Settings eiie eerte iecit aAA 125 6 CDI e 127 EEUU RU UE SSS User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 3 R amp S9FSW K7 Contents 6 1 6 2 6 3 6 4 6 5 6 6 6 7 6 8 7 1 7 2 10 11 11 1 11 2 11 3 11 4 11 5 11 6 11 7 11 8 11 9 11 10 11 11 B 1 B 2 Irun mE 127 Trace Export Settings etienne eterne Leere REENEN nauis 131 Marker Settirigs eerte erre eter rne tarn eee rk Ea na nne Lao de nena EE Edna secula 132 Marker Search Settings and Positioning Fu
305. ing is always DC coupled Therefore triggering is possible directly to the point where a specific carrier level phase or frequency is exceeded or not attained AF Filters Additional filters applied after demodulation help filter out unwanted signals or correct pre emphasized input signals A CCITT filter allows you to evaluate the signal by simu lating the characteristics of human hearing IECH User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 31 R amp S9FSW K7 Measurement Basics 4 6 Time Domain Zoom i Time Domain Zoom For evaluations in the time domain the demodulated data for a particular time span can be extracted and displayed in more detail using the Time Domain Zoom function This is useful if the measurement time is very large and thus each sweep point represents a large time span The time domain zoom function distributes the available sweep points only amoung the time span defined by the zoom area length The time span displayed per division of the diagram is decreased Thus the display of the extracted time span becomes more precise MultiView Spectrum Ref Level 0 00 dBm 10dB AQT 200 ms 1 FM Time Domain i CF 1 0 GHZ 4 Result Summary Car als r Pc Analog Demod DBW SMHz Freq 1 0 GHz Gamm T ath HM Wa MM LLL li il n dei h i 100 pts 82 23 dBm Peak tPeak 2 RMS 84 653 kHz 85 002 kHz 84 827 kHz 50 313 kHz MultiView Spectrum Ref Level 0 00 dBm 10dB AQT 200 ms 1 FM Time Domain Analo
306. ings e Demodulation Bandwidth the span of the input signal to be demodulated e Measurement Time how long the input signal is to be measured e Resolution Bandwidth how precise the signal is to be demodulated e Capture Offset MSRA only the offset of the analysis interval from the start of the capture buffer 5 Optionally select the Trigger button and define a trigger for data acquisition for example an offline demodulation trigger to start capturing data only when a useful signal is transmitted 6 Select the Demod Display button and select the demodulation displays that are of interest to you up to 6 Arrange them on the display to suit your preferences 7 Exit the SmartGrid mode and select the Overview softkey to display the Over view again 8 Select the Demodulation Settings button to define demodulation parameters for each evaluation e Configure the Squelch function on the Demod tab to suppress noise during demodulation e For time domain evaluations zoom into the areas of interest by defining a zoom area on the Demod tab e ForAF evaluations use special filters to eliminate certain effects of demodulation or to correct pre emphasized modulated signals on the AF Filters tab e Adapt the diagram scaling to the displayed data on the Scaling tab 9 Select the Analysis button in the Overview to make use of the advanced analysis functions in the demodulation displays RERO
307. ion Time Domain Zoom The Time per Division softkey in the main Analog Demodulation menu enables the Time Domain Zoom function and defines the zoom area length in one step The width ofthe zoom display is divided into 10 divisions thus by entering the time that is displayed in each division you indirectly define the zoom area length Time per Division 10 The starting point of the zoom area is determined automatically To specify the starting point manually use the Start setting Zero Phase Reference Position PM Time Domain only Defines the position at which the phase of the PM demodulated signal is set to O rad The entry is made with respect to time In the default setting the first measured value is set to 0 rad This setting is only available for PM time domain displays with DC coupling Remote command SENSe ADEMod PM RPOint X on page 249 User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 108 R amp S FSW K7 Configuration i SS Demodulation Phase Wrap On Off PM Time Domain only Activates deactivates the phase wrap On The phase is displayed in the range 180 M For example if the phase exceeds 180 360 is subtracted from the phase value with the display thus showing gt 180 Off The phase is not wrapped This setting is only available for PM time domain displays with DC coupling 5 8 2 Demodulation Spectrum The demodulation spectrum defines which span of the demodulated d
308. ion See Center Frequency Stepsize on page 92 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK lt CouplingType gt This command couples and decouples the center frequency step size to the span or the resolution bandwidth Parameters lt CouplingType gt SPAN Couples the step size to the span Available for measurements in the frequency domain for RF spectrum result display RBW Couples the step size to the resolution bandwidth Available for measurements in the time domain for all result displays except RF spectrum OFF Decouples the step size RST SPAN Example FREQ CENT STEP LINK SPAN Manual operation See Center Frequency Stepsize on page 92 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK FACTor lt Factor gt This command defines a step size factor if the center frequency step size is coupled to the span or the resolution bandwidth Parameters lt Factor gt 1 to 100 PCT RST 10 Example FREQ CENT STEP LINK FACT 20PCT Manual operation See Center Frequency Stepsize on page 92 User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 226 R amp S9FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements Configuring the Measurement 11 4 5 Configuring the Vertical Axis Amplitude Scaling 11 4 5 1 The following commands are required to configure the amplitude and vertical axis settings in a remote environment e Amplitude aert ee ENEE cer cnet ete tn se neni h eer ea ipde Da ea a Ranae d caa duin denda 227 e
309. ion PNOise STATe lt State gt This command turns the phase noise measurement at the delta marker position on and off D User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 311 R amp S FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements 11 8 2 11 8 2 1 Analyzing Results The reference marker for phase noise measurements is either a normal marker or a fixed reference If necessary the command turns on the reference marker The correction values for the bandwidth and the log amplifier are taken into account in the measurement Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC DELT FUNC PNO ON Switches on the phase noise measurement with all delta markers CALC DELT FUNC FIX RPO X 128 MHZ Sets the frequency reference to 128 MHz CALC DELT FUNC FIX RPO Y 30 DBM Sets the reference level to 30 dBm Manual operation See Phase Noise Measurement State on page 141 See Switching All Phase Noise Measurements Off on page 142 Defining Limit Checks Note that in remote control upper and lower limit lines are configured using separate commands Thus you must decide in advance which you want to configure The x values for both upper and lower limit lines are defined as a common control line This control line is the reference for the y values for both upper and lower limit lines e Contigurme Limit LINGS iere reete tiere cerei terree 312 e Managing Limit Lines enne nennen nennen 320 e Checki
310. ion of the THD in the Result Summary Remote command UNIT THD on page 259 Output Settings e TOUPUESSMIMGS TE 120 e Analog Demodulation Output Settings eene eene 123 Output Settings The R amp S FSW can provide output to special connectors for other devices For details on connectors refer to the R amp S FSW Getting Started manual Front Rear Panel View chapters How to provide trigger signals as output is described in detail in the R amp S FSW User Manual Digital UO output is not available for Analog Demodulation measurements User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 120 R amp S FSW K7 Configuration Output Settings Output settings can be configured via the INPUT OUTPUT key or in the Outputs dialog box Output Digital IQ IF Video Output IF Out Frequency Noise Source Trigger 2 Trigger 3 laten CRI S 121 MPS ie P 121 Erit EDU ee SP POEL IR 122 t EE 122 EIU 16 EE 122 BE OR c ARE QOO NUUS 122 Noise Source Switches the supply voltage for an external noise source on or off External noise sources are useful when you are measuring power levels that fall below the noise floor of the R amp S FSW itself for example when measuring the noise level of a DUT Remote command DIAGnostic SERVice NSOurce on page 223 Trigger 2 3 Defines the usage of the variable TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connectors where Trigger 2 TRIGGER INPU
311. ions SCPIiCOMMANAS EE 167 Conversion loss External Mixer B21 remote control 186 Conversion loss tables cccccceeccceceeeeeeeeeenenanees 63 64 Available remote control sessssssss 188 Band remote control Bias remote control Configuring B21 i rie rine Creating ER Deleting remote control cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 189 External Mixer B21 remote control 186 External Mixer B21 60 Harmonic order remote control 190 Importing External Mixer B21 ssssss 64 Managing aa 63 Mixer type remote control ssssssss 190 Saving External Mixer B21 eeens 67 Selecting remote control Shifting values External Mixer B21 67 Values External Mixer B i 67 Copying Measurement channel remote 172 Coupling Automatic external generator 43 76 Frequencies external generator sssssse 43 Irp t remote unii eet eorr pecie 178 Manual external generator sseeseseeeereeerereen een 76 D Data acquisition MSRA occi aan haan iee triti deine kv e ek Decus 101 233 Remote conttol 3 reote nenne 233 if C EE 101 Data format lees 289 Binary 289 REMOTE Me 283 285 DB per di
312. is function can be used repetitively until the required details are visible Remote command DISPlay WINDowcn 2Z200M STATe on page 323 DISPlay WINDowcn Z00M AREA on page 322 Multiple Zoom In multiple zoom mode you can enlarge several different areas of the trace simultane ously An overview window indicates the zoom areas in the original trace while the zoomed trace areas are displayed in individual windows The zoom area that corresponds to the individual zoom display is indicated in the lower right corner between the scrollbars Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt Z00M MULTiple lt zoom gt STATe on page 324 DISPlay WINDowcn 2Z200M MULTiple zoom AREA on page 323 Restore Original Display Restores the original display and closes all zoom windows Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt Z00M STATe on page 323 single zoom DISPlay WINDow lt n gt Z00M MULTiple lt zoom gt STATe on page 324 for each multiple zoom window Deactivating Zoom Selection mode Deactivates zoom mode tapping the screen no longer invokes a zoom but selects an object Remote command DISPlay WINDowcn Z0OM STATe on page 323 single zoom DISPlay WINDow lt n gt Z00M MULTiple lt zoom gt STATe on page 324 for each multiple zoom window p P User Manual 1173 9240 02
313. ition markers on the trace CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXiMUM LEET 301 CAL Culate nz M AbkercmzMAximumNENT esee nn nsn ete ens sa sant iis 301 CAL Culate nzM Abkercm M ANimum PDEAKT nennen enne nnns 301 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimUM RIGHL c ccccceececeeeseecesceeceeseseesseecanseeeeeneceeeees 301 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINIMUM ILEFT 0ccccescceceeceesseeceeceeseeseceeeseceneeeseseeeanees 301 User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 300 R amp S FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements SS a a Analyzing Results CAL Culate nzM bker zmz MiNmum NENT 302 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum PEAK 2 c cccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeaeaeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaeeeees 302 CAL Culate nzM Abker zmz MiNmum RICH 302 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum LEFT This command moves a marker to the next lower peak The search includes only measurement values to the left of the current marker position Usage Event Manual operation See Search Mode for Next Peak on page 137 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum NEXT This command moves a marker to the next lower peak Usage Event Manual operation See Search Mode for Next Peak on page 137 See Search Next Peak on page 139 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum PEAK This command moves a marker to the highest level If the marker is not yet active the command first activates the marker Us
314. ive see SOURce EXTernal STATe on page 215 Parameters REFLection Selects reflection measurements TRANsmission Selects transmission measurements RST TRANsmission Example CORR METH TRAN Sets the type of measurement to transmission Manual operation See Calibrate Transmission on page 78 See Calibrate Reflection Short on page 78 See Calibrate Reflection Open on page 79 SENSe CORRection RECall This command restores the measurement configuration used for calibration This command is only available if external generator control is active see SOURce EXTernal STATe on page 215 Example CORR REC Usage Event SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Recall on page 79 SENSe CORRection STATe State This command turns correction of measurement results normalization on and off p P D User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 220 R amp S FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements b a PJ H m Configuring the Measurement The command is available after you have created a reference trace for the selected measurement type with SENSe CORRection COLLect ACQuire on page 219 This command is only available if external generator control is active see SOURce
315. l 1173 9240 02 13 350 R amp S9FSW K7 Index IF OVLD External generator esses 40 45 IF Power Trigger softkey sssssssseeseneenee 96 Trigger level remote ssesssesssssss 240 Impedance acce 179 Ip 56 89 Importing FUNCIONS e 152 ebe E WEE 152 153 334 UO data remote 326 GU EE 153 Input Analog Baseband Interface B71 settings 70 Connector remote esses 178 COUPIING pr M Coupling remote Digital Baseband Interface B17 settings 67 Overload EE Overload remote Settings aerei Signal parameters Source Analog Baseband eeen 70 Source digital W O e ttr 68 Source Radio frequency RF Ze Source Configuration softkey ssss Input sample rate ISR Digital e EE 68 INpUt le 54 Inserting Limit line valU sS ener 150 InstallatiOnt irr t tren rns 11 K Keys MKR 5er t nee erue devi a repa tdv ta erede es 132 MKR gt ES MAR FUNC T itinere nie err rr hern eren eere 140 Peak SeaECli nce re ettet rk reprher der epd una 139 RUN CONT Ss RUN SINGLES tre rrr A qanecetinests 104 L Limit checks Remote control nr ess geed 312 Limit lines ees d we 145 Activating Deactivating 146
316. l 4 Analog Baseband connectors or as a plain UO signal via 2 simple ended lines Note Both single ended and differential probes are supported as input however since only one connector is occupied by a probe the Single ended setting must be used for all probes Differential l Q and inverse 1 Q data Single Ended Q data only Remote command INPut IQ BALanced STATe on page 194 Swap UO Activates or deactivates the inverted UO modulation If the and Q parts of the signal from the DUT are interchanged the R amp S FSW can do the same to compensate for it On and Q signals are interchanged Inverted sideband Q j l Off and Q signals are not interchanged Normal sideband I j Q Remote command SENSe SWAPiq on page 195 Center Frequency Defines the center frequency for analog baseband input For real type baseband input or Q only the center frequency is always 0 Hz User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 71 R amp S FSW K7 Configuration Input and Frontend Settings Note If the analysis bandwidth to either side of the defined center frequency exceeds the minimum frequency 0 Hz or the maximum frequency 40 MHz 80 MHz an error is displayed In this case adjust the center frequency or the analysis bandwidth Remote command SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 225 5 4 1 5 Probe Settings Probes are configured in a separate tab on the Input dialog box which is displayed when
317. l generator AA 46 Overview Configuration EE 53 SOMKOY Me Seed tees 53 OVLD External generator AA 40 P Parameters Inputsigtial situe petere ioter tete inet Dur Output Peak excursion Peak list CONGU WE 143 Displaying 143 Evaluation method seee 25 352 R amp S9FSW K7 Index EEX ell WE 145 Marker numbers A 145 Maximum number of peaks 144 Peak excUrsioti 1 iniecit deseos 138 144 Remote Control 2 ii etit oet is 305 Sort mode PN MICI e E Peaks Marker positioning sess 139 plo S 139 E c u T 139 Peak search CUR 139 ioo 137 Reference marker ssssssseeeeee 136 Performance ImproVvilig sec esci erede e ter rtt tette reete 31 Performing Analog Demodulation measurement 156 Phase NEIE 28 Deviation scaling cierres 116 B H 120 Phase noise measurement Activating Deactivating sss 141 Deactivatihg TEE 142 Marker E T Reference point ccccceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeneneeeeeeeeetes 142 REMOTE COnttol EE 311 Phase Wrap Pellis 109 PM Offline Ge 97 PM Spectrum Evaluation method cccccceceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaee 20 PM Time Domain
318. le MIX PORT 3 Manual operation See Mixer Type on page 59 SENSe MIXer RFOVerrange STATe lt State gt If enabled the band limits are extended beyond RF Start and RF Stop due to the capabilities of the used harmonics Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Manual operation See RF Overrange on page 59 Conversion Loss Table Settings The following settings are required to configure and manage conversion loss tables SENS amp CORR amp cClon CV BAND iei criado et ne eae dee 187 SENSE ele De E 188 SENSe JCORRection CHL CATAlon eee eaee aa ee eae eeeeeeeeeeesesanaeaaaeaeeneneees 188 SENSe IC ORRECHION e EE 189 SENSe CORRection CVLICOMMe Nt wi sient retreat tree aces qo ren aee e a ru ku Pen E diester eva 189 SENSEI CORRecton C VDDDATR EE 189 SENSeJCORReclon e E 190 SENS amp JCORR cton CVE MIXE sio ceu euet tinte etka coe ect E ae EES NEE 190 ISENSeJCORReclo De Ee E 190 E eet 191 EE E Ke E EE 191 SENSe CORRection CVL BAND Type This command defines the waveguide band for which the conversion loss table is to be used This setting is checked against the current mixer setting before the table can be assigned to the range Before this command can be performed the conversion loss table must be selected see SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 191 E User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 187 R amp S FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements a SS Se ee ee
319. lec tor on page 56 Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 0 for UO Analyzer GSM VSA and MC Group Delay measurements Example INP FILT YIG OFF Deactivates the YIG preselector Manual operation See YIG Preselector on page 56 INPut IMPedance Impedance This command selects the nominal input impedance of the RF input 75 Q should be selected if the 50 Q input impedance is transformed to a higher impedance using a matching pad of the RAZ type 25 Q in series to the input impedance of the instrument The power loss correction value in this case is 1 76 dB 10 log 750 500 The command is not available for measurements with the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 Parameters Impedance 50 75 RST 500 Example INP IMP 75 Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Impedance on page 56 See Input Settings on page 88 INPut SELect Source This command selects the signal source for measurements i e it defines which connec tor is used to input data to the R amp S FSW If no additional options are installed only RF input is supported e e User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 179 R amp S9FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements 11 4 2 2 Configuring the Measurement Parameters Source RF Radio Frequency RF INPUT connector
320. lects the link type of the external generator if the GPIB interface is used The difference between the two GPIB operating modes is the execution speed While during GPIB operation each frequency to be set is transmitted to the generator sepa rately a whole frequency list can be programmed in one go if the TTL interface is also used Frequency switching can then be performed per TTL handshake which results in considerable speed advantages This command is only available if external generator control is active see SOURce EXTernal STATe on page 215 Parameters Type GPIB TTL GPIB GPIB connection without TTL synchronization for all generators of other manufacturers and some Rohde amp Schwarz devices TTL GPIB connection with TTL synchronization if available for most Rohde amp Schwarz devices RST GPIB Example SYST COMM RDEV GEN LINK TTL Selects GPIB TTL interface for generator operation Manual operation See TTL Handshake on page 74 e PO User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 217 R amp S FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements REESEN Configuring the Measurement SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice GENerator TYPE lt Type gt This command selects the type of external generator For a list of the available generator types see the External Generator Control Basics section in the R amp S F
321. limit line can be activated for several traces simultaneously If any of the Traces to be Checked violate any of the active limit lines a message is indicated in the diagram Remote command CALCulate LIMit lt k gt TRACe lt t gt CHECk on page 321 T User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 146 R amp S FSW K7 Analysis a SS eS a ee Limit Line Settings and Functions Comment An optional description of the limit line Included Lines in Overview View Filter Defines which of the stored lines are included in the overview Show compat Only compatible lines ible Whether a line is compatible or not is indicated in the Compatibility setting Show all All stored limit lines with the file extension LIN in the Limits subfolder of the main installation folder if not restricted by Show lines for all modes setting Show lines for all modes If activated default limit lines from all applications are displayed Otherwise only lines that were created in the Spectrum application are displayed Note that limit lines from some applications may include additional properties that are lost when the limit lines are edited in the Spectrum application In this case a warning is displayed when you try to store the limit line X Offset Shifts a limit line that has been specified for relative frequencies or times x axis hori zontally This setting does not have any effect on limit lines that are defined by absolute values for the
322. line Help system on the instrument e Documentation CD ROM with Getting Started User Manuals for base unit and options Service Manual Release Notes Data sheet and product brochures Online Help The Online Help is embedded in the instrument s firmware It offers quick context sen sitive access to the complete information needed for operation and programming Online help is available using the icon on the toolbar of the R amp S FSW Getting Started This manual is delivered with the instrument in printed form and in PDF format on the CD It provides the information needed to set up and start working with the instrument Basic operations and handling are described Safety information is also included The Getting Started manual in various languages is also available for download from the R amp S website on the R amp S FSW product page at http www2 rohde schwarz com prod uct FSW html User Manuals User manuals are provided for the base unit and each additional software option The user manuals are available in PDF format in printable form on the Documentation CD ROM delivered with the instrument In the user manuals all instrument functions are described in detail Furthermore they provide a complete description of the remote con trol commands with programming examples The user manual for the base unit provides basic information on operating the R amp S FSW in general and the Spectrum applicatio
323. ling Unit AF Range Db per Division 10 0 dB Ref Position 100 0 Ref Value 100 0 AF Coupling AF Auto Scale be o So 2 AM Spectrum E Dev per Division DD per Division ercsi teet eere recien terret n ee aes 116 Reference Value POoSItlOn otia ean rti n ard etn sacendcdaviseadaddeasisaaidansdsaasadtuaeaiead scans 116 Reference Valid ee erret e naa nta ad an Maa dede e rabo tin nae Ea ane ea aaa Fb addid arra adadda 117 reos e 117 DEVISONL S Lohan Me D MI e US 117 icc EC e 118 Dev per Division Db per Division Defines the modulation depth or the phase deviation or frequency deviation per division logarithmic 0 1 to 20 dB AM display 0 0001 to 1000 96 FM display 1 Hz div to 100 MHz div PM display 0 0001 rad div to 1000 rad div Note The value defined per division refers to the default display of 10 divisions on the y axis If fewer divisions are displayed e g because the window is reduced in height the range per division is increased in order to display the same result range in the smaller window In this case the per division value does not correspond to the actual display Reference Value Position Determines the position of the reference value for the modulation depth or the phase deviation or frequency deviation on the y axis of the diagram The position is entered as a percentage of the diagram height with
324. ll time based windows in all MSRA applications and the MSRA Master Parameters lt Position gt Position of the analysis line in seconds The position must lie within the measurement time of the MSRA measurement Default unit s CALCulate MSRA WINDow lt n gt IVAL This command queries the analysis interval for the window specified by the index lt n gt This command is only available in application measurement channels not the MSRA View or MSRA Master Return values lt IntStart gt Start value of the analysis interval in seconds Default unit s lt IntStop gt Stop value of the analysis interval in seconds Usage Query only INITiate REFResh This function is only available if the Sequencer is deactivated SySTem SEQuencer SYST SEQ OFF and only for applications in MSRA mode not the MSRA Master The data in the capture buffer is re evaluated by the currently active application only The results for any other applications remain unchanged The application channel must be selected before this command can be executed see INSTrument SELect on page 175 LSS M User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 325 R amp S9FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements 11 9 Importing and Exporting UO Data and Results Example SYST SEQ OFF Deactivates the scheduler INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode INIT WAI Starts a new data measurement and waits for the end of the Sweep INST SEL IQ ANA
325. llowing table describes the assignment of the general purpose bits to the LVDS connector pins For details on the LVDS connector see the R amp S FSW UO Analyzer User Manual Table 5 2 Assignment of general purpose bits to LVDS connector pins Bit LVDS pin GPO SDATAA P Trigger GP1 SDATAA P Trigger2 GP2 SDATAO P Reserve1 GP3 SDATAA P Reserve2 User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 96 R amp S FSW K7 Configuration 8 Trigger Configuration Bit LVDS pin GP4 SDATAO P Marker1 GP5 SDATAA P Marker2 Remote command TRIG SOUR GPO see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 243 FM AM PM RF Offline Trigger Source Triggers when the demodulated input signal exceeds the trigger level Remote command TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 243 Time Trigger Source Triggers in a specified repetition interval Remote command TRIG SOUR TIME See TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 243 RF Power Trigger Source Defines triggering of the measurement via signals which are outside the displayed mea surement range For this purpose the instrument uses a level detector at the first intermediate frequency The input signal must be in the frequency range between 500 MHz and 8 GHz The resulting trigger level at the RF input depends on the RF attenuation and preamplification For details on available trigger levels see the data sheet Note If the input signal contains frequ
326. lti Carrier Group Delay MCGD MC Group Delay R amp S FSW K17 Noise R amp S FSW K30 NOISE Noise Phase Noise R amp S FSW PNOISE Phase Noise K40 VSA R amp S FSW K70 DDEM VSA 3GPP FDD BTS BWCD 3G FDD BTS R amp S FSW K72 3GPP FDD UE R amp S FSW MWCD 3G FDD UE K73 TD SCDMA BTS BTDS TD SCDMA BTS R amp S FSW K76 TD SCDMA UE R amp S FSW MTDS TD SCDMA UE K77 cdma2000 BTS R amp S FSW BC2K CDMA2000 BTS K82 cdma2000 MS R amp S FSW MC2K CDMA2000 MS K83 1xEV DO BTS R amp S FSW BDO 1xEV DO BTS K84 1xEV DO MS R amp S FSW MDO 1xEV DO MS K85 WLAN R amp S FSW K91 WLAN WLAN LTE R amp S FSW K10x LTE LTE Note the default channel name is also listed in the table If the specified name for a new channel already exists the default name extended by a sequential number is used for the new channel User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 174 R amp S9FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements 11 4 Configuring the Measurement INSTrument REName ChannelName1 lt ChannelName2 gt This command renames a measurement channel Parameters lt ChannelName1 gt String containing the name of the channel you want to rename lt ChannelName2 gt String containing the new channel name Note that you can not assign an existing channel name to a new channel this will cause an error Example INST REN Spectrum2 Spectrum3 Renames the channel with the name Spectrum2
327. luation These settings are only available for AF Spectrum evaluations not in the time domain e User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 251 R amp S FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements SS SS ee ee a Se Configuring the Measurement SENSe JADEMaOQ AF GENIFGI rn tetro te reete teur tena ian rek e ERE he ai oes 252 E RI E DEET 252 SENSE JAD Ehe ONSE ita epreucure cache ere etta e tete tiene neta tbe rerteasctieeecatiets 252 SENSE TAD EMOGIAP S TAIRU ir eie nete BEES 252 SENSO e en EE 253 SENSe JADEMod AF CENTer Frequency This command sets the center frequency for AF spectrum result display Parameters lt Frequency gt RST 1 25 MHz Manual operation See AF Center on page 110 SENSe JADEMod AF SPAN Span This command sets the span around the center frequency for AF spectrum result dis play The span is limited to DBW 2 see SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth DEMod on page 236 Parameters lt Span gt RST 9 MHz Example ADEM AF SPAN 200 kHz Sets the AF span to 200 kHz Manual operation See AF Span on page 110 SENSe JADEMod AF SPAN FULL This command sets the maximum span for AF spectrum result display The maximum span corresponds to DBW 2 see SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth DEMod on page 236 Example A
328. ly the command also adjusts the reference level This command is only available with option R amp S FSW B25 It is not available if R amp S FSW B17 is active Parameters lt Attenuation gt attenuation in dB Range see data sheet Increment 1 dB RST 0 dB OFF Example INP EATT AUTO OFF INP EATT 10 dB e M User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 229 R amp S9FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements 11 4 5 3 Configuring the Measurement Manual operation See Using Electronic Attenuation Option B25 on page 88 INPut EATT AUTO State This command turns automatic selection of the electronic attenuation on and off If on electronic attenuation reduces the mechanical attenuation whenever possible This command is only available with option R amp S FSW B25 It is not available if R amp S FSW B17 is active Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example INP EATT AUTO OFF Manual operation See Using Electronic Attenuation Option B25 on page 88 INPut EATT STATe State This command turns the electronic attenuator on and off This command is only available with option R amp S FSW B25 It is not available if R amp S FSW B17 is active Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example INP EATT STAT ON Switches the electronic attenuator into the signal path Manual
329. ly calculated if an AF Spectrum window is displayed Parameters lt SINAD gt The signal to noise and distortion ratio in dB SSES User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 287 R amp S FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements REESEN Retrieving Results Usage Query only CALCulate lt n gt MARKer FUNCtion ADEMod THD RESult lt t gt This command queries the result of the total harmonic distortion THD measurement in the specified window Note that this value is only calculated if an AF Spectrum window is displayed Parameters lt THD gt Total harmonic distortion of the demodulated signal in dB Usage Query only SENSe JADEMod FM OFFSet lt ResultType gt This command calculates the FM carrier offset from the currently available measurement data set If averaging has been activated before acquiring the data set using SENSe J ADEMod FM TDOMain TYPE on page 265 the averaged FM offset over several measurements can also be obtained by setting ResultType AVERage The offset thus determined differs from the one calculated by the CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion ADEMod FERRor RESult lt t gt on page 287 command since for determination of the frequency deviation the modulation is removed by means of low pass filtering producing results that are different from those obtained by averaging Query parameters lt ResultType gt IMMediate AVERage IMMediate The current mea
330. ly change the output signal simply by tapping on the windows on the screen If a window is selected that does not contain a time domain result display the selection is ignored and the previous setting is maintained The result display currently used for output is indicated by a Demod Out label in the window title bar Remote command OUTPut ADEMod ONLine SOURce on page 224 AF Coupling Controls the automatic correction of the frequency offset and phase offset of the input signal This function is only available for FM or PM time domain evaluations e FM time evaluation If DC is selected the absolute frequency is displayed i e an input signal with an offset relative to the center frequency is not displayed symmetrically with respect to the zero line If AC is selected the frequency offset is automatically corrected i e the trace is always symmetric with respect to the zero line e PM time evaluation If DC is selected the phase runs according to the existing frequency offset In addi tion the DC signal contains a phase offset of rr If AC is selected the frequency offset and phase offset are automatically corrected i e the trace is always symmetric with respect to the zero line Remote command SENSe ADEMod n AF COUPling on page 248 AC Cutoff Frequency Defines the cutoff frequency for the AC highpass filter for AC coupling only see AF Coupling Note that the audio frequency AF filter settings
331. mber of the power sensor assigned to the specified index Example SYST COMM RDEV PMET2 DEF NRP Z81 123456 Assigns the power sensor with the serial number 123456 to the configuration Power Sensor 2 SYST COMM RDEV PMET2 DEF Queries the sensor assigned to Power Sensor 2 Result NRP Z81 USB 123456 The NRP Z81 power sensor with the serial number 123456 is assigned to the Power Sensor 2 Manual operation See Select on page 82 LEE User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 203 R amp S FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements a a SS Se ee ee a ee Configuring the Measurement Configuring Power Sensor Measurements GALibration PMETereps ZERO AUTQ ONGE ereeiee ceca paeaaee amaitua iesaki anaiai 204 CALCulate lt n gt PMETer lt p gt RELative MAGNitude esses 204 CALCulate lt n gt PMETer lt p gt RELative MAGNitude AUTO ONCE sese 205 CALOCulate n PMETer p RELative STATe essere rennen 205 FEFCPMETGEKSBET oie Ehe 205 READ PME Fers 206 SENSe PMETerspDOYOCIe E STAT area enar toon aaia HR beenden cenas 206 SENSe PMETer p DCYClIe VALue ssessssessseeene enne enne nn eh nn en nennen nnn n nhe ns 206 SENSe TPMET6rspFREQUOQY E 207 SENS amp JPMETersp FREDUuency EINK 2 rre reete ee tau rte ct contente 207 Eeer c 207 SENSe PME Ter pzM lM
332. mechanism This mechanism becomes active as soon as the power at the input mixer exceeds the specified limit It ensures that the connection between RF input and input mixer is cut off Ee User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 33 R amp S FSW K7 Measurement Basics Receiving Data Input and Providing Data Output When the overload protection is activated an error message is displayed in the status bar INPUT OVLD and a message box informs you that the RF Input was disconnec ted Furthermore a status bit bit 3 in the STAT QUES POW status register is set In this case you must decrease the level at the RF input connector and then close the message box Then measurement is possible again Reactivating the RF input is also possible via the remote command INPut ATTenuation PROTection RESet 4 7 2 RF Input from the Analog Baseband Connector RF input can not only be taken from the RF INPUT connector on the front panel of the R amp S FSW If the optional Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 is installed and active for input an RF signal can be input at the BASEBAND INPUT connector and redirected from there to the RF input path A transducer is activated to compensate for the additional path of the redirected signal The signal is then processed as usual in the frequency and time domain as for any other RF input This is useful for example to perform frequency sweep measurements with single ended or differential active probes
333. mmand defines the magnitude the I Q data must exceed to cause a trigger event Note that any RF attenuation or preamplification is considered when the trigger level is analyzed Parameters lt TriggerLevel gt Range 130 dBm to 30 dBm RST 20 dBm Example TRIG LEV IQP 30DBM Manual operation See Trigger Level on page 98 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel RFPower lt TriggerLevel gt This command defines the power level the RF input must exceed to cause a trigger event Note that any RF attenuation or preamplification is considered when the trigger level is analyzed If defined a reference level offset is also considered The input signal must be between 500 MHz and 8 GHz Parameters lt TriggerLevel gt For details on available trigger levels and trigger bandwidths see the data sheet RST 20 dBm Example TRIG LEV RFP 30dBm Manual operation See Trigger Level on page 98 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel AM RELative lt Level gt The command sets the level when AM modulated signals are used as trigger source For triggering to be successful the measurement time must cover at least 5 periods of the audio signal Parameters lt Level gt Range 100 to 100 RST 0 Default unit SSES User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 241 R amp S FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements NN SSS Se ee ee ee Configuring the Measurement Example TRIG LEV AM REL 20 Sets the AM trigger threshold to 20
334. mp S SMA External generator vs ene rr rnnt 38 R amp S SMU External generator ier rrt eerte 38 Range ooien 118 Scaling 118 RBW 102 Displayed ses 13 Remote control 235 Recalling Calibration settings external generator 79 Reference cn e es eteaies MAPKE P risanni rei Phase noise measurement Reference frequency External generator sse 38 74 Reference level Auto level roster rtt prr ete epe rer 87 91 126 rne 69 Displayed PS External generator s 42 Offset ent 86 91 Offset displayed 13 Offset Power sensor Dm 83 Offset SOftKGV ceret rhet ene enn 86 91 ae le EE 118 lue dcr 83 cueiclmM 86 90 Bcec 86 90 MEE 86 90 Reference line External Generator ox eret tree Position external generator Shifting external generator Value external generator z Reference marker ere rene treni User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 353 R amp S9FSW K7 Index Reference trace External generator esses 40 42 Storing as transducer factor external generator 42 79 Reference Vale sinirinin 117 POSION EE 116 Reflection measurement External generator A 37 Refreshing MSRA applications sese 104 MSRA applications remote
335. n be defined automatically according to the reference level or man ually For manual input the following values can be selected e 025V e 05V e 1V e 2V If probes are connected the possible fullscale values are adapted according to the pro be s attenuation and maximum allowed power For details on probes see the R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input User Manual Remote command INPut IQ FULLscale AUTO on page 194 INPut IQ FULLscale LEVel on page 195 E T User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 91 R amp S FSW K7 Configuration Input and Frontend Settings 5 4 4 Frequency The center frequency of the input signal is configured in the Frequency tab of the Input Frontend dialog box gt To display this dialog box do one of the following e Selectthe Input Frontend button in the Analog Demodulation Overview and Switch to the Frequency tab e Select the FREQ key and then the Frequency Config softkey oe Ale Input Source Power Sensor Amplitude Frequency Center 13 25 GHz Center Frequency Stepsize EH 0 1 Demod BW CONIA ETE E E E 92 Center Frequency Gtepnslze sess ener nennen 92 Center Defines the normal center frequency of the signal The allowed range of values for the center frequency depends on the frequency span span gt 0 SPAN min 2 s fcenter ES fmax a SPAN min 2 fmax and span are specified in the data sheet Remote command SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page
336. n demodulation bandwidth and sampling rate refer to chapter 4 3 Sample Rate Measurement Time and Trigger Offset on page 29 Remote command SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth DEMod on page 236 Demodulation Filter Defines the filter to be used for demodulation For details on sample rates measurement times and trigger offsets for various demod ulation bandwidths when using a Gaussian filter see chapter 4 3 Sample Rate Mea surement Time and Trigger Offset on page 29 Flat Default Gauss Optimizes the settling behaviour of the filter Remote command SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth DEMod TYPE on page 236 Measurement Time AQT Defines how long data is acquired for demodulatation For details on the measurement time see chapter 4 3 Sample Rate Measurement Time and Trigger Offset on page 29 Remote command SENSe ADEMod MTIMe on page 234 Capture Offset This setting is only available for applications in MSRA operating mode It has a similar effect as the trigger offset in other measurements it defines the time offset between the capture buffer start and the start of the extracted application data The offset must be a positive value as the application can only analyze data that is contained in the capture buffer Remote command SENSe MSRA CAPTure OFFSet on page 326 Resolution Bandwidth Defines the resolution bandwidth for data acquisition The available range is specified in the data
337. n in particular Furthermore the software func tions that enhance the basic functionality for various applications are described here An introduction to remote control is provided as well as information on maintenance instru ment interfaces and troubleshooting In the individual application manuals the specific instrument functions of the application are described in detail For additional information on default settings and parameters refer to the data sheets Basic information on operating the R amp S FSW is not included in the application manuals All user manuals are also available for download from the R amp S website on the R amp S FSW product page at http www2 rohde schwarz com product FSW html EEUU RA E SSSI User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 8 R amp S9FSW K7 Preface 1 3 1 3 1 1 3 2 Conventions Used in the Documentation Service Manual This manual is available in PDF format on the CD delivered with the instrument It describes how to check compliance with rated specifications instrument function repair troubleshooting and fault elimination It contains all information required for repairing the R amp S FSW by replacing modules Release Notes The release notes describe the installation of the firmware new and modified functions eliminated problems and last minute changes to the documentation The corresponding firmware version is indicated on the title page of the release notes The most recent relea
338. n nennen nre nennen nere trennen 262 SENSe JADJUStFREQUGNCY cro n en E D E EE EH UO ERE DE Redi eb aes 261 SENS ADJS LEV Gls I RM 262 IEN Ge IAD lust SCAL ev AUTOtCONTInuousl emere nennen 263 IEN Ge IAVERage COUN EM EISE ER d EN SENSe AVERage lt n gt STATe lt t gt IEN Ge IGANDwicdtblGwlDtb DEMod sese nrn nnne tenete nre enne 236 IEN Ge IGANDwidtblGwlDtb DEModTWPE 236 IEN Ge IDGANDwiblDWIDOTRE Solution 236 SENSe CORRection COLLect ACQuire essent nennen rennen iaiia ansia 219 SENSe CORRection CVL BAND eeseesssseseseeee einen nennen enne nnnenne nnne tren reete senes ttes tn street enne 187 SENSe GORRS amp cIiOn e EE 188 IEN Ge ICObR echon CNL CATAlon ener tenenr innen 188 SENSe GORRection Ae BE SENSe CORRection CVL COMMent SEN Seechen END ege 12 2 iic nici asocia LEE Lese ea eiectus a dd ae bd ltd SENSe CORRection CVL HARMoOniC esses eene nennen nennen rennes ssh rts sen rn sse n rns tennan sena SENSe CORR ction CVE MIXGr tL Eee Toto hee dere aa e EXC Yer Fee E dE EELER SENSe CORRSsction CVEIPORTS iii arent eade toc teen eet i ces Yd dea ct babe Do ede ERE RERO RE SR RR NE d et SENSe CORRection CVEISELOCE E SENSe CORRection CVL SNUMber essent nnne n rennen rnnt enr nnne SENSe GORRection METEIOG EE SENSe GORRection RECall EC SENSe CORRec
339. n the front panel Trigger 3 TRIGGER 3 INPUT OUTPUT connector on the rear panel Trigger 1 is INPUT only Note Providing trigger signals as output is described in detail in the R amp S FSW User Manual Input The signal at the connector is used as an external trigger source by the R amp S FSW No further trigger parameters are available for the connec tor Ee User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 99 R amp S FSW K7 Configuration EE Trigger Configuration Output The R amp S FSW sends a trigger signal to the output connector to be used by connected devices Further trigger parameters are available for the connector Note For offline AF or RF triggers no output signal is provided Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel on page 246 OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt DIRection on page 246 Output Type Trigger 2 3 Type of signal to be sent to the output Device Trig Default Sends a trigger when the R amp S FSW triggers gered Trigger Sends a high level trigger when the R amp S FSW is in Ready for trig Armed ger state This state is indicated by a status bit in the STATus OPERation reg ister bit 5 as well as by a low level signal at the AUX port pin 9 For details see the description of the STATus OPERation register in the R amp S FSW User Manual and the description of the AUX port in the R amp S FSW Getting Started manual User Defined Sends a trigger when user selects Send Trigger but
340. n the same order until the Sequencer is stopped CDEFined First a single sequence is performed Then only those channels in continuous sweep mode INIT CONT ON are repeated RST CONTinuous SYST SEQ ON Activates the Sequencer INIT SEQ MODE SING Sets single sequence mode so each active measurement will be performed once INIT SEQ IMM Starts the sequential measurements INITiate SEQuencer REFResh ALL This function is only available if the Sequencer is deactivated 5YSTem SEQuencer SYST SEQ OFF and only in MSRA mode The data in the capture buffer is re evaluated by all active MSRA applications Example Usage SYST SEQ OFF Deactivates the scheduler INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode INIT WAI Starts a new data measurement and waits for the end of the sweep INIT SEQ REFR Refreshes the display for all MSRA channels Event User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 273 R amp S FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements REESEN Configuring the Result Display SYSTem SEQuencer lt State gt This command turns the Sequencer on and off The Sequencer must be active before any other Sequencer commands INIT SEQ are executed otherwise an error will occur A detailed programming example is provided in the Operating Modes chapter in the R amp S FSW User Manual Parameters lt State gt ON OFF 0 1 ON 1 The Sequencer is activate
341. n this case deactivate the marker number display Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FPEaks ANNotation LABel STATe on page 306 Exporting the Peak List The peak list can be exported to an ASCII file DAT for analysis in an external applica tion Remote command MMEMory STORe LIST on page 308 FORMat DEXPort DSEParator on page 285 Limit Line Settings and Functions Up to 8 limit lines can be displayed simultaneously in the R amp S FSW Many more can be stored on the instrument Limit Line Management EE 145 Limit Line RE EE 148 Limit Line Management Limit lines are managed in the Line Config dialog box which is displayed when you press the LINES key and then Lines Config softkey ny Une Corio DN Limit Lines Display Lines Unit Compatible Visible Check Traces dBm yes SPURIOUS LINE ABS dBm yes ADEM 1 ADEM 3 LLSPUR MULTISTATUS 1 MULTISTATUS 2 MULTISTATUS 5 REM Y Offset REMS a E 0 0 dB Comment View Filter L Show compatible ea Show all Show Lines for All Modes User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 145 R amp S FSW K7 Analysis iS S ee Limit Line Settings and Functions For the limit line overview the R amp S FSW searches for all stored limit lines with the file extension LIN in the limits subfolder of the main installation folder The overview allows you to determine which limit lines are available and can be used for the c
342. nce Level value ignores the Shifting the Display Offset It is important to know the actual power level the R amp S FSW must handle Note that for input from the External Mixer R amp S FSW B21 the maximum reference level also depends on the conversion loss see the R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input User Manual for details Remote command DISPlay WINDowcn TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel on page 228 Shifting the Display Offset Reference Level Defines an arithmetic level offset This offset is added to the measured level irrespective of the selected unit The scaling of the y axis is changed accordingly User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 86 R amp S FSW K7 Configuration S Input and Frontend Settings Define an offset if the signal is attenuated or amplified before it is fed into the R amp S FSW so the application shows correct power results All displayed power level results will be shifted by this value Note however that the Reference Level value ignores the Reference Level Offset It is important to know the actual power level the R amp S FSW must handle To determine the required offset consider the external attenuation or gain applied to the input signal A positive value indicates that an attenuation took place R amp S FSW increa ses the displayed power values a negative value indicates an external gain R amp S FSW decreases the displayed power values The setting range is 200 dB in 0 01 dB steps
343. nctions eeeesss 137 Marker Function Configuration eese nennen nnne nnne nnne 140 Marker Peak List Configuration eese nnn nnne 143 Limit Line Settings and Functions eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeennnn nennen nnn 145 ZOOM FUNCHONS c 150 UO Data Import and Export eeeeeeeee enne eene nnn 152 Import Export FUHRCtIOnS eerrn e irato xx RRRRERRRER XRXXKRERR KENRN RRRRRRNRRARRNRRRRRERRRR ARRA ERR e MERE 152 How to Export and Import UO Data cecseeeeeeeeseeseeeeeereenen nenne 153 How to Perform Measurements in the Analog Demodulation Appli CDI RM rneec 156 Measurement Example Demodulating an FM Signal 158 Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Measurement 164 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements 165 ugeet ec LE 166 Common Sues JIe 171 Activating Analog Demodulation Measurements eene 172 Configuring the Measurement eeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeenn nennen nennen nnne nennt nnne nnn 175 Capturing Data and Performing Sweeps cene 269 Configuring the Result Display cese nennen nennen nnne nnn 274 Retrieving Results cetero E PER sete REESEN 281 Analyzing E 292 Importing
344. ncy CEN Ter STEP LINK FACT TOT eege ci ERAN 226 SENSe FREQuency CENTer lt Frequency gt This command defines the center frequency Parameters lt Frequency gt The allowed range and fmax is specified in the data sheet UP Increases the center frequency by the step defined using the SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP command DOWN Decreases the center frequency by the step defined using the SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP command RST fmax 2 Default unit Hz Example FREQ CENT 100 MHz FREQ CENT STEP 10 MHz FREQ CENT UP Sets the center frequency to 110 MHz Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Center Frequency on page 71 See Center on page 92 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP lt StepSize gt This command defines the center frequency step size T User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 225 R amp S FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements REESEN Configuring the Measurement You can increase or decrease the center frequency quickly in fixed steps using the SENS FREQ UP AND SENS FREQ DOWN commands see SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 225 Parameters lt StepSize gt fmax IS specified in the data sheet Range 1 to fMAX RST 0 1 x span Default unit Hz Example FREQ CENT 100 MHz FREQ CENT STEP 10 MHz FREQ CENT UP Sets the center frequency to 110 MHz Manual operat
345. ncy points are allocated in equidistant steps between start and stop frequency The generated transducer factor can be further adapted using the Transducer softkey in the SETUP menu For more information on transducers see the General Instrument Setup gt Transducers section in the R amp S FSW User Manual This function is only available if Source Calibration Normalize is switched on Note Note that the normalized measurement data is used not the reference trace Thus if you store the normalized trace directly after calibration without changing any settings the transducer factor will be O dB for the entire span by definition of the normalized trace Remote command SENSe CORRection TRANsducer GENerator on page 221 Reference Position Defines the position of the Result Frequency Stop in percent of the total y axis range The top of the diagram is 100 the bottom is 0 By default the 0 dB line is displayed at the top of the diagram 100 ERREUR RA N User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 79 R amp S FSW K7 Configuration Input and Frontend Settings This setting is only available if normalization is on see Source Calibration Normalize on page 79 The reference line defined by the reference value and reference position is similar to the Reference Level defined in the Amplitude settings However this reference line only affects the y axis scaling in the diagram it has no effect on the expected input power level
346. nd defines whether the input is provided as a differential signal via all 4 Ana log Baseband connectors or as a plain UO signal via 2 simple ended lines Parameters State ON Differential OFF Simple ended RST ON Example INP IQ BAL OFF Manual operation See Input configuration on page 71 INPut IQ FULLscale AUTO State This command defines whether the fullscale level i e the maximum input power on the Baseband Input connector is defined automatically according to the reference level or manually Parameters State ON Automatic definition OFF Manual definition according to INPut 10 FULLscale LEVel on page 195 RST ON Example INP IQ FULL AUTO OFF Manual operation See Fullscale Level Mode Value on page 91 p V 9 User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 194 R amp S FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements REESEN Configuring the Measurement INPut IQ FULLscale LEVel lt PeakVoltage gt This command defines the peak voltage at the Baseband Input connector if the fullscale level is set to manual mode see INPut 10 FULLscale AUTO on page 194 Parameters lt PeakVoltage gt 0 25V 0 5V 1V 2V Peak voltage level at the connector For probes the possible fullscale values are adapted according to the probe s attenuation and maximum allowed power RST 1V Example
347. nd deletes a limit line Usage Event Manual operation See Delete Line on page 148 CALCulate LIMit lt k gt STATe lt State gt This command turns the limit check for a specific limit line on and off To query the limit check result use CALCulate LIMit lt k gt FAIL IESSE User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 320 R amp S9FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements 11 8 2 3 Analyzing Results Note that a new command exists to activate the limit check and define the trace to be checked in one step see CALCulate LIMit lt k gt TRACe lt t gt CHECk on page 321 Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC LIM STAT ON Switches on the limit check for limit line 1 Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Disable All Lines on page 148 CALCulate LIMit lt k gt TRACe lt t gt CHECk State This command turns the limit check for a specific trace on and off To query the limit check result use CALCulate LIMit lt k gt FAIL Note that this command replaces the two commands from previous signal and spectrum analyzers which are still supported however CALC LIM TRAC see the description of commands for compatibility in the R amp S FSW User Manual CALCulate LIMit k STATe on page 320 Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC LIM3 TRAC2 CHEC ON Switches on the limit check for limit line 3 on trace 2 Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Traces to be
348. nd queries the position of the peaks on the y axis The order depends on the sort order that has been set with CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FPEaks SORT Return values lt PeakPosition gt Position of the peaks on the y axis The unit depends on the mea surement Usage Query only MMEMory STORe LIST lt FileName gt This command exports the SEM and spurious emission list evaluation to a file The file format is dat Parameters lt FileName gt String containing the path and name of the target file Example MMEM STOR LIST test Stores the current list evaluation results in the test dat file Manual operation See Exporting the Peak List on page 145 n dB Down Marker The following commands control the n dB down markers CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion NDBDOWn eeeeeeenene nennen enne nnn nnns 308 CALOCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion NDBDown FREQuenoy sss 308 CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion NDBDown QFACtor ecce eennnne 309 CAL Culate nz M Abker mzEUNGCHonNDBDown REGut 200 CAL Culate nz M Abker mzFUNGCHonNDBDown STATe eene enne 310 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion NDBDown TIME 310 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion NDBDown lt Distance gt This command defines the distance of the n dB down markers to the reference marker Parameters lt Distance gt Distance of the temporary markers to the reference marker in dB RS
349. nding marker number is currently active as a deltamarker it is turned into a normal marker Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC MARK3 ON Switches on marker 3 Manual operation See Marker State on page 133 See Marker Type on page 134 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt TRACe lt Trace gt This command selects the trace the marker is positioned on Note that the corresponding trace must have a trace mode other than Blank If necessary the command activates the marker first Parameters lt Trace gt 1to6 Trace number the marker is assigned to E N User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 293 R amp S FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements NS SSS a a ge Analyzing Results Example CALC MARK3 TRAC 2 Assigns marker 3 to trace 2 Manual operation See Assigning the Marker to a Trace on page 134 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X lt Position gt This command moves a marker to a particular coordinate on the x axis If necessary the command activates the marker If the marker has been used as a delta marker the command turns it into a normal marker Parameters Position Numeric value that defines the marker position on the x axis The unit is either Hz frequency domain or s time domain or dB statistics Range The range depends on the current x axis range Example CALC MARK2 X 1 7MHz Positions marker 2 to frequency 1 7 MHz Manual operation See Marker T
350. ne a zoom area you first have to turn the zoom on 1 Frequency Sweep iRm EU 1 origin of coordinate system x1 0 y1 0 2 end point of system x2 100 y2 100 3 zoom area e g x1 60 y1 30 x2 80 y2 75 ES User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 322 R amp S9FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements 11 8 3 2 Analyzing Results Parameters lt x1 gt lt y1 gt Diagram coordinates in of the complete diagram that define the lt x2 gt lt y2 gt Zoom area The lower left corner is the origin of coordinate system The upper right corner is the end point of the system Range 0 to 100 Default unit PCT Manual operation See Single Zoom on page 151 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM STATe State This command turns the zoom on and off Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example DISP ZOOM ON Activates the zoom mode Manual operation See Single Zoom on page 151 See Restore Original Display on page 151 See Deactivating Zoom Selection mode on page 151 Using the Multiple Zoom DiSblavlfWiNDow nztZOOM ML Tiple zoomz AREA essen nennen 323 DiSblavlfWiNDow nztZOOM ML Tiple zoomz GTATe eene 324 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM MULTiple lt zoom gt AREA lt x1 gt lt y1 gt lt x2 gt lt y2 gt This command defines the zoom area for a multiple zoom To define a zoom area you first have to turn the zoom on 1 Frequency Sweep iRm re 1 origin of co
351. nector must be configured for Input EXT3 Trigger signal from the TRIGGER 3 INPUT OUTPUT connector Note Connector must be configured for Input RFPower First intermediate frequency Not available for input from the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 or the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 IFPower Second intermediate frequency Not available for input from the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 For input from the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 this command is interpreted as BBPower for compatibility reasons IQPower Magnitude of sampled UO data For applications that process UO data such as the UO Analyzer or optional applications Not available for input from the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 or the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 TIME Time interval BBPower Baseband power for digital input via the Digital Baseband Inter face R amp S FSW B17 or the Analog Baseband interface R amp S FSW B71 PSEN External power sensor AF AF power signal FM FM power signal AM corresponds to the RF power signal AMRelative corresponds to the AM signal PM User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 244 R amp S9FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements 11 4 7 2 Example Manual operation Configuring the Measurement PM power signal GPO GP1 GP2 GP3 GP4 GP5 For applications that process UO data such a
352. nerator A 40 Measurement channel Creating remote ssessssssssss 172 173 Deleting remote AA 173 Duplicating remote sss 172 Querying remote i Renaming remote sss 175 Replacing remote A 173 Measurement examples Analog Demodulation ssssssssssss 158 Measurement time Auto Settiligs re e t Febre tente nne Displayedi 2 E s C Power sensor Nel d M Vale range Microbutton mild M 72 Minimum Marker positioning cssssseseee 139 a pr P 139 cy 139 Mixer Type External Mixer B21 ene 59 MKR KOy uitae seg testa i e ib EE do p rtp xen d 132 MKR gt C assets 137 138 MKR FUNCT KEY D M ER Y 140 Modulation pr mec rt NEE le WEE EEN s eere gerere err Inverted UO remote Inverted I Q ener atid ete enter ned MSRA Analysis interval sssssseseeeeses Operating mode vssiisiiciiiiariiis asiad aaisen ek E ee E MSRA applications Capture Offset x nee 102 Capture offset remote eeessseeessss 326 Multiple Measurement channels esses 12 Multiple ZOOM MEET 151 User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 N Nam
353. nfiguring the Measurement Parameters lt State gt ON and Q signals are interchanged Inverted sideband Q j I OFF and Q signals are not interchanged Normal sideband I j Q RST OFF Manual operation See Swap Q on page 71 11 4 2 4 Configuring Digital UO Input and Output Useful commands for digital UO data described elsewhere e INST SEL DIQ see INPut SELect on page 179 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel BBPower on page 240 Remote commands for the R amp S DiglConf software Remote commands for the R amp S DiglConf software always begin with SOURce EBOX Such commands are passed on from the R amp S FSW to the R amp S DiglConf automatically which then configures the R amp S EX IQ BOX via the USB connection All remote commands available for configuration via the R amp S DiglConf software are described in the R amp SGEX IQ BOX Digital Interface Module R amp SG amp DiglConf Software Operating Manual Example 1 SOURCe EBOX RST SOURCe EBOX IDN Result Rohde amp Schwarz DiglConf 02 05 436 Build 47 Example 2 SOURCe EBOX USER CLOCk REFerence FREQuency 5MHZ Defines the frequency value of the reference clock Remote commands exclusive to digital UO data input and output digne ERS zT e c E a dtetendeeie st a de A A E e 197 INPut ele Nee BIR e OT 198 INPut DIO RANGE COU Pig EE 198 INPut BIOTANGS UPPel ucc peer rhet EE axe daidan daadaa n RR e Hep ENN 198 INPUt DIQ R
354. ng the Results of a Limit Check lceereettdezetcet 321 Configuring Limit Lines CAL Culate LIMIE COMMER EEN 313 CAL GCulate EIMitSKS CONTEFOIBBATA siio roro adr e Preterea eth eet tenete 313 GALGulate LIMitek CONTroEDOMbalh ena iic rie nteonn rnnt rhe n addu nen E aaa Eia 313 CALCulate LIMit lt k gt CONTrol RT 313 e IERT e CON Meel ei 314 CALC late eelere deed Sieden 314 CAL Gulate LIMii lt k CONTrol SPAGING Eed ENER 314 CALCulate LIMiteks LOW DATA sirnanira gan aa a a a a a a aa EAA aAa 314 GALE Gulate E IMIESKSEOVWeIEMARGN EE 315 GALGulate LIMitek EOWerMDODE 5 ne cocta nonet Rae cnn nes a cde c RR a aoa cd Redes 315 CAL CulateLlMitck LOWerOttzet nene 315 CAL Culate LIMIESK gt Be e EE 316 CAL Culate LIMit lt k gt LOWerSPACING 2 reatu puce einen eb ie tede e e aka ec den iaa 316 CAL CulateLlMitck LOWerGtate 316 CAL C ulate LIMiteksLEoOWer THReshiold EE 316 GAEOGUISUELIMIESKSINAME 3 Ia eret nd x eva Fes un Pe ee eoque reve nra Qu DE eu ne rd aerea us 317 E RER e ET NEE 317 User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 312 R amp S FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements SS SSS SSS SSS A J st Analyzing Results CAL Culatel IMitcks Uber DATA 317 GAECulate LIMiESIcs UPPer MAR GIM E 318 GAL CUlate LUMit lt k UPPE MGE reete rer ere sete etaed sel beicidee Sierra rb e POge pet edi 318 GALGulate LIMitek ee E 318 GAECula
355. nn a tenero kn natn rk nane e rey aaa r uh TRIGger SEQuence LEVel EXTernal lt port gt TRIG Ger SEQUENCE SLOP Chis sccesiesesiccasececssexedvenssccestdeasaisvustyosdeussbivssecnsesgevaseassidejnexduseaisttsduacdosteussasevhessazess TRIGger SEQuence SOURCC isis ctccscctssccnicccssopesencandveceon exsaaeabenesiicavendstdevstenusnccedsnaah Combes AAE a A a cinta TRiGger SEQuence TIME RIN Tetval 5 reta en rtr eh tb b terne ond rtr ry rie SIEHE TE a User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 343 R amp S FSW K7 List of Remote Commands AnalogDemod BIC IEN el EE 259 UNIT sn gt PME ee e EE 210 UNIT n PMETersp POWerRAT IO irent tee thence rre eant taeda a ERR RS Fe ea SER ER Fa a 210 SENSe JADEMOQ AF CENTSGLE reete eet bed d a ve mansion n De e e edd 252 E En ERT ee RE 252 SENSe JADEMOG AF SPAN FULL iiri rt reor reitera tegere EEEE Tec ae E ERR o EE EE EY Ree as EE 252 SENSe JADEMod AF STARt SENSe JADEMOG AF STOP ih edente eee tte e e ede Aion Abidin dE nn b dd SENSe ADEMod AM RELative AFSPectrum RESUIt essen eene 282 SENSe ADEMod AM RELative AFSPectrum PE 265 IEN Ge IADE Mod AM REI ativel TDOMainl REG 282 SENSe ADEMod AM RELative TDOMain TYPE nennen rennes 265 SENSe ADEMod AN ABSolute TDOMain RESUIt esee 282 SENSe ADEMod AM ABSolute TDOMainj T YPE esee 265 SENSe ADEMod
356. nn maa ke qne LIA a M Ra dX Rad nndis 296 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MREF ccccccccsceceseececcesececesseceeceeseseceeeceacceseneeseues 296 CALCulatesns DEETamarkerem S TATe 2 iacere laica cert euren hune apu nin Dann 296 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarkercmz TR ACe iei s aaan E a aE iaar ERE 296 CALCulatesn gt DELTamarkers M gt X lt ccccac sccccieccensancsenccedvdnatencdnacdcdenaannsneiucdadanacceaccatecheats 297 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarkercmz SREL ative eene enne ennt ns 297 CAL Culatesne DEL Tamarkersim a iy EE 297 User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 292 R amp S FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements REESEN Analyzing Results CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt AOFF This command turns all markers off Example CALC MARK AOFF Switches off all markers Usage Event Manual operation See All Markers Off on page 135 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m1 gt LINK TO MARKer lt m2 gt State This command links normal marker lt m1 gt to any active normal marker lt m2 gt If you change the horizontal position of marker lt m2 gt marker lt m1 gt changes its horizontal position to the same value Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC MARK4 LINK TO MARK2 ON Links marker 4 to marker 2 Manual operation See Linking to Another Marker on page 134 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt STATe State This command turns markers on and off If the correspo
357. nput impedance of the instrument The correction value in this case is 1 76 dB 10 log 750 500 This value also affects the unit conversion see Reference Level on page 86 This function is not available for input from the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 or from the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 For analog baseband input an impedance of 50 O is always used Remote command INPut IMPedance on page 179 High Pass Filter 1 3 GHz Activates an additional internal high pass filter for RF input signals from 1 GHz to 3 GHz This filter is used to remove the harmonics of the R amp S FSW in order to measure the harmonics for a DUT for example This function requires option R amp S FSW B13 Note for RF input signals outside the specified range the high pass filter has no effect For signals with a frequency of approximately 4 GHz upwards the harmonics are sup pressed sufficiently by the YIG filter Remote command INPut FILTer HPASs STATe on page 178 YIG Preselector Activates or deactivates the YIG preselector ___L_L______ E User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 56 R amp S FSW K7 Configuration Input and Frontend Settings An internal YIG preselector at the input of the R amp S FSW ensures that image frequencies are rejected However this is only possible for a restricted bandwidth In order to use the maximum bandwidth for signal analysis you can deactivate the YIG preselector at the input
358. ns in the base unit except for the special marker functions The remote commands required to perform these tasks are described in chapter 11 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements on page 165 Trace du CN 127 Trace Export Settings E 131 Marker Settings M cece ezecace ceceedeavscteczesesseesscetsetecesasctteeezesdeczieeessevencecierserseuetiess 132 Individual Marker Setup tet n tte dea hod eaa Deva utu eau dedi eu ae eR enn 132 General Marker Settings oco er cede se E ra itd dE e bu tdg us 135 Marker Search Settings and Positioning Functions eese 137 Marker Search Settings crore tereti rient ted re ea d Ra ee rra td dus 137 Positioning e Tale e EE 138 Marker Function Configuration cceecccsesseeeceeseeeeeeseeseeeeeeseeseeeneeseeseeeneeseeeeeseeneets 140 Phase Noise Measurement Market 141 NOB Down Market tree dde Dr ae Er code dE Pu rau dede Ead d eR 142 Deactivating All Marker FUNCIONS nennen enne 143 Marker Peak List Configuration eeeeeeeeeennnneneee nnne nnns 143 Limit Line Settings and Functions eeeeeeeeeneneennnn nennen 145 Limit Eine Management iieri tette Lac e tati e eL v bn LEG E t duas 145 Limit Eine Details tritt et Ere oci elevates 148 Zoom Functions anann aAA NAASE ER Rn Fear Re EIER uRa 150 Trace Settings You can configure the settings for up to 6 individual traces Trace settings
359. nts SS SS ee ee a Se Configuring the Measurement Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Manual operation See Source State on page 76 SOURce POWer LEVel IMMediate OFFSet Offset This command defines a level offset for the external generator level Thus for example attenuators or amplifiers at the output of the external generator can be taken into account for the setting Parameters Offset Range 200 dB to 200 dB RST OdB Example SOUR POW OFFS 10dB Sets the level offset of the external generator to 20 dBm Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Source Offset on page 76 Interface Configuration The following commands are required to configure the interface for the connection to the external generator SOURse EXIemalROSCIlater SOBRE 2 pneter rts u Eden 216 GvGTemCGOMMunicate GIG HRDEVice GENeratorADDbess 217 SvGTemCOMMunicate HR DEVice GENerator INTertace esses nenne 217 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice GENerator LINK cccsccccsecceeseecesceecececeseceaceeceseeeaees 217 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice GENerator TYPE ccccccccessceceseeeseseceessececeeceeeeeeaees 218 SYSTem COMMunicate TCPip RDEVice GENerator ADDRess esee 218 SOURce EXTernal ROSCillator SOURce Source This command controls selection of the reference oscillator for the external generator If the external reference oscillator is selected the reference signal must be connected to the
360. nts the application stops the measurement and cal culates the average after the average count has been reached Parameters lt AverageCount gt If you set a average count of 0 or 1 the application performs one single sweep in single sweep mode In continuous sweep mode if the average count is set to 0 a moving average over 10 sweeps is performed Range 0 to 200000 RST 0 Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Sweep Average Count on page 105 See Average Count on page 130 SENSe JAVERage lt n gt STATe lt t gt lt State gt This command turns averaging for a particular trace in a particular window on and off Parameters lt State gt ON OFF Usage SCPI confirmed SENSe JAVERage lt n gt TYPE Mode This command selects the trace averaging mode SS User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 267 R amp S FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements Configuring the Measurement Parameters lt Mode gt viDeo The logarithmic power values are averaged LiNear The power values are averaged before they are converted to log arithmic values POWer The power level values are converted into unit Watt prior to aver aging After the averaging the data is converted back into its orig inal unit RST ViDeo Example AVER TYPE LIN Switches to linear average calculation Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Average Mode on page 129 SENSe WINDow DETector lt trace gt
361. nu which is displayed when you press the MKR gt key or in the Marker menu Select MIkel derer cirea dene d ee at ee a rh i ed arre en ein E ore PE t i n a m d reri 138 SE e DEE 139 Search Next EEN 139 oeatch et lu BEE 139 Satch Next MIP it EI ME 139 Select Marker Opens a dialog box to select and activate or deactivate one or more markers quickly User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 138 R amp S FSW K7 Analysis Marker Search Settings and Positioning Functions Selected State Selected State Selected State mmm Con M oai B on Kos Remote command Marker selected via suffix m in remote commands Peak Search Sets the selected marker delta marker to the maximum of the trace If no marker is active marker 1 is activated Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum PEAK on page 301 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimum PEAK on page 303 Search Next Peak Sets the selected marker delta marker to the next lower maximum of the assigned trace If no marker is active marker 1 is activated Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum NEXT on page 301 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimum NEXT on page 302 Search Minimum Sets the selected marker delta marker to the minimum of the trace If no marker is active marker 1 is activated Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m MINimum PEAK on page 302 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MINimum PEAK on page
362. od MTIMe lt Time gt This command defines the measurement time for analog demodulation Parameters lt Time gt RST 62 5us Example ADEM MTIM 62 5us Sets the measurement time to 62 5 us Manual operation See Measurement Time AQT on page 102 SENSe ADEMod RLENgth This command returns the record length set up for the current analog demodulation measurement Example ADEM RLEN Returns the current record length Usage Query only SENSe ADEMod SET lt SampleRate gt lt RecordLength gt TriggerSource TriggerSlope lt OffsetSamples gt lt NoOfMeas gt This command configures the analog demodulator of the instrument Parameters lt SampleRate gt numeric value The frequency at which measurement values are taken from the A D converter and stored in UO memory Allowed range refer to chapter 4 3 Sample Rate Measurement Time and Trigger Offset on page 29 RST 8 MHz lt RecordLength gt Number of samples to be stored in UO memory Range 1 to 400001 with AF filter or AF trigger active 1 to 480001 with both AF filter and AF trigger deactive RST 501 lt TriggerSource gt Selection of the trigger source to use for the demodulator For details on trigger sources see Trigger Source on page 95 IMMediate EXTernal EXT2 EXT3 IFPower RFPower AF AM AMRelative FM PM Note After selecting IF Power the trigger threshold can be set with the TRIGger SEQuence
363. ode for subsequent traces Clear Write Overwrite mode the trace is overwritten by each sweep This is the default setting The Detector is automatically set to Auto Peak User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 128 R amp S FSW K7 Analysis BEE Trace Settings Max Hold The maximum value is determined over several sweeps and displayed The R amp S FSW saves the sweep result in the trace memory only if the new value is greater than the previous one The Detector is automatically set to Positive Peak Min Hold The minimum value is determined from several measurements and displayed The R amp S FSW saves the sweep result in the trace memory only if the new value is lower than the previous one The Detector is automatically set to Negative Peak Average The average is formed over several sweeps The Sweep Average Count determines the number of averaging pro cedures The Detector is automatically set to Sample View The current contents of the trace memory are frozen and displayed Blank Removes the selected trace from the display Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE on page 263 Detector Defines the trace detector to be used for trace analysis Auto Selects the optimum detector for the selected trace and filter mode This is the default setting Type Defines the selected detector type Note If the EMI R amp S FSW K54 measurement option is installed and the filter type
364. of the R amp S FSW which may lead to image frequency display Note that the YIG preselector is active only on frequencies greater than 8 GHz Therefore switching the YIG preselector on or off has no effect if the frequency is below that value Remote command INPut FILTer YIG STATe on page 179 Input Connector Determines whether the RF input data is taken from the RF INPUT connector default or the optional BASEBAND INPUT I connector This setting is only available if the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 is installed and active for input For more information on the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 see the R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input User Manual Remote command INPut CONNector on page 178 5 4 1 2 External Mixer Settings The external mixer is configured in the External Mixer tab of the Input dialog box which is available when you do one of the following if the R amp S FSW B21 option is installed e Press the INPUT OUTPUT key then select the External Mixer Config softkey e From the Overview select Input then switch to the External Mixer tab under Input Source Note that external mixers are not supported in MSRA mode For details on using external mixers see the R amp S FSW User Manual HEU Cp up EL 57 BASIC SOWING E 61 e Managing Conversion Loss Tables eene 63 e Creating and Editing Conversion Loss Tables sese 64 Mixer Settings In thi
365. of the missing keyword is assumed to be the value 1 Optional keywords are emphasized with square brackets EEUU RU N User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 168 R amp S FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements SS a Introduction Example Without a numeric suffix in the optional keyword SENSe FREQuency CENTer is the same as FREQuency CENTer With a numeric suffix in the optional keyword DISPlay WINDow lt 1 4 gt ZOOM STATe DISPlay ZOOM STATe ON enables the zoom in window 1 no suffix DISPlay WINDow4 ZOOM STATe ON enables the zoom in window 4 11 1 5 Alternative Keywords A vertical stroke indicates alternatives for a specific keyword You can use both keywords to the same effect Example SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution In the short form without optional Keywords BAND 1MHZ would have the same effect as BWID 1MHZ 11 1 6 SCPI Parameters Many commands feature one or more parameters If a command supports more than one parameter these are separated by a comma Example LAYout ADD WINDow Spectrum LEFT MTABle Parameters may have different forms of values e Numere Values ib a dene t eoi epe diea Cad eda Pe edd eaa DREES 169 TRO EE 170 e Ghasracter Data EE 171 e Ee EE D Le TT 171 e lee Eeselen ee 171 11 1 6 1 Numeric Values Numeric values can be entered in any form i e with sign decimal point or exponent In case of physical quantities
366. ollowing E User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 54 R amp S FSW K7 Configuration 5 4 1 5 4 1 1 Input and Frontend Settings e Select the Input Frontend button in the Analog Demodulation Overview e Select the INPUT OUTPUT key and then the Input Source Config or Power Sensor Config softkey E Te CEET 55 9 EE 80 Ee ten 85 9 TIGquelQy TEE 92 Input Source Settings The input source determines which data the R amp S FSW will analyze Input settings can be configured via the INPUT OUTPUT key in the Input dialog box Some settings are also available in the Amplitude tab of the Amplitude dialog box External mixers are not supported in MSRA mode e Radio Frequency IDE iore eher ER Cen eea dene br uaa sl Maa eh uia ade cea n 55 e External Mixer SeUlliga o 2 eee teiido ceret EEN EEN eR AERE teed 57 e Digital VO laput Settlfigg eura er re eh deg edad Ra te ql IRA 67 e Analog Baseband Input Settings 70 e III EET 72 e External Generator Control Settings credat cadere eben nu aber a Rn 73 Radio Frequency Input The default input source for the R amp S FSW is Radio Frequency i e the signal at the RF INPUT connector on the front panel of the R amp S FSW If no additional options are installed this is the only available input source n uen Input Source Power Sensor Probes Frequency External Input Coupling Mixer Impedance Digital I 9 Q High Pass Filter 1 3 GHz Analog YIG Preselector B
367. ollowing abbreviations are used throughout this manual R amp S9FSW is abbreviated as R amp S FSW R amp S9FSW K7 Contents Contents o c T 7 1 1 About this Manual cocer eene rtrnno centran ocean ak anra aaa Fan cu a n a a RB DR uaa a Rana D 7 1 2 Documentation Overview eeeseeeeeeeeenee nennen nnne nnn nan nien nnn nr nin innnnnr nani n nnns 8 1 3 Conventions Used in the Documentation esee 9 2 Welcome to the Analog Demodulation Application 11 2 1 Starting the Analog Demodulation Application eene 11 2 2 Understanding the Display Information eee 12 3 Measurements and Result Displays eene 15 3 4 Evaluation Methods for Analog Demodulation eene 15 4 Measurement Basics ccecceccuee cu ezcu eene tran nnne tnt na nkx a nk RR RR Ran RR RR a 26 4 1 Demodulation Process Circuit Description eeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeee 26 4 2 Demodulation Bandwidth essent 28 4 3 Sample Rate Measurement Time and Trigger Offset senes 29 LEE Wil n 31 LE ME ddllciee ER 31 4 6 Time Domain ZoOom erento EEGEN uuu En nes ck aua ane sk eau aa aae ENEE 32 4 7 Receiving Data Input and Provid
368. ommand DISPlay WINDowcn TRACe t STATe on page 265 User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 130 R amp S FSW K7 Analysis Trace Export Settings 6 2 Trace Export Settings Trace settings can be configured in the Traces dialog box or in the vertical Traces tab of the Analysis dialog box Switch to the Trace Data Export tab Traces Trace Data Export Copy Trace Export all Traces and all Table Results Indude Instrument Measurement Settings Export Trace to ASCII File Export all Traces and all Table Results ire ehh den n n ERI Ex AER 131 Include Instrument Measurement Settings ccs tanen iine 131 Trace to EXPO C 131 RE ET EE 132 Export Tace to ASCI EE 132 Export all Traces and all Table Results Selects all displayed traces and result tables e g Result Summary marker peak list etc in the current application for export to an ASCII file Alternatively you can select one specific trace only for export see Trace to Export Remote command FORMat DEXPort TRACes on page 285 Include Instrument Measurement Settings Includes additional instrument and measurement settings in the header of the export file for result data See chapter 11 7 5 Reference ASCII File Export Format on page 290 for details Remote command FORMat DEXPort HEADer on page 285 Trace to Export Defines an individual trace that will be exported to a file This se
369. on page 313 CALCulate LIMit k LOWer DATA on page 314 CALCulate LIMit k UPPer DATA on page 317 Insert Value Inserts a data point in the limit line above the selected one in the Edit Limit Line dialog box Delete Value Deletes the selected data point in the Edit Limit Line dialog box Shift x Shifts the x value of each data point horizontally by the defined shift width as opposed to an additive offset defined for the entire limit line see X Offset on page 147 Remote command CALCulate LIMit k CONTrol SHIFt on page 314 Shift y Shifts the y value of each data point vertically by the defined shift width as opposed to an additive offset defined for the entire limit line see Y Offset on page 147 Remote command CALCulate LIMit k LOWer SHIFt on page 316 CALCulate LIMit k UPPer SHIFt on page 318 Save Saves the currently edited limit line under the name defined in the Name field Zoom Functions The zoom functions are only available from the toolbar For details on the zoom functions see the R amp S FSW User Manual ERREUR EE MN User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 150 R amp S FSW K7 Analysis BREET Zoom Functions ele E EE 151 CGPS e TTT 151 Restore Onginal BI 151 Deactivaung ZOOM Selection mode eicere d e Ee Rate der Rada odds 151 Single Zoom ER A single zoom replaces the current diagram by a new diagram which displays an enlarged extract of the trace Th
370. onfigured for a specific evaluation The following table indicates which command syntax refers to which evaluation method as well as the output unit of the results Command syntax Evaluation method Output unit AM ABSolute TDOMain RF time domain dBm AM RELative TDOMain AM time domain 96 AM RELative AFSPectrum AM spectrum 96 FM TDOMain FM time domain kHz FM AFSPectrum FM spectrum kHz PM TDOMain PM time domain rad or PM AFSPectrum PM spectrum rad or SPECtrum RF spectrum dBm logarithmic display or V linear display Query parameters lt TraceMode gt WRITe AVERage MAXHold MINHold VIEW The specified trace mode must be one of those configured by SENS ADEM lt Evaluation gt TYPE see SENSe ADEMod SPECtrum TYPE on page 266 Otherwise a query error is gen erated Example ADEM AM AVER MAXH MINH Sets up RF time domain results to be measured INIT WAI Starts measurement and waits for sync FORM ASC Selects output format ADEM AM RES AVER Reads RF time domain average results ADEM AM RES MAXH Reads RF time domain max hold results ADEM AM RES MINH Reads RF time domain min hold results User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 282 R amp S FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements Retrieving Results FORMat DATA lt Format gt This command selects the data format that is use
371. or 75 Power range external generator Setup files external generator Supported external generator Generator type External gener tor iere 74 GPIB Address External generator eessesss 74 External generator sepurane reet ere 74 TTL synchronization External generator 74 H Handover frequency External Mixer B21 remote control 183 External Mixer B21 Hardware settings Displayed WE 13 Harmonics Conversion loss table B21 sssssse 66 External Mixer B21 remote control 184 185 Order External Mixer B21 Type External Mixer B21 High pass filter rump 113 High pass filter acm RF input Hold Trace Setting onere erret Ferrera 129 Hysteresis Lower Auto level sseem Trigger Trigger Power sensor m Upper Auto level seem UO data Export file binary data description 337 Export file parameter description 334 Exporting Exporting Importing Exporting remote esses 326 Importing Importing Exporting Importing remote AA 326 UO Power Trigger softkey EE 95 Trigger level remote seseesessesss 241 User Manua
372. or 285 FORMatDEXPott HEADET usisani erret etre Per e orte roe epa pa ye eor pete peperit d de Der re dh 285 FORMat DEXPort TbRACes sss ener teret rennes it nl etre s ensi nnns nnne nnne s ens r nne enn EAEE EEEn eneen 285 FORMat DATA e 283 lee nep v 270 IN Mite CON TIDUOS sciret e dr terere tesa reete do pr SY ree tere dee ea as e Eee sein RUE RA ege 271 INITiate REFResh INITiate SEQuencer ABORE csi cia icr rcc ee dn eint ri cest ire Edu eA eae eee ex E exe ea 272 INITiate SEQuencer IMMexdialto 2 2 trcs ueterum eth aa ERR Rp i aada aada Eed 272 NEE ele ee RE 272 INI Tiate SEQuericer REF Resh ALL cesses noe rentrer e eu ea dE 273 p Y User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 341 R amp S FSW K7 List of Remote Commands AnalogDemod a_a aU INITTatel IMMedatel 271 INPut AT LentatiOn 3 5 retire etr Een ere EE E caine ieee dre eese edit etin 228 INPuUt AT Ten ation AU TO iter roce thee doe an aaan a sek ek ak e en Fe SER S NE e sea Pee ei EE 229 INPut ATTenuation PROTection RESet AE 177 INPUR CON ECH c 178 INPUECOU PIG e 178 INPUEDIQ C DEV CO p 197 INPut DIQ RANG
373. or a detailed description see chapter B I Q Data File Format iq tar on page 333 e linpormt EXport FUICHOFS eeere erento iiiter ten onte aa Ree aAa KR NEE 152 e How to Export and Import UO Data 153 Import Export Functions The following import and export functions are available via softkeys in the Save Recall menu which is displayed when you select the Save or Open icon in the toolbar For a description of the other functions in the Save Recall menu see the R amp S FSW User Qs Manual c jp MM Deeg eege ENEE enee 152 L Export Trace to ASCII Elle 153 L Trace Export Confourston entente tette tn tntntn tn tea 153 LE oio MENOR NT 153 iudicio HMM M E 153 E IOMPO ANE 153 Export Opens a submenu to configure data export UUU User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 152 R amp S9FSW K7 I Q Data Import and Export 7 2 0 How to Export and Import I Q Data Export Trace to ASCII File Export Opens a file selection dialog box and saves the selected trace in ASCII format dat to the specified file and directory The results are output in the same order as they are displayed on the screen window by window trace by trace and table row by table row For details on the file format see chapter 11 7 5 Reference ASCII File Export Format on page 290 Remote command MMEMory STORe lt n gt TRACe on page 284 Trace Export Configuration Export Opens the Traces dialog box to configure the trac
374. or the hardware settings The normalized trace 0 dB directly after calibration is displayed on this reference line indicated by a red line in the diagram If you shift the reference line the normalized trace is shifted as well Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe RPOSition on page 218 Reference Value Defines the reference value to be displayed at the specified Result Frequency Start This setting can be used to shift the reference line and thus the normalized trace similar to the Shifting the Display Offset defined in the Amplitude settings shifts the reference level in the display Shifting the normalized trace is useful for example to reflect an attenuation or gain caused by the measured DUT If you then zoom into the diagram around the normalized trace the measured trace still remains fully visible Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe RVALue on page 219 5 4 2 Power Sensor The R amp S FSW can also analyze data from a connected power sensor For background information on working with power sensors see the R amp S FSW User Manual 5 4 2 1 Power Sensor Settings Power sensor settings are available in the Power Sensor tab of the Input dialog box Each sensor is configured on a separate tab User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 80 R amp S FSW K7 Configuration Input and Frontend Settings Input Source Power Sensor State SEED ee off Continuous Update
375. ordinate system x1 0 y1 0 2 end point of system x2 100 y2 100 3 zoom area e g x1 60 y1 30 x2 80 y2 75 Suffix lt zoom gt 1 4 Selects the zoom window E User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 323 R amp S9FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements 11 8 4 Analyzing Results Parameters lt x1 gt lt y1 gt Diagram coordinates in of the complete diagram that define the lt x2 gt lt y2 gt zoom area The lower left corner is the origin of coordinate system The upper right corner is the end point of the system Range 0 to 100 Default unit PCT Manual operation See Multiple Zoom on page 151 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM MULTiple lt zoom gt STATe State This command turns the mutliple zoom on and off Suffix lt zoom gt 1 4 Selects the zoom window If you turn off one of the zoom windows all subsequent zoom win dows move up one position Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Manual operation See Multiple Zoom on page 151 See Restore Original Display on page 151 See Deactivating Zoom Selection mode on page 151 Configuring an Analysis Interval and Line MSRA mode only In MSRA operating mode only the MSRA Master actually captures data the MSRA applications define an extract of the captured data for analysis referred to as the analysis interval The analysis line is a common time marker for all MSRA applications For the Analog
376. ote that the variable INPUT OUTPUT connectors ports 2 3 must be set for use as input using the OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt DIRection command Suffix lt port gt 11213 Selects the trigger port 1 trigger port 1 TRIGGER INPUT connector on front panel 2 trigger port 2 TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connector on front panel 3 trigger port 3 TRIGGER3 INPUT OUTPUT connector on rear panel Parameters lt TriggerLevel gt Range 0 5V to 3 5V RST 1 4V Example TRIG LEV 2V Manual operation See Trigger Level on page 98 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel IF Power lt TriggerLevel gt This command defines the power level at the third intermediate frequency that must be exceeded to cause a trigger event Note that any RF attenuation or preamplification is considered when the trigger level is analyzed If defined a reference level offset is also considered DU User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 240 R amp S FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements REESEN Configuring the Measurement For compatibility reasons this command is also available for the baseband power trig ger source when using the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 Parameters lt TriggerLevel gt For details on available trigger levels and trigger bandwidths see the data sheet RST 10 dBm Example TRIG LEV IFP 30DBM Manual operation See Trigger Level on page 98 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel IQPower lt TriggerLevel gt This co
377. ottom right The result is a comma separated list of values for each window with the syntax lt WindowName_1 gt lt Windowlndex_1 gt lt WindowName_n gt lt Windowlndex_n gt Return values lt WindowName gt string Name of the window In the default state the name of the window is its index Windowlndex numeric value Index of the window Example LAY CAT Result Ut AUI VU Two windows are displayed named 2 at the top or left and 1 at the bottom or right Usage Query only LAYout IDENtify WINDow lt WindowName gt This command queries the index of a particular display window Note to query the name of a particular window use the LAYout WINDow lt n gt IDENtify query Query parameters lt WindowName gt String containing the name of a window SS User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 277 R amp S FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements SS eS a ee ee ee Configuring the Result Display Return values lt WindowIndex gt Index number of the window Usage Query only LAYout REMove WINDow lt WindowName gt This command removes a window from the display Parameters lt WindowName gt String containing the name of the window In the default state the name of the window is its index Usage Event LAYout REPLace WINDow lt WindowName gt lt WindowT ype gt This command replaces the window type for example from Diagram to Result Sum mary of an already
378. ount gt If you set a sweep count of 0 or 1 the R amp S FSW performs one single sweep in single sweep mode In continuous sweep mode if the sweep count is set to 0 a moving average over 10 sweeps is performed Range 0 to 200000 RST 0 Example SWE COUN 64 Sets the number of sweeps to 64 INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode INIT WAI Starts a sweep and waits for its end Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Sweep Average Count on page 105 SENSe SWEep POINts lt SweepPoints gt This command defines the number of measurement points analyzed during a sweep Parameters lt SweepPoints gt Range 101 to 32001 RST 1001 Example SWE POIN 251 Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Sweep Points on page 105 Triggering The following remote commands are required to configure a triggered measurement in a remote environment More details are described for manual operation in chapter 5 5 Trigger Configuration on page 93 p HM User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 237 R amp S FSW K7 0 11 4 7 1 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements Configuring the Measurement OPC should be used after requesting data This will hold off any subsequent changes to the selected trigger source until after the sweep is completed and the data is returned
379. ow lt n gt ADD lt Direction gt lt WindowType gt This command adds a measurement window to the display Note that with this command the suffix lt n gt determines the existing window next to which the new window is added as opposed to LAYout ADD WINDow for which the existing window is defined by a parameter To replace an existing window use the LAYout WINDow lt n gt REPLace command This command is always used as a query so that you immediately obtain the name of the new window as a result Parameters Direction LEFT RIGHt ABOVe BELow lt WindowType gt Type of measurement window you want to add See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 276 for a list of available window types Return values lt NewWindowName gt When adding a new window the command returns its name by default the same as its number as a result Example LAY WIND1 ADD LEFT MTAB Result 2 Adds a new window named 2 with a marker table to the left of window 1 Usage Query only LAYout WINDow lt n gt IDENtify This command queries the name of a particular display window indicated by the lt n gt suffix Note to query the index of a particular window use the LAYout IDENtify WINDow command Return values lt WindowName gt String containing the name of a window In the default state the name of the window is its index Usage Query only LAY out WINDow lt n gt REMove This command removes the window
380. ow using the Close icon the window is mini mized not closed If you select the File gt Exit menu item in the R amp S DiglConf window the application is closed Note that in this case the settings are lost and the EX IQ BOX functionality is no longer available until you restart the application using the DiglConf softkey in the R amp S FSW once again RETE RU MTN User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 69 R amp S FSW K7 Configuration 8 BE Input and Frontend Settings 5 4 1 4 Analog Baseband Input Settings The following settings and functions are available to provide input via the Analog Base band Interface R amp S FSW B71 in the applications that support it They can be configured via the INPUT OUTPUT key in the Input dialog box TIE p D v id 4 K Ban e IL I x Input Source Power Sensor Frequency Input Settings External I Mod Mixer Q Mode Input Config Digital IQ Swap 1 Q Analog Baseband Signal Path Center Frequency CF P For more information on the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 see the R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input User Manual Analog Baseband Input State lcu cuin ce cere erkannt nnno caa 70 felt E 70 DEU ett e O e ner ee 71 S LE 71 Biter E EE 71 Analog Baseband Input State Enables or disable the use of the Analog Baseband input source for measurements Analog Baseband is only available if the Analog Baseban
381. ower sensor sse 82 Deemphasis filter Deviation E Deviation scaling sees 116 External generator med EEN 82 Ixemote control 5 mienne enne 225 Settings Mr Frequency converting measurements External generator A 43 Frequency coupling Automatic external generator ssssss External generator Reverse sweep external generator TTL synchronization external generator 44 Frequency denominator External generator A 77 Frequency numerator External generator A 77 Frequency offset External generator esses 43 77 Frequency range Calibration sweep external generator 44 77 Frontend settings siririna a ani a 54 FRQ External generator A 45 Fullscale level Analog Baseband B71 remote control 194 195 Analog Baseband D 91 Full scale level Digital e TTT 68 Digital UO remote eene 198 Unit digital UO remote essseeess 199 G Generator Frequencies external generator 43 77 Frequency coupling external generator 76 Frequency offset external generator 76 Output power external generator 76 Generators Frequency range external generat
382. p S FSW adjusts the scaling of the y axis accordingly For measurements with the external generator R amp S FSW B10 the command defines the position of the reference value User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 218 R amp S FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements REESEN Configuring the Measurement Parameters lt Position gt RST 100 PCT AF spectrum display 50 PCT time dis play Example DISP TRAC Y RPOS 50PCT Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Reference Position on page 79 See Reference Value Position on page 116 See Ref Level Position on page 118 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe RVALue Value The command defines the power value assigned to the reference position in the grid For external generator calibration measurements requires External Generator Control option R amp S FSW B10 this command defines the power offset value assigned to the reference position Parameters lt Value gt RST 0 dBm coupled to reference level Example DISP TRAC Y RVAL 20dBm Sets the power value assigned to the reference position to 20 dBm Manual operation See Reference Value on page 80 SENSe CORRection COLLect ACQuire lt MeasType gt This command initiates a reference measurement calibration The reference measure ment is the basis for the measurement normalization The result depends on whether a reflection measurement or transmission measurement is performed see SENS
383. ple with the magnitude 1 This command is only available if the optional Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 is installed Parameters Level numeric value Range 1 UV to 7 071 V RST 1V Manual operation See Full Scale Level on page 68 IECH User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 198 R amp S9FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements 11 4 2 5 Configuring the Measurement INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer UNIT Unit Defines the unit of the full scale level see Full Scale Level on page 68 The availability of units depends on the measurement application you are using This command is only available if the optional Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 is installed Parameters Level VOLT DBM DBPW WATT DBMV DBUV DBUA AMPere RST Volt Manual operation See Full Scale Level on page 68 INPut DIQ SRATe lt SampleRate gt This command specifies or queries the sample rate of the input signal from the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 see Input Sample Rate on page 68 Parameters lt SampleRate gt Range 1 Hz to 10 GHz RST 32 MHz Example INP DIQ SRAT 200 MHz Manual operation See Input Sample Rate on page 68 INPut DIQ SRATe AUTO lt State gt If enabled the sample rate of the digital UO input signal is set automatically by the con nected device This command is only available if the optional Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW
384. power sensor Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters lt Level gt 20 to 20 dBm Range 20 dBm to 20 dBm RST 10 dBm Example PMET2 TRIG LEV 10 dBm Sets the level of the trigger Manual operation See Using the power sensor as an external trigger on page 84 See External Trigger Level on page 84 SENSe PMETer lt p gt TRIGger SLOPe Edge This command selects the trigger condition for external power triggers Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters lt Edge gt POSitive The measurement starts in case the trigger signal shows a positive edge NEGative The measurement starts in case the trigger signal shows a nega tive edge RST POSitive Example PMET2 TRIG SLOP NEG Manual operation See Using the power sensor as an external trigger on page 84 See Slope on page 85 SENSe PMETer lt p gt TRIGger STATe State This command turns the external power trigger on and off This command requires the use of an R amp S NRP Z81 power sensor Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index ES User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 212 R amp S9FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements 11 4 2 7 Configuring the Measurement Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example PMET2 TRIG ON Switches the external power trigger on Manual operation See Using the power sensor as an external trigger on page 84 External Generator Control
385. put from the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 or from the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 For analog baseband input an impedance of 50 Q is always used Remote command INPut IMPedance on page 179 Amplitude Settings for Analog Baseband Input The following settings and functions are available to define amplitude settings for input via the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 in the applications that support it They can be configured via the AMPT key or in the Amplitude tab of the Input dialog box E N User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 89 R amp S FSW K7 Configuration Input and Frontend Settings Input Source PowerSensor Amplitude Frequency Reference Level Input Settings Value 0 0 dBm I Q Mode tour Offset 0 0 dB Input Config Auto Level Swap I Q Off Fullscale Level Mode Value 0 25 V Peak The input settings provided here are identical to those in the Input Source gt Analog Baseband tab see chapter 5 4 1 4 Analog Baseband Input Settings on page 70 For more information on the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 see the R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input User Manual Reference Level pP 90 L Shifting the Display Offset 91 L Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level 91 Fullscale Level Mode JV GING ENEE AER E 91 Reference Level Defines the expected maximum reference level Signal levels above this value may not be measured correc
386. r Elia S xzy xml of iq tar file Saved by FSV IQ Analyzer Comment Here is a comment Date amp Time 2011 03 03 14 33 05 Sample rate 6 5 MHz Number of samples 65000 Duration of signal 10 ms Data format complex float32 Data filename xzy complex 1ch float32 Scaling factor 1v Comment Channel 1 of 1 Power vs time y axis 10 dB div x axis 1 ms div Spectrum y axis 20 dB div x axis 500 kHz div E mail info rohde schwarz com Internet http Awww rohde schwarz com Fileformat version 1 R amp S FSW K7 How to Perform Measurements in the Analog Demodulation Application 8 How to Perform Measurements in the Analog Demodulation Application The following step by step instructions demonstrate how to perform an Analog Demod ulation measurement with the R amp S FSW K7 option 1 Press the MODE key on the front panel and select the Analog Demod application 2 Select the Overview softkey to display the Overview for an Analog Demodulation measurement 3 Select the Input Frontend button and then the Frequency tab to define the input signal s center frequency 4 Select the Data Acquisition button and define the bandwidth parameters for the input signal Note in MSRA mode define the analysis interval using the same sett
387. ration BREET Demodulation This function is only available for evaluations in the time domain Tip In addition to the Time Domain Zoom a graphical zoom is available for all diagram evaluations However the graphical zoom is useful only if more measured values than trace points are available The time span represented by each measurement point remains the same For details see chapter 6 8 Zoom Functions on page 150 State Time Domain Zoom Activates or deactivates the time domain zoom mode ON Activates the time domain zoom OFF Deactivates the time domain zoom and restores the original display If more measured values than measurement points are available several measured values are combined in one measurement point according to the method of the selected trace detector Remote command SENSe ADEMod n ZOOM STATe on page 251 Start Time Domain Zoom Defines the start time for the time domain zoom area For spectrum evaluations the start time is always O Remote command SENSe ADEMod lt n gt ZOOM STARt on page 251 Length Time Domain Zoom Defines the length of the time domain zoom area Enter the length as a time value man ually or use the Auto setting to set the length to the current number of sweep points automatically Remote command SENSe ADEMod lt n gt ZOOM LENGth on page 250 SENSe ADEMod lt n gt ZOOM LENGth MODE on page 250 Time per Divis
388. rator Reverse sweep The frequency offset for automatic coupling can be used to sweep in the reverse direction To do so define a negative offset in the external generator measurement configuration Note that the frequency is defined as the unsigned value of the equation thus a negative frequency is not possible Example Example for reverse sweep Fanalyzerstat 100 MHz F analyzerStop 200 MHz Forse 300 MHz Numerator Denominator 1 gt F GeneratorStart 200 MHz gt F Generatorstop 100 MHz If the offset is adjusted so that the sweep of the generator crosses the minimum generator frequency a message is displayed in the status bar Reverse Sweep via min Ext Gen erator Frequency Example Example for reverse sweep via minimum frequency Fanalyzerstart 100 MHz FanalyzerStop 200 MHz Fotiset 150 MHz F min 20 MHz Numerator Denominator 1 gt F Generatorstart 90 MHz gt F GeneratorStop 50 MHz via Fmin Displayed Information and Errors Channel bar If external generator control is active some additional information is displayed in the channel bar Label Description EXT TG lt source power gt External generator active signal sent with lt source power gt level LVL Power Offset see Source Offset on page 76 ERREUR RA a User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 45 R amp S9FSW K7 Measurement Basics Receiving Data Input and Providing Data Output Label Description
389. rding to the current input data MANual The R amp S FSW uses the measurement length defined by SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation on page 261 RST AUTO Manual operation See Resetting the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Auto on page 126 See Changing the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Manual on page 126 SENSe ADJust FREQuency This command sets the center frequency to the highest signal level in the current fre quency range Example ADJ FREQ Usage Event Manual operation See Adjusting the Center Frequency Automatically Auto Freq on page 125 p we User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 261 R amp S FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements REESEN Configuring the Measurement SENSe JADJust CONFigure HYSTeresis LOWer Threshold When the reference level is adjusted automatically using the SENSe ADJust LEVel on page 262 command the internal attenuators and the preamplifier are also adjusted In order to avoid frequent adaptation due to small changes in the input signal you can define a hysteresis This setting defines a lower threshold the signal must fall below compared to the last measurement before the reference level is adapted auto matically Parameters Threshold Range O0 dB to 200 dB RST 1dB Default unit dB Exampl
390. rement time Trigger offset width Min Max Min Max 160 MHz 9 640 MHz 1 5625 ns 2 5 ms 2 5 ms 0 32768 s 80 MHz 320 MHz 3 125 ns 5ms 5 ms 0 65536 s 40 MHz 160 MHz 6 25 ns 10 ms 10 ms 1 310719993 s 28 MHz 112 MHz 8 929 ns 14 28 ms 14 28 1 872457134 s 18 MHz 72 MHz 13 88 ns 22 22 ms 22 22 ms 2 912711097 s 10 MHz 40 MHz 25 ns 40 ms 40 ms 5 242879975 s 8 MHz 32 MHz 31 25 ns 50 ms 50 ms 6 553599969 s 5 MHz 12 MHz 83 33 ns 133 3 ms 80 ms 10 48575995 s 3 MHz 10 666 MHz 93 75 ns 150 ms 133 3 ms 17 47626667 s 1 6 MHz 6 4 MHz 156 25 ns 250 ms 250 ms 32 76799984 s 800 kHz 3 2 MHz 312 5 ns 5 ms 5 ms 65 53599969 s 400 kHz 1 6 MHz 625 ns 1s 1s 131 0719994 s 200 kHz 800 kHz 1 25 us 2s 2s 262 1439988 s 100 kHz 400 kHz 2 5 us 4s 4s 524 2879975 s 50 kHz 200 kHz 5us 8s 8 s 1048 575995 s 25 kHz 100 kHz 10 us 16s 16 s 2097 15199 s 12 5 kHz 50 kHz 20 us 32s 32s 4194 30398 s 6 4 kHz 25 6 kHz 39 0625 us 62 5s 62 5s 8191 999961 s 3 2 kHz 12 8 kHz 78 125 us 125s 125s 16383 99992 s 1 6 kHz 6 4 kHz 156 25 us 250s 250s 32767 99984 s 800 Hz 3 2 kHz 312 5 us 500 s 500 s 65535 99969 s Gaussian filter curve is limited by UO bandwidth only available with option B160 9 only available with option B320 RERUM RIO LEO E ET SS SSS User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 30 R amp S9FSW K7 Measurement Basics 4 4 4 5 AF Triggers Demod band Sample rate Measurement time Trigger offset width Min Max Min Max 400 Hz
391. rence Level value ignores the Reference Level Offset It is important to know the actual power level the R amp S FSW must handle To determine the required offset consider the external attenuation or gain applied to the input signal A positive value indicates that an attenuation took place R amp S FSW increa ses the displayed power values a negative value indicates an external gain R amp S FSW decreases the displayed power values The setting range is 200 dB in 0 01 dB steps Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet on page 228 Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level Reference Level Automatically determines the optimal reference level for the current input data At the same time the internal attenuators and the preamplifier for analog baseband input the fullscale level are adjusted so the signal to noise ratio is optimized while signal com pression clipping and overload conditions are minimized In order to do so a level measurement is performed to determine the optimal reference level You can change the measurement time for the level measurement if necessary see Changing the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Manual on page 126 Remote command SENSe ADJust LEVel on page 262 Fullscale Level Mode Value The fullscale level defines the maximum power you can input at the Baseband Input connector without clipping the signal The fullscale level ca
392. rface Configuration Source Calibration Calibrate Transmission nennen nennen nnnm nennen nnne nnns 78 Calibrate Reflection SIE cede sacks re Red ett n Ecce eden Ea ANO cuan Y deg adt vende rush 78 Calibrate Reflection Opee oce re nre nr rune nt La eds eere aret c rr on eb aree e edu 79 Source Calibration Nortmalize uentis tr irr ea cun e darin eq eden aa ea aon d n mu ran ern ea eha ans 79 aiv mI rm 79 Save AS RE e EE 79 Reference Le DEE 79 Reference Value etecudin cen bmw Eden eec divo dev bea cw oce EE E tad dra a RNV M CE CE UD 80 Calibrate Transmission Starts a transmission type measurement to determine a reference trace This trace is used to calculate the difference for the normalized values For details see chapter 4 7 4 4 Calibration Mechanism on page 40 Remote command SENSe CORRection METHod on page 220 Calibrate Reflection Short Starts a short circuit reflection type measurement to determine a reference trace for cal ibration If both calibrations open circuit short circuit are carried out the calibration trace is cal culated by averaging the two measurements The order of the two calibration measure ments is irrelevant Remote command SENSe CORRection METHod on page 220 Selects the reflection method SENSe CORRection COLLect ACQuire on page 219 Starts the sweep for short circuit calibration User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 78 R amp S FSW K7 Configuration
393. rigger button In this case further parameters are available for the output signal Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt OTYPe on page 247 Level Output Type Trigger 2 3 Defines whether a constant high 1 or low 0 signal is sent to the output connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel on page 246 Pulse Length Output Type Trigger 2 3 Defines the length of the pulse sent as a trigger to the output connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt PULSe LENGth on page 247 Send Trigger Output Type Trigger 2 3 Sends a user defined trigger to the output connector immediately Note that the trigger pulse level is always opposite to the constant signal level defined by the output Level setting e g for Level High a constant high signal is output to the connector until the Send Trigger button is selected Then a low pulse is sent Which pulse level will be sent is indicated by a graphic on the button Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt PULSe IMMediate on page 247 D User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 122 R amp S FSW K7 Configuration Output Settings 5 9 2 Analog Demodulation Output Settings The demodulated signal in time domain results can be output to the IF VIDEO DEMOD output connector on the rear panel of the R amp S FSW o Output is not possible if the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 is active The following settings an
394. riggered due to a sweep start Device Triggered or when the R amp S FSW is ready to receive a trigger signal after a sweep start Trigger Armed Manual triggering If the trigger output signal is initiated manually the length and level high low of the trigger pulse is also user definable Note however that the trigger pulse level is always opposite to the constant signal level defined by the output Level setting e g for Level High a constant high signal is output to the connector until the Send Trigger button is selected Then a low pulse is sent SS User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 47 R amp S FSW K7 Measurement Basics Analog Demodulation in MSRA Operating Mode o Providing trigger signals as output is described in detail in the R amp S FSW User Manual 4 8 Analog Demodulation in MSRA Operating Mode The Analog Demodulation application can also be used to analyze data in MSRA oper ating mode Only the MSRA Master channel captures data in MSRA mode Note that the data acquisition settings for an Analog Demodulation application channel in MSRA mode configure the analysis interval not an actual data capture from the input signal Analysis line A frequent question when analyzing multi standard radio signals is how each data chan nelis correlated in time to others Thus an analysis line has been introduced in firmware version 1 60 The analysis line is a common time marker for all MSRA applications It
395. rithmic scaling the values are averaged in dBm For linear scaling the behavior is the same as with linear averaging Power Activates linear power averaging The power level values are converted into unit Watt prior to averaging After the averaging the data is converted back into its original unit Use this mode to average power values in Volts or Amperes correctly Remote command SENSe AVERage lt n gt TYPE on page 267 Average Count Determines the number of averaging or maximum search procedures If the trace modes Average Max Hold or Min Hold are set In continuous sweep mode if sweep count 0 default averaging is performed over 10 sweeps For sweep count 1 no averaging maxhold or minhold operations are per formed Remote command SENSe AVERage COUNt on page 267 Predefined Trace Settings Quick Config Commonly required trace settings have been predefined and can be applied very quickly by selecting the appropriate button Function Trace Settings Preset All Traces Trace 1 Clear Write Traces 2 6 Blank Set Trace Mode Trace 1 Max Hold Max Avg Min Trace 2 Average Trace 3 Min Hold Traces 4 6 Blank Set Trace Mode Trace 1 Max Hold Max Ee CIR Trace 2 Clear Write Trace 3 Min Hold Traces 4 6 Blank Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 Softkeys Displays the Traces settings and focuses the Mode list for the selected trace Remote c
396. robe signals that are redirected to the RF input path can also be analyzed in the Spectrum application of the R amp S FSW base unit Then you can perform RF measurements measurements in the time or frequency domain on the input from a probe Microbutton action You can define an action to be performed by the R amp S FSW when the probe s microbutton if available is pressed Currently a single data acquisition via the probe can be per formed simply by pressing the microbutton Impedance and attenuation The measured signal from the probe is attenuated internally by the probe s specific attenuation For probe signals that are redirected to the RF path the attenuation is com pensated using a transducer see Frequency sweep measurements on probe input on page 34 The reference level is adjusted automatically For analog baseband input the attenuation is compensated without a transducer In this case higher levels are available for the fullscale level A fixed impedance of 50 O is used for all probes to convert voltage values to power levels Basics on External Generator Control Some background knowledge on basic terms and principles used for external generator control is provided here for a better understanding of the required configuration settings ERREUR EA M User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 35 R amp S FSW K7 0 4 7 4 1 Measurement Basics Receiving Data Input and Providing Data Output External generator cont
397. rol is only available in the Spectrum I Q Analyzer and Analog Demodulation applications e External Generator Connections ccccccccccecececcececeesessseesseecesesececeeessesasauauaeagages 36 e Overview of Generators Supported by the R amp S FSW B10 Option 38 e Generator Setup Eiles enne nennen nennen nsns nsn sn aiiis nian 39 e Calibration Mechials Imm ee tete aaa deo aeuo asc neca cha e ed goo nude ees 40 Cat Fe igs ODER occasio revue ee Date 40 e Reference Trace Reference Line and Reference Level 42 e Coupling the Frequencies ccccccscccecceceeeeeeeeeeeeee eee eadseaaesseeeaaaeaaeeaneaeeeeeneeeees 43 Displayed Information and EFITO S uecereie deerit ace cer db Irene rade ee Eee Ce EE eee d 45 External Generator Connections The external generator is controlled either via a LAN connection or via the EXT GEN CONTROL GPIB interface of the R amp S FSW supplied with the R amp S FSW B10 option For more information on configuring interfaces see the Remote Control Interfaces and Protocols section in the R amp S FSW User Manual TTL synchronization In addition TTL synchronization can be used with some Rohde amp Schwarz generators connected via GPIB The TTL interface is included in the AUX CONTROL connector of the R amp S FSW B10 option Using the TTL interface allows for considerably higher measurement rates than pure GPIB control because the frequency stepping of the R
398. rom the controlled external generator including the inherent distortions can be used as a reference trace to cali brate the measurement setup The inherent frequency and power level distortions can be determined by connecting the R amp S FSW to the signal generator The R amp S FSW sends a predefined list of frequencies to the signal generator see also chapter 4 7 4 7 Coupling the Frequencies on page 43 The signal generator then sends a signal with the specified level at each frequency in the predefined list The R amp S FSW measures the signal and determines the level offsets to the expected values Saving calibration results A reference dataset for the calibration results is stored internally as a table of value pairs frequency level one for each sweep point The measured offsets can then be used as calibration factors for subsequent measurement results The calibration can be performed using either transmission or reflection measurements The selected type of measurement used to determine the reference trace is included in the reference dataset Normalization Once the measurement setup has been calibrated and the reference trace is available subsequent measurement results can be corrected according to the calibration factors if necessary This is done by subtracting the reference trace from the measurement results This process is referred to as normalization and can be activated or deactivated LEE User Manual 1173 924
399. rs off Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt LINK State This command links delta marker lt m gt to marker 1 If you change the horizontal position x value of marker 1 delta marker lt m gt changes its horizontal position to the same value Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC DELT2 LINK ON Manual operation See Linking to Another Marker on page 134 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m1 gt LINK TO MARKer lt m2 gt lt State gt This command links delta marker lt m1 gt to any active normal marker m2 If you change the horizontal position of marker lt m2 gt delta marker lt m1 gt changes its horizontal position to the same value Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC DELT4 LINK TO MARK2 ON Links the delta marker 4 to the marker 2 Manual operation See Linking to Another Marker on page 134 LEE User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 295 R amp S FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements AMEN O E L Analyzing Results CALCulate n DELTamarker MODE Mode This command selects the delta marker mode Parameters Mode ABSolute Delta marker position in absolute terms RELative Delta marker position in relation to a reference marker RST RELative Example CALC DELT MODE ABS Absolute delt
400. s To store the bias setting in the currently selected conversion loss table select the Write to lt CVL table name gt button Remote command SENSe MIXer BIAS LOW on page 181 SENSe MIXer BIAS HIGH On page 181 User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 62 R amp S FSW K7 Configuration a a 8S SS SS SSS HU Pewr Input and Frontend Settings Write to lt CVL table name gt Bias Settings Stores the bias setting in the currently selected Conversion loss table for the range see Managing Conversion Loss Tables on page 63 If no conversion loss table is selected yet this function is not available CVL Table not selected Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL BIAS on page 188 Managing Conversion Loss Tables In this tab you configure and manage conversion loss tables Conversion loss tables consist of value pairs that describe the correction values for conversion loss at certain frequencies The correction values for frequencies between the reference points are obtained via interpolation The currently selected table for each range is displayed at the top of the dialog box All conversion loss tables found in the instrument s C r_s instr user cvl directory Frequency Basic Settings Mixer Settings Conversion Loss Table External Mixer Digital IQ TE TEE 63 isa VA ET EE 64 Delte INNEREN EM 64 Import erp E 64 New Table Opens the Edit Conversion loss table dialog box to configure a new con
401. s can be avoided using correct con figuration settings The measurement is performed using the following devices e An R amp S FSW with application firmware R amp S FSW K7 Analog Demodulation e A vector signal generator e g R amp S SMU Test setup Signal generator settings e g R amp S SMU Frequency 500 MHz Level 10 dBm Modulation FM Modulation frequency 10 kHz Frequency deviation 50 kHz Procedure 1 Preset the R amp S FSW 2 Set the center frequency to 500 MHz 3 Set the reference level to 0 dBm 4 Select the MODE key and then the Analog Demod button By default the FM Time Domain result display and a Result Summary are shown LEE User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 158 R amp S FSW K7 Measurement Example Demodulating an FM Signal MultiView Analog Demod Ref Level Att 3 req 500 0 MHz CF 500 0 MHz 4 Result Summary Carrier Power 10 32 dBm carrier Offset 38 03 kHz Peak K Epl RMS lod Freq FM 51 433 kHz 38 157 kHz 44 795 kHz 33 595 kHz Fig 9 1 Default Analog Demodulation measurement result display 5 Setthe measurement time AQT to 1 ms in order to measure 10 periods of the signal 6 Adjust the y axis scaling to the measured frequency deviation automatically by selecting the Scale Config softkey and in the Scaling tab setting AF Auto Scale to ON MultiView SS Spectrum Analog Demod Ref Level 0 00 dBm Att 10dB AQT 10ms DBW 5MHz Freq 5
402. s can be edited or duplicated for varying measurement setups or other instruments The existing setup files can be displayed in an editor in read only mode directly from the External Generator configuration dialog box They must be saved under a different name using File SaveAs To add a new generator to the selection list in the Interface Configuration edit the setup file for an existing generator as required then save the file with the extension gen After you close the configuration dialog and re open it the new generator is available in the Generator Type list with the name of the saved setup file Be careful however to adhere to the required syntax and commands only change the values of the parameters Errors will only be detected and displayed when you try to use the new generator see also chapter 4 7 4 8 Displayed Information and Errors on page 45 Calibration Mechanism A common measurement setup includes a signal generator a device under test DUT and a signal and spectrum analyzer Therefore it is useful to measure the attenuation or gain caused by the cables and connectors from the signal generator and the signal ana lyzer in advance The known level offsets can then be removed from the measurement results in order to obtain accurate information on the DUT Calculating the difference between the currently measured power and a reference trace is referred to as calibration Thus the measurement results f
403. s for Analog Demodulation Measurements a SS ee a ee Configuring the Measurement Parameters lt State gt ON The automatic reset is off OFF The automatic reset is on RST OFF Example DISP WIND TRAC3 MODE HCON ON Switches off the reset function Manual operation See Hold on page 129 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt SELect This command selects the trace specified by the index lt t gt in the window specified by the index lt n gt Only traces that are active in the specified result display can be selected The selected trace is used to determine the Result Summary for the corresponding result display see Result Summary on page 23 The query returns the number of the currently selected trace in the window specified by the index lt n gt trace index is ignored Traces can only be queried for graphical result displays not Result Summary Marker Table or Peak Marker List Return values lt TraceNo gt Number of the currently selected trace Example DISP TRAC3 SEL Usage SCPI confirmed DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt STATe State This command turns a trace on and off The measurement continues in the background Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 for TRACe1 0 for TRACe 2 to 6 Example DISP TRAC3 ON Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 Softkeys on page 130 SENSe JADEMod AM ABSolute TDOMain TYPE SENSe JADEMod A
404. s suitable for the transmission of large amounts of data The ASCII character introduces the data block The next number indicates how many of the following digits describe the length of the data block In the example the 4 following digits indicate the length to be 5168 bytes The data bytes follow During the transmission of these data bytes all end or other control signs are ignored until all bytes are transmitted 0 specifies a data block of indefinite length The use of the indefinite format requires a NL END message to terminate the data block This format is useful when the length of the transmission is not known or if speed or other considerations prevent segmentation of the data into blocks of definite length 11 2 Common Suffixes In the Analog Demodulation application the following common suffixes are used in remote commands Suffix Value range Description lt k gt 1 8 Limit line m 1 16 Marker I User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 171 R amp S FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements RAE SS a ee a ee a Activating Analog Demodulation Measurements Suffix Value range Description lt n gt 1 6 Window or Evaluation lt t gt 1 6 Trace 11 3 Activating Analog Demodulation Measurements Analog demodulation measurements require a special application on the R amp S FSW The measurement is started immediately with the default settings INSTrument GREate DUP
405. s tab you configure the band and specific mixer settings User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 57 R amp S FSW K7 Configuration Input and Frontend Settings Frequency Basic Settings Mixer Settings Conversion Loss Table External Mixer Band Settings Mixer Type RF Start Digital IQ RF Stop Handover Freq Band Le RF Overrange Mixer Settings Harmonic Type Range Harmonic Order Conversion Loss CEND D Ca Ee E 59 Frost BANG Ems 59 MIKO KT 59 Mixer Settings Harmonics Confouratton esses 59 E 0 EE 60 M n ANNE 60 M ue Ea D NNI OO 60 Ld D SPSS Less nde ib eege geehrt 60 External Mixer State Activates or deactivates the external mixer for input If activated ExtMix is indicated in the channel bar of the application together with the used band see Band on page 59 Remote command SENSe MIXer STATe on page 180 RF Start RF Stop Displays the start and stop frequency of the selected band read only The frequency range for the user defined band is defined via the harmonics configuration see Range 1 2 on page 60 For details on available frequency ranges see table 11 2 Remote command SENSe MIXer FREQuency STARt on page 183 SENSe MIXer FREQuency STOP on page 183 User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 58 R amp S FSW K7 Configuration REESEN Input and Frontend Settings Handover Freq Defines the frequency at which the mixer switches from one range to the next
406. s the UO Analyzer or optional applications and only if the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 is available Defines triggering of the measurement directly via the LVDS con nector The parameter specifies which general purpose bit 0 to 5 will provide the trigger data The assignment of the general purpose bits used by the Digital IQ trigger to the LVDS connector pins is provided in Digital Q on page 96 RST IMMediate TRIG SOUR EXT Selects the external trigger input as source of the trigger signal See Using the power sensor as an external trigger on page 84 See Trigger Source on page 95 See Free Run on page 95 See External Trigger 1 2 3 on page 95 See I Q Power on page 95 See IF Power on page 96 See Baseband Power on page 96 See Digital I Q on page 96 See FM AM PM RF Offline on page 97 See Time on page 97 See RF Power on page 97 See Power Sensor on page 97 TRIGger SEQuence TIME RINTerval Interval This command defines the repetition interval for the time trigger Parameters Interval Example 2 0 ms to 5000 Range 2ms to 5000s RST 1 0s TRIG SOUR TIME Selects the time trigger input for triggering TRIG TIME RINT 50 The sweep starts every 50 s Configuring the Trigger Output The following commands are required to send the trigger signal to one of the variable TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connectors The tasks for manual operation are described
407. scribed in chapter 11 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements on page 165 Predefined settings For commonly performed measurements standard setup files are provided for quick and easy configuration Simply load an existing standard settings file and if necessary adapt the measurement settings to your specific requirements For an overview of predefined standards and settings see chapter A Reference Pre defined Standards and Settings on page 331 e Default Settings for Analog Democdulaton AA 50 e Configuration According to Digital Gtoandarde AAA 51 e Configuration OVerview sueuueoeeeeeeeseazese ee neenonnn enhn ne s ek auae Dn na season a esso pnta daa 53 e Inputand Frontend Settings einen aida etti Re Di a bee te 54 e Trigger GEHEIERT SEENEN ENEE 93 Data oil E 101 e Demodulation Display esssssseseseeenen nennen ennemis 105 ge Pu M 105 RT Ed EE 120 Automatic Settings T m 125 Default Settings for Analog Demodulation When you activate the Analog Demodulation application the first time a set of parameters is passed on from the currently active application e center frequency and frequency offset User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 50 R amp S FSW K7 Configuration Configuration According to Digital Standards e reference level and reference level o
408. se notes are also available for download from the R amp S website on the R amp S FSW product page at http www2 rohde schwarz com product FSW html gt Downloads Firmware Conventions Used in the Documentation Typographical Conventions The following text markers are used throughout this documentation Convention Description Graphical user interface ele All names of graphical user interface elements on the screen such as dia ments log boxes menus options buttons and softkeys are enclosed by quota tion marks KEYS Key names are written in capital letters File names commands File names commands coding samples and screen output are distin program code guished by their font Input Input to be entered by the user is displayed in italics Links Links that you can click are displayed in blue font References References to other parts of the documentation are enclosed by quotation marks Conventions for Procedure Descriptions When describing how to operate the instrument several alternative methods may be available to perform the same task In this case the procedure using the touchscreen is described Any elements that can be activated by touching can also be clicked using an additionally connected mouse The alternative procedure using the keys on the instru ment or the on screen keyboard is only described if it deviates from the standard oper ating procedures User Manual 1173 924
409. sents the numeric values 9 9E37 or 9 9E37 e NAN Not a number Represents the numeric value 9 91E37 NAN is returned in case of errors Boolean Boolean parameters represent two states The ON state logically true is represented by ON or a numeric value 1 The OFF state logically untrue is represented by OFF or the numeric value 0 Querying boolean parameters When you query boolean parameters the system returns either the value 1 ON or the value 0 OFF Example Setting DISPlay WINDow ZOOM STATe ON Query DISPlay WINDow ZOOM STATe would return 1 SS ST User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 170 R amp S FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements REESEN Common Suffixes 11 1 6 3 Character Data Character data follows the syntactic rules of keywords You can enter text using a short or a long form For more information see chapter 11 1 2 Long and Short Form on page 168 Querying text parameters When you query text parameters the system returns its short form Example Setting SENSe BANDwidth RESolution TYPE NORMal Query SENSe BANDwidth RESolution TYPE would return NORM 11 1 6 4 Character Strings Strings are alphanumeric characters They have to be in straight quotation marks You can use a single quotation mark or a double quotation mark Example INSTRument DELete Spectrum 11 1 6 5 Block Data Block data is a format which i
410. softkey c Disable the AF Auto Scale function d Define the new reference value at 100 top of the diagram as 100 kHz SS User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 162 R amp S FSW K7 Measurement Example Demodulating an FM Signal EE MultiView SS Spectrum Analog Demod Ref Level 0 00 dBm Att 10dB AQT 10 ms 1 FM Time Domain 1AP Clrw Ref 0 00 Hz DC CF 500 0 MHz 100tpts 5 FM Spectrum AF Span 100 0 kHz AF CF 50 0 kHz 10601 pts 4 Result Summary Carrier Power 10 37 dBm Carrier Offset 649 07 Hz Peak Peak tPeak 2 RMS Mod Freq SINAD THD FM 50 143 kHz 48 844 kHz 49 494 kHz 34 959 kHz 10 000 kHz 65 026 dB 66 413 dB Note that while the reference values at the top of both y axes are now identical the reference values indicated in the window title bars are not This is due to the fact that by default in AF time domain displays the reference value is defined at the reference position 50 96 center of diagram while in AF frequency domains it is defined at the position 100 96 top of diagram ERE RE N User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 163 R amp S FSW K7 Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Measurement 10 Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Mea surement If the results do not meet your expectations consider the following notes and tips to optimize the measurement Determining the demodulation bandwidth A frequent cause for measurement errors and false results is an incorrectly defined demodulation bandwid
411. specified by the suffix lt n gt from the display The result of this command is identical to the LAYout REMove WINDow command Usage Event User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 280 R amp S FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements Retrieving Results LAY out WINDow lt n gt REPLace lt WindowType gt This command changes the window type of an existing window specified by the suffix lt n gt The result of this command is identical to the LAYout REPLace WINDow command To add a new window use the LAYout WINDow lt n gt ADD command Parameters lt WindowType gt Type of measurement window you want to replace another one with See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 276 for a list of available window types Retrieving Results The following remote commands are required to retrieve the results from an Analog Demodulation measurement in a remote environment In the Analog Demodulation application when you configure the traces for a window with a specific evaluation e g AM time domain the traces in all windows with the same evaluation are configured identically 11 7 1 Specific commands e Retrieving Trace Resulls nenosena cae peed ieee dE 281 e Exporting Trace Rosulte olere eter REESEN EES 284 e Retrieving Result Summary Values 22 cccceeeeeseeeccceeneeeeceeeceeeeteeedeneneeeeere 286 e Formats for Returned Values ASCII Format and Binary Format
412. splay update during remote control is off this command has no immediate effect Parameters Mode ABSolute absolute scaling of the y axis RELative relative scaling of the y axis RST ABSolute Example DISP TRAC Y MODE REL Manual operation See Scaling on page 119 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe RPOSition Position This command defines the vertical position of the reference level on the display grid The R amp S FSW adjusts the scaling of the y axis accordingly For measurements with the external generator R amp S FSW B10 the command defines the position of the reference value Parameters Position RST 100 PCT AF spectrum display 50 PCT time dis play Example DISP TRAC Y RPOS 50PCT Usage SCPI confirmed er a M User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 232 R amp S9FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements 11 4 6 Configuring the Measurement Manual operation See Reference Position on page 79 See Reference Value Position on page 116 See Ref Level Position on page 118 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SPACing lt ScalingType gt This command selects the scaling of the y axis For AF spectrum displays only the parameters LINear and LOGarithmic are permit ted Parameters lt ScalingType gt LOGarithmic Logarithmic scaling LiNear Linear scaling in LDB Linear scaling in the specified unit PERCent Linear scaling in RST LOGarit
413. surement results are used to calculate the FM offset AVERage The measurement results that were averaged over the given num ber of measurements are used to calculate the FM offset If no average measurement was active during the last measure ment sequence only the SENSe ADEMod FM OFFSet IMMediate command will return a correct result data to calculate the offset are taken from the last measured data set SENSe ADEMod FM OFFSet AVERage Will cause a query error in this case REEL RU a User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 288 R amp S FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements Retrieving Results Example DEM SET 8MHz 32000 EXT POS 500 30 ets up demodulator parameters to execute 30 measurements DEM FM AVER OFF OFF elects FM results to perform averaging NIT WAI tarts measurement and waits for sync DEM FM OFFS IMM eads FM offset of last measurement of the sequence of 30 DEM FM OFFS AVER Reads FM offset averaged over 30 measurements HOPP CD gt DD Usage Query only SENSe JADEMod PM RPOint X lt Time gt This command determines the position where the phase of the PM demodulated signal is set to 0 rad The maximum possible value depends on the measurement time selected in the instrument this value is output in response to the query ADEM PM RPO X MAX Parameters lt Time gt 0 s to measurement time RST 0s Example ADEM
414. t Manual operation See Search Mode for Next Peak on page 137 Configuring Special Marker Functions The following commands are required to configure the special marker functions that are available in the Analog Demodulation application e Fixed Reference Marker Settings 2 essit 304 e Marken Peak ef rere aint ree chere eo sa xe e e E RSEN Te er CR PARED CE Yao 305 e NGB DOWN En EE 308 e Phase Noise Measurement Marker 311 Fixed Reference Marker Settings The following commands configure a fixed reference marker CALOCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion FIXed RPOint MAXimum PEAK 304 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion FIXed RPOINE X ccccccccesceceeeeeeeeseeeseeeeeees 304 CAL Culate nz DEL TamarkercmzFUNCHontlxedRbOnty 305 CAL Culate nz DEL TamarkercmzFUNCHont edROntv OFtzet 305 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion FlXed RPOint MAXimum PEAK This command moves the fixed reference marker to the peak power Example CALC DELT FUNC FIX RPO MAX Sets the reference point level for delta markers to the peak of the selected trace Usage Event Manual operation See Defining a Fixed Reference on page 136 See Defining a Reference Point on page 142 CALCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion FIXed RPOint X lt RefPoint gt This command defines the horizontal position of the fixed delta marker reference point The coordinates of the reference
415. t SPLit Displays the MultiView tab with an overview of all active channels SINGle Displays the measurement channel that was previously focused RST SPL Example DISP FORM SING DISPlay WINDow lt n gt SIZE Size This command maximizes the size of the selected result display window temporarily To change the size of several windows on the screen permanently use the LAY SPL com mand see LAYout SPLitter on page 278 Parameters Size LARGe Maximizes the selected window to full screen Other windows are still active in the background SMALI Reduces the size of the selected window to its original size If more than one measurement window was displayed originally these are visible again RST SMALI Example DISP WIND2 LARG 11 6 2 Working with Windows in the Display The following commands are required to change the evaluation type and rearrange the screen layout for a measurement channel as you do using the SmartGrid in manual operation Since the available evaluation types depend on the selected application some parameters for the following commands also depend on the selected measurement channel Note that the suffix n always refers to the window in the currently selected measure ment channel see INSTrument SELect on page 175 LE qoem za Bien pro v m 276 LAyoutCATalootWINDowl AANEREN nnnn nnns tits s snis enn baddinn iaiaaeaia 277 Bd le Ee 277 LAYout REMoveEWINDOW 5c tinea aa EE eiee
416. t MeasType gt PPEak MPEak MIDDle RMS PPEak Postive peak PK MPEak Negative peak PK MIDDle Average of positive and negative peaks PK 2 RMS Root mean square value Example CALC FEED XTIM PM TDOM Switches on the PM time domain result display DISP TRAC ON Switches on the trace CALC MARK FUNC ADEM PM PPE Queries the peak value of the demodulated PM trace CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion ADEMod CARRier RESult This command queries the carrier power which is determined from the Clr Write data Return values lt CPower gt Power of the carrier without modulation in dBm Usage Query only CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion ADEMod FERRor RESult lt t gt This command queries the carrier offset frequency error for FM and PM demodulation The carrier offset is determined from the current measurement data CLR WRITE The modulation is removed using low pass filtering The offset thus determined differs from that calculated in the SENSe ADEMod FM OFFSet command which uses averaging to determine the frequency deviation Return values lt CarrOffset gt The deviation of the calculated carrier frequency to the ideal carrier frequency in Hz Usage Query only CALCulate lt n gt MARKer FUNCtion ADEMod SINad RESult lt t gt This command queries the result of the signal to noise and distortion SINAD measure ment in the specified window for the specified trace Note that this value is on
417. t m gt TRACe on page 293 All Markers Off Deactivates all markers in one step Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt AOFF on page 293 6 3 2 General Marker Settings Some general marker settings allow you to influence the marker behavior for all markers These settings are located in the Marker Settings tab of the Marker dialog box To display this tab do one of the following e Press the MKR key then select the Marker Config softkey e Inthe Analog Demodulation Overview select Analysis and switch to the vertical Marker tab Then select the horizontal Marker Settings tab Markers Marker Settings Search Settings Marker Table Reference Fixed Linked Markers Off State OTT On Level 70 0 Marker Stepsize Frequency 15 1 Hz AF Spectrum fon Sweep Points Peak Search Marker Tablo DISD AY S 135 IET EEN 136 Denning a Fred E 136 Link ime El EN 136 Link AF Spectrum MAKO EEN 136 Marker Table Display Defines how the marker information is displayed On Displays the marker information in a table in a separate area beneath the diagram Off Displays the marker information within the diagram area User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 135 R amp S FSW K7 Analysis NNN a a Marker Settings Auto Default Up to two markers are displayed in the diagram area If more markers are active the marker table is displayed automatically Remote command DISPlay MTAB1e on page
418. ta For multi channel signals all channels have the same number of samples One sample can be e A complex number represented as a pair of and Q values e A complex number represented as a pair of magnitude and phase values e Areal number represented as a single real value See also Format element Clock Contains the clock frequency in Hz i e the sample rate of the I Q data A signal gen erator typically outputs the UO data at a rate that equals the clock frequency If the UO data was captured with a signal analyzer the signal analyzer used the clock frequency as the sample rate The attribute unit must be set to Hz Format Specifies how the binary data is saved in the UO data binary file see DataFilename element Every sample must be in the same format The format can be one of the following e complex Complex number in cartesian format i e and Q values interleaved and Q are unitless real Real number unitless polar Complex number in polar format i e magnitude unitless and phase rad values interleaved Requires DataType float32 or float64 DataType Specifies the binary format used for samples in the UO data binary file see DataFilename element and chapter B 2 I Q Data Binary File on page 337 The following data types are allowed int8 8 bit signed integer data int16 16 bit signed integer data int32 32 bit signed integer data 10at32 32 bit floating point data IEEE 754 float64 64
419. tate gt ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example SYST COMM RDEV PMET CONF AUTO OFF Manual operation See Select on page 82 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice PMETer COUNt This command queries the number of power sensors currently connected to the R amp S FSW E N User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 202 R amp S FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements SSS Se ee ee ae ees Configuring the Measurement Parameters lt NumberSensors gt Number of connected power sensors Example SYST COMM RDEV PMET COUN Usage Query only Manual operation See Select on page 82 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice PMETer lt p gt DEFine Placeholder Type Interface lt SerialNo gt This command assigns the power sensor with the specified serial number to the selected power sensor index configuration The query returns the power sensor type and serial number of the sensor assigned to the specified index Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Setting parameters lt Placeholder gt Currently not evaluated lt SerialNo gt Serial number of a connected power sensor Query parameters lt Type gt The power sensor type e g NRP Z81 Interface Currently not evaluated Return values Placeholder Currently not used Type Detected power sensor type e g NRP Z81 Interface Interface the power sensor is connected to always USB lt SerialNo gt Serial nu
420. te lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X lt Position gt This command moves a delta marker to a particular coordinate on the x axis If necessary the command activates the delta marker and positions a reference marker to the peak power Parameters lt Position gt Numeric value that defines the marker position on the x axis The position is relative to the reference marker To select an absolute position you have to change the delta marker mode with CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker MODE on page 296 A query returns the absolute position of the delta marker Range The value range and unit depend on the measure ment and scale of the x axis Example CALC DELT X Outputs the absolute x value of delta marker 1 Manual operation See Marker Position X value on page 134 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X RELative This command queries the relative position of a delta marker on the x axis If necessary the command activates the delta marker first Return values lt Position gt Position of the delta marker in relation to the reference marker or the fixed reference Example CALC DELT3 X REL Outputs the frequency of delta marker 3 relative to marker 1 or relative to the reference position Usage Query only CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt Y This command queries the relative position of a delta marker on the y axis If necessary the command activates the delta marker first SS User Manual
421. te lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXiMUM RIGHL 00 2 ec cee cece eeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeesecaeeeeseaeeeseeaeeeeseieeeeeees IESSE User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 340 R amp S FSW K7 List of Remote Commands AnalogDemod CAL Culate cnz MAb ker mz MAximumf PDEART nennen enne n nnne nne renn net nnet nina 301 CALCulate n MARKer m MINimum LEFT sse eene entrer nnne ren rene rnnn ndn nnn tenen 301 CAL Culate cnz MAbRker mzMiNimumNENT enne en eene ennt nettes en rnns nennt nsn nent enn 302 CALCulate n2 MARKer m MINimum RIGHLE esses nennen eren nne nnn nennen nnne nt nena 302 CAL Culate cnz MAbker mzMiNimumf PEART eene nenne sre nnne n nnns 302 CALCulatecnz MAbker mz TRACe seinen nein nns sen nnts shi nnts seni ness entres sin ints sns inns sns rnn sinn 293 CAl Culatesn MARKoersm Seege dee presa cede eade de da ee a cb de eere bu Re pane a E RR MER RR REN dud 294 CAL Culatesn MARKoeremoe Y EE 294 CAL Culate cnz M Ab ker mztSTAaTel eene nnns eh tener rent nnts nnne nensis tr nnn diner nns nnn 293 CAlCulate cnz PME Tercp RE ative zi len 205 CAlLCulate nz PME TercpsREL ativel MACGhNtudel eene nnne 204 CALCulate lt n gt PMETer lt p gt RELative MAGNitude AUTO ONCE 205 CALC latesn gt IR le TE 227 CALibration PMETer lt p gt ZERO AUTO ONCE 204 DIAGnOstiG SERVICE NSU C R P 223 BIST Alii 275 DISPlay MTAB I
422. tecLIMiESKSUPPer SBIEPL EE 318 CAL Gulate LIMit Ic UP Per SPACING 1 ecerret iii cu diee aa Luka VEER 319 GALGulate LIMitek Geen KN KEE 319 CAL CulateLlMitck Ubber Hbeshold eene nennen nnns nn snnt s 319 CALCulate LIMit COMMent Comment This command defines a comment for a limit line Parameters Comment String containing the description of the limit line The comment may have up to 40 characters Manual operation See Comment on page 149 CALCulate LIMit lt k gt CONTrol DATA lt LimitLinePoints gt This command defines the horizontal definition points of a limit line Parameters lt LimitLinePoints gt Variable number of x axis values Note that the number of horizontal values has to be the same as the number of vertical values set with CALCulate LIMit lt k gt LOWer DATA OrCALCulate LIMit k UPPer DATA lf not the R amp S FSW either adds missing values or ignores surplus values The unit is Hz ors RST Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Data points on page 150 CALCulate LIMit lt k gt CONTrol DOMain lt SpanSetting gt This command selects the domain of the limit line Parameters lt SpanSetting gt FREQuency TIME RST FREQuency Manual operation See X Axis on page 149 CALCulate LIMit lt k gt CONTrol MODE lt Mode gt This command selects the horizontal limit line scaling E M User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 313 R amp S FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog
423. th DBW If the DBW is too large the actual signal takes up only a small part of the demodulated range That means that any noise or additional signal parts may be included in the mea sured results which are then false On the other hand if the DBW is too small part of the signal is cut off and thus not included in the calculation of the results An easy way to determine the required DBW is to display the RF spectrum of the input signal If the entire signal is displayed there and takes up most of the diagram width the DBW should be appropriate This procedure is demonstrated in the measurement example described in chapter 9 Measurement Example Demodulating an FM Signal on page 158 For further recommendations on finding the correct demodulation bandwidth see chap ter 4 2 Demodulation Bandwidth on page 28 Adjusting the displayed span Be aware that the span of the RF Spectrum display is not automatically increased for a wider DBW since it may be useful to display only a small range from the demodulated bandwidth However this means the RF spectrum may not show the entire demodulated bandwidth In this case you must increase the span manually to show the entire signal Determining the SINAD and THD The signal to noise and distortion ratio SINAD and the total harmonic distortion THD of the demodulated signal are a good indicator of the signal quality sent by the DUT Both values are calculated inside the AF spectrum
424. the absolute frequency is displayed i e an input signal with an offset relative to the center frequency is not displayed symmetrically with respect to the zero line If AC is selected the frequency offset is automatically corrected i e the trace is always symmetric with respect to the zero line e PM time evaluation If DC is selected the phase runs according to the existing frequency offset In addi tion the DC signal contains a phase offset of rr If AC is selected the frequency offset and phase offset are automatically corrected i e the trace is always symmetric with respect to the zero line Remote command SENSe ADEMod n AF COUPling on page 248 Selected Trace Defines the trace used to determine the results in the Result Summary Time Domain Zoom Using the time domain zoom the demodulated data for a particular time span is extracted and displayed in more detail This is useful if the measurement time is very large and thus each sweep point represents a large time span The time domain zoom function distrib utes the available sweep points only amoung the time span defined by the zoom area length The time span displayed per division of the diagram is decreased Thus the dis play of the extracted time span becomes more precise Note that the time domain zoom area affects not only the diagram display but the entire evaluation for the current window User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 107 R amp S FSW K7 Configu
425. the available mea surement time is not sufficient for the given bandwidth the measurement time is set to its maximum and the resolution bandwidth is increased to the resulting bandwidth This command is identical to SENS BAND RES see the R amp S FSW User Manual Parameters lt Bandwidth gt Example refer to data sheet RST 61 2 kHz ADEM SPEC BAND 61 2kHz Sets the resolution bandwidth to 61 2 kHz SENSe ADEMod SRATe This command returns the sample rate set up for the current analog demodulation mea surement User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 235 R amp S FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements NN SSS Se ee a eee Configuring the Measurement Example ADEM SRAT Returns the current sample rate Usage Query only SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth DEMod lt Bandwidth gt This command sets the bandwidth for analog demodulation Depending on the selected demodulation bandwidth the instrument selects the required sampling rate For details on the correlation between demodulation bandwidth and sampling rate refer to chapter 4 3 Sample Rate Measurement Time and Trigger Offset on page 29 This command is identical to SENS ADEM BAND DEM Parameters lt Bandwidth gt RST 5 MHz Example BAND DEM 1MHz Sets demodulation bandwidth to 1 MHz Manual operation See Demodulation Bandwidth on page 102 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth DEMod TYPE F
426. the reference trace and the current instrument set tings are taken into account automatically If the span is reduced a linear interpolation of the intermediate values is applied If the span increases the values at the left or right border of the reference dataset are extrapolated to the current start or stop frequency i e the reference dataset is extended by constant values Thus the instrument settings can be changed in a wide area without giving up normali zation This reduces the necessity to carry out a new normalization to a minimum If approximation becomes too poor however normalization is aborted and an error mes sage is displayed see chapter 4 7 4 8 Displayed Information and Errors on page 45 The normalized trace in the display The normalized reference trace is also displayed in the spectrum diagram by default at the top of the diagram 100 of the window height It is indicated by a red line labeled NOR followed by the current reference value However it can be shifted vertically to reflect an attenuation or gain caused by the measured DUT see also Shifting the ref erence line and normalized trace on page 43 Restoring the calibration settings If the measurement settings no longer match the instrument settings with which the cal ibration was performed indicated by the APX or no label next to Ext TG in the channel User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 41 R amp S9FSW K7 Measurement Basics 4 7
427. the screen and can be read out via remote control In addition important parameters are calculated e Acounter determines the modulation frequency for AM FM and PM e average power carrier power RF power e average frequency carrier frequency offset FM e The modulation depth or the frequency or phase deviation the deviations are deter mined from the trace data AC coupling is possible with FM and PM display 4 2 Demodulation Bandwidth The demodulation bandwidth determines the span of the signal that is demodulated It is not the 3 dB bandwidth of the filter but the useful bandwidth which is distortion free with regard to phase and amplitude Therefore the following formulas apply e AM demodulation bandwidth 2 2 x modulation frequency e FM demodulation bandwidth 2 2 x frequency deviation modulation frequency e PM demodulation bandwidth 2 2 x modulation frequency x 1 phase deviation demodulation bandwidth must be increased by the carrier offset in addition to the requirement described above This also applies if FM or PM AC coupling has been selected o If the center frequency of the analyzer is not set exactly to the signal frequency the In general the demodulation bandwidth should be as narrow as possible to improve the S N ratio The residual FM caused by noise floor and phase noise increases dramatically with the bandwidth especially with FM For help on determining the adequate demodulation bandw
428. the table can be assigned to the range For a definition of the frequency range for the pre defined bands see table 11 2 Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL BAND on page 187 Harmonic Order The harmonic order of the range for which the table is to be applied This setting is checked against the current mixer setting before the table can be assigned to the range Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL HARMonic on page 190 Bias The bias current which is required to set the mixer to its optimum operating point It cor responds to the short circuit current The bias current can range from 10 mA to 10 mA The actual bias current is lower because of the forward voltage of the mixer diode s Tip You can also define the bias interactively while a preview of the trace with the changed setting is displayed see Bias Settings on page 62 Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL BIAS on page 188 Mixer Name Specifies the name of the external mixer for which the table is to be applied This setting is checked against the current mixer setting before the table can be assigned to the range Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL MIXer on page 190 Mixer S N Specifies the serial number of the external mixer for which the table is to be applied This setting is checked against the current mixer setting before the table can be assigned to the range Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL SNUMber on page 191 IECH
429. ting mode settings related to data acquisition cannot be adjusted for Analog Demodulation applications Adjusting all Determinable Settings Automatically Auto All 125 Adjusting the Center Frequency Automatically Auto Fre 125 Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level 126 Resetting the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Auto 126 Changing the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Manual 126 Upper Level FlySIeFesls e per ii tie eiie e Pe Irt ale EIER dA RES EE 126 Lower Level Hyslteresis e ERR EAE ERR A d ERR A 126 AF ANO SCIO S 126 Adjusting all Determinable Settings Automatically Auto All Activates all automatic adjustment functions for the current measurement settings This includes e Auto Frequency e Auto Level e AF Auto Scale on page 118 Remote command SENSe ADJust ALL on page 260 Adjusting the Center Frequency Automatically Auto Freq This function adjusts the center frequency automatically The optimum center frequency can be determined as the highest frequency level in the frequency span As this function uses the signal counter it is intended for use with sinus oidal signals This function is not available for input from the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 Remote command SENSe ADJust FREQuency on page 261 User Manual 1173 9240 0
430. tion TRANsducer GENerator SENSe CORRe cIionESTATe i iueii irit reo oth tee e estet te du deed eie etc EISEM Te DR ne E SENSe FIL Tercpnz AuWEIobtedGTATel essere nenne nnne trennen rnnt nnns IEN Ge El Tercns COCIR WEIGhted STATel IEN Ge El Tercns CCIRTUNWeobtedlt GTATel eene ene 255 ISENGe dM T Ee E001 E REM SENSe FIL Tercnz DEMbbasis TCOhNstant enne enne nennen rnnr sen rrn sentent seen SENSe FlL Ter n DEMPhasis S TATe seen rennen nter nnne SENSe FILTer lt n gt HPASs FREQuency MANual SENSe FIL Ter n HPASs FREQuency ABSolute essere nemen 256 SENS FIETersns HPASS STAT er aaa endet eder setate Eier o cta ce kde eek eaa Ma 257 SENSe FlLTer n2 L PASs FREQuency MANUal essent eene ener nnns 257 SENSe FILTer n LPASs FREQuency RELative sees rennen nnne 258 IGENZGe Eil TercnsLPAGeFbRtOuencvt ABGohutel nnne 257 SENSe FlL TercnsLPAGelGTATel nennen nennen trennen neret eterne SENSe FREQuency CEMNT6r iiii et tst nir ertt tene tin ehe ranae ra dta eh rk tuae a Fes PR ERES Een no ERES SETERS SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP cccccsccscsesceseesseseneseceaeceeecaeesaesnecaeeeaeesaesaeeaesaaesaeeeaeeeeesaeeeaeseneeaeeaas SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK FACTOor sese 226 EISE e ER le 181 SENS baie aKa 181 SENSe MIXer FREQuency HANDOwVer
431. tly which is indicated by the IF OVLD status display OVLD for analog baseband or digitial baseband input The reference level is also used to scale power diagrams the reference level is then used as the maximum on the y axis Since the R amp S FSW hardware is adapted according to this value it is recommended that you set the reference level close above the expected maximum signal level to ensure an optimum measurement no compression good signal to noise ratio Note that the Reference Level value ignores the Shifting the Display Offset It is important to know the actual power level the R amp S FSW must handle Note that for input from the External Mixer R amp S FSW B21 the maximum reference level also depends on the conversion loss see the R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input User Manual for details Remote command DISPlay WINDowcn TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel on page 228 EES User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 90 R amp S FSW K7 Configuration Input and Frontend Settings Shifting the Display Offset Reference Level Defines an arithmetic level offset This offset is added to the measured level irrespective of the selected unit The scaling of the y axis is changed accordingly Define an offset if the signal is attenuated or amplified before it is fed into the R amp S FSW so the application shows correct power results All displayed power level results will be shifted by this value Note however that the Refe
432. toa 248 e Adjusting Settings Automatically 22 cer etiace tereti etc eee edes 260 e Contnguring Standard Tracts centre ENEE 263 Managing Standard Settings You can configure the Analog Demodulation application using predefined standard set tings This allows for quick and easy configuration for commonly performed measure ments For details see chapter 5 2 Configuration According to Digital Standards on page 51 For an overview of predefined standards and settings see chapter A Reference Pre defined Standards and Settings on page 331 ISENSeJADEMod PRESeR 9 E EE 176 E ADEMOd EE 176 ISENSETADEMOG RE 177 SENSe ADEMod PRESet STANdard Standard This command loads a measurement configuration Standard definitions are stored in an xml file The default directory for Analog Demodu lation standards is C Nx sNinstrNuser predefined MAdemodPredefined Parameters Standard String containing the file name If you have stored the file in a subdirectory of the directory men tioned above you have to include the relative path to the file Return values Standard The query returns the name of the currently loaded standard Manual operation See Setup Standard on page 52 See Load Standard on page 52 SENSe ADEMod PRESet RESTore This command restores the default configurations of predefined Analog Demodulation standards Note that the command will overwrite customized standards that have
433. ton In this case further parameters are available for the output signal Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt OTYPe on page 247 Level Output Type Trigger 2 3 Defines whether a constant high 1 or low 0 signal is sent to the output connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel on page 246 Pulse Length Output Type Trigger 2 3 Defines the length of the pulse sent as a trigger to the output connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt PULSe LENGth on page 247 Send Trigger Output Type Trigger 2 3 Sends a user defined trigger to the output connector immediately Note that the trigger pulse level is always opposite to the constant signal level defined by the output Level setting e g for Level High a constant high signal is output to the connector until the Send Trigger button is selected Then a low pulse is sent Which pulse level will be sent is indicated by a graphic on the button Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt PULSe IMMediate on page 247 E MN User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 100 R amp S FSW K7 Configuration Data Acquisition 5 6 Data Acquisition How data is to be acquired and then demodulated is configured in the Data Acquisi tion dialog box MSRA operating mode In MSRA operating mode only the MSRA Master channel actually captures data from the input signal The data acquisition settings for the Analog Demodulation
434. top 100000 Hz Start stop of the display range Unit Hz for span gt 0 s for span 0 dBm dB for statistics meas urements Span 90000 Hz Frequency range 0 Hz in zero span and statistics measure ments Ref Level 30 dBm Reference level Level Offset 0 dB Level offset User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 290 R amp S9FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements Retrieving Results File contents Rf Att 20 dB Description Input attenuation EI Att 2 0 dB Electrical attenuation RBW 100000 Hz Resolution bandwidth VBW 30000 Hz Video bandwidth SWT 0 005 s Sweep time Sweep Count 20 Number of sweeps set Ref Position 75 Position of reference level referred to diagram limits 0 lower edge Level Range 100 dB Display range in y direction Unit dB with x axis LOG 96 with x axis LIN X Axis LIN Scaling of x axis linear LIN or logarithmic LOG y Axis LOG Scaling of y axis linear LIN or logarithmic LOG x Unit Hz Unit of x values Hz with span gt 0 s with span 0 dBm dB with statistics measurements y Unit dBm Unit of y values dB V A W depending on the selected unit with y axis LOG or with y axis LIN Data section for individual window Window 1 Frequency Sweep Window number and name Trace 1 Selected trace Trace Mode AVERAGE Display mode of trace CLR WRITE AVERAG
435. tret ter ene Single Sweep Span Manual Sweep count Time Trace 1 2 3 4 Trace Config Trigger Offset ae Upper Level Hysteresis 126 Sort mode Peak Mri 144 Source offset External generator AA 76 Source power External generator AA 76 SPAN Displayed iut Manual Softkey sessssee 111 Specifics for Configuratio eco tx pra eee rk pruina 54 Spectrum Bemodulatiori eet iieri 109 Squelch m PRT 107 M 107 Remote control 249 State 107 Standards Predefined sisone nee nit 331 in us ee rd eei eris heen ret 52 see Digital standards sss 51 Status bar Error messages external generator 46 Status registers STAT QUES POW occorre tnra 177 Step size ECC 136 Markers remote control 0ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 298 Storage location S ltlirnigs aine nre He terret 52 User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 355 R amp S9FSW K7 Index Suffixes COMMO ves iiie rere per oes io Yer re ME EY cire he tek iste Remote commands T SWAPO pe inSain REMOTE s Secs c cack rie endo Ee E ever event en dre da ue Sweep ADONG E Count Points T Ge E Sweep points RIVE 14 Sweeps Performing remote sssssessesss 269 Reverse external generator
436. tting is not available if Export all Traces and all Table Results is selected MMM M User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 131 R amp S9FSW K7 Analysis 6 3 6 3 1 Marker Settings Decimal Separator Defines the decimal separator for floating point numerals for the data export files Eval uation programs require different separators in different languages Remote command FORMat DEXPort DSEParator on page 285 Export Trace to ASCII File Opens a file selection dialog box and saves the selected trace in ASCII format dat to the specified file and directory The results are output in the same order as they are displayed on the screen window by window trace by trace and table row by table row For details on the file format see chapter 11 7 5 Reference ASCII File Export Format on page 290 Remote command MMEMory STORe lt n gt TRACe on page 284 Marker Settings Marker settings can be configured via the MARKER key or in the Marker dialog box To display the Marker dialog box do one of the following e Press the MKR key then select the Marker Config softkey e Inthe Analog Demodulation Overview select Analysis and switch to the vertical Marker tab The remote commands required to define these settings are described in chapter 11 8 1 Working with Markers Remotely on page 292 e Te EEN ee TEE 132 e General Marker Settings
437. ueries the Q factor of n dB down measurements Return values lt QFactor gt Usage Query only CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion NDBDown RESult This command queries the distance of the n dB down markers from each other To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchronization to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single sweeps See also INIT Tiate CONTinuous on page 271 Return values Distance The result depends on the span In case of frequency domain measurements the command returns the bandwidth between the two n dB down markers in Hz In case of time domain measurements the command returns the pulse width between the two n dB down markers in seconds LEE User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 309 R amp S9FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements Example Usage Manual operation Analyzing Results INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode CALC MARK FUNC NDBD ON Switches on the n dB down function INIT WAI Starts a sweep and waits for the end CALC MARK FUNC NDBD RES Outputs the measured value Query only See n dB down Marker State on page 143 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion NDBDown STATe lt State gt This command turns the n dB Down marker function on and off Parameters lt State gt Example Manual operation ON OFF RST OFF CALC MARK FUNC NDBD
438. urrent measurement For details on settings for individual lines see chapter 6 7 2 Limit Line Details on page 148 PAs Nx 146 We T 146 emnes 146 VISBY 146 Traces to be CHEGCKEG coi ieccccccccccsssaccecssesstaededescctteesudeceateseasiadsatvandechdcsesiaacdeduecntndcdueunee 146 En EE 147 Included Lines in Overview View Filter 2 eene 147 Show lines for all modes eene nennen nenne 147 POT SEG anaes ac ere etie matu i d at M 147 poli EE EN 147 Greate Now LING EE 147 SERA Ee 147 Copy DEET 147 Jelete INE EE 148 Disable IEN 148 Name The name of the stored limit line Unit The unit in which the y values of the data points of the limit line are defined Compatibility Indicates whether the limit line definition is compatible with the current measurement settings Visibility Displays or hides the limit line in the diagram Up to 8 limit lines can be visible at the same time Inactive limit lines can also be displayed in the diagram Remote command CALCulate LIMit k LOWer STATe on page 316 CALCulate LIMit k UPPer STATe on page 319 CALCulate LIMit ACTive on page 320 Traces to be Checked Defines which traces are automatically checked for conformance with the limit lines As soon as a trace to be checked is defined the assigned limit line is active One
439. use of an external mixer They are only available if the External Mixer State is On RG WCDMA SRR Ra Mies Hj Frequency Basic Settings Mixer Settings Conversion Loss Table External Mixer Bias Settings Range 1 Digital IQ Signal ID Bias Settings Range 2 Auto ID Bias Value LITOSURETES TUAE 10 0 dB EOE EE 61 AD MU 62 PANU a T EE 62 AUD Threshold EE 62 Bias SONGS TEE 62 L Write to CVL table mam NENNEN 63 LO Level Defines the LO level of the external mixer s LO port Possible values are from 13 0 dBm to 17 0 dBm in 0 1 dB steps Default value is 15 5 dB Remote command SENSe MIXer LOPower on page 181 Er H O 1CZ G w sHa it User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 61 R amp S FSW K7 Configuration Input and Frontend Settings Signal ID Activates or deactivates visual signal identification Two sweeps are performed alter nately Trace 1 shows the trace measured on the upper side band USB of the LO the test sweep trace 2 shows the trace measured on the lower side band LSB i e the reference sweep Note that automatic signal identification is only available for measurements that perform frequency sweeps not in vector signal analysis or the I Q Analyzer for instance Mathematical functions with traces and trace copy cannot be used with the Signal ID function Remote command SENSe MIXer SIGNal on page 181 Auto ID
440. ut dialog box if the R amp S FSW External Generator Control option R amp S FSW B10 is installed For each measurement channel one external generator can be configured To switch between different configu rations define multiple measurement channels To display this dialog box press the INPUT OUPUT key and then select External Gen erator Config For more information on external generator control see chapter 4 7 4 Basics on External Generator Control on page 35 e Interface Configuration Settings EE 73 e Measurement SOUINGS ccce aio eere Efe AREKEA be ea ob dai deze ian 75 e Source Calibration Functions coe dee itd dL ee reed e seva eds 77 Interface Configuration Settings The interface settings for the connection to the external generator are defined in the Interface Configuration subtab of the External Generator tab Input 7 SE Spectrum L f Input Source Power Sensor Tracking Generator Interface Settings Source Capabilities Measurement ng urce Capabiliti Configuration Generator Name Frequency Min Interface Interface Frequency Max Configuration TTL Handshake Level Min Source Calibration GPIB Address Level Max Reference Edit Generator Setup File For more information on configuring interfaces see the Remote Control Interfaces and Protocols section in the R amp S FSW User Manual Genstalor TYB9 s cita eee a b o THER se 74 DICATIS RONDE EET DO E OIL LLLI UL DS 74 TTE AS EKG cedet
441. utput is active see chapter 5 9 2 Analog Demodulation Output Settings on page 123 gt To display this dialog box do one of the following e Select the Demod Settings button in the Analog Demodulation Overview and select the AF Filter tab e Select the MEAS CONFIG key and then the AF Filter Config softkey Demod Spectrum AfFilter Scaling Unit High Pass Low Pass Weighting Deemphasis All Filter Off Gi steiere 2 AM Spectrum E User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 112 R amp S FSW K7 Configuration EEE EEE aaa Demodulation le 113 Lw EE 113 WS IG MMI DEER 114 DGG MASS EEN 114 bites upper eal rm 115 High Pass Defines a high pass filter with the given limit to separate the DC component The filters are indicated by the 3 dB cutoff frequency The 50 Hz and 300 Hz filters are designed as 2nd order Butterworth filter 12 dB octave The 20 Hz filter is designed as 3rd order Butterworth filter 18 dB octave The high pass filters are active in the following demodulation bandwidth range None No AF Filter used default 20 Hz 100 Hz lt demodulation bandwidth x 1 6 MHz 50 Hz 200 Hz lt demodulation bandwidth s 3 MHz 300 Hz 800 Hz lt demodulation bandwidth s 8 MHz Manual A high pass filter with the manually defined frequency is used Note If online demodulation output is active the predefined fixed filters are not avail able In this case the frequenc
442. ve measurements Usage Query only READ PMETer lt p gt This command initiates a power sensor measurement and queries the results Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Usage Query only SENSe PMETer lt p gt DCYCle STATe lt State gt This command turns the duty cycle correction on and off Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example PMET2 DCYC STAT ON Manual operation See Duty Cycle on page 84 SENSe PMETer lt p gt DCYCle VALue lt Percentage gt This command defines the duty cycle for the correction of pulse signals The power sensor uses the duty cycle in combination with the mean power to calculate the power of the pulse Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor Parameters lt Percentage gt Range 0 001 to 99 999 RST 99 999 Default unit Example PMET2 DCYC STAT ON Activates the duty cycle correction PMET2 DCYC VAL 0 5 Sets the correction value to 0 5 EE User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 206 R amp S FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements AME K v J Hse Configuring the Measurement Manual operation See Duty Cycle on page 84 SENSe PMETer lt p gt FREQuency Frequency This command defines the frequency of the power sensor
443. version loss table For details on table configuration see Creating and Editing Conversion Loss Tables on page 64 Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 191 User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 63 R amp S FSW K7 Configuration Deg Input and Frontend Settings Edit Table Opens the Edit Conversion loss table dialog box to edit the selected conversion loss table For details on table configuration see Creating and Editing Conversion Loss Tables on page 64 Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 191 Delete Table Deletes the currently selected conversion loss table after you confirm the action Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL CLEAr on page 189 Import Table Imports a stored conversion loss table from any directory and copies it to the instrument s C r_s instr user cv1 directory It can then be assigned for use for a specific frequency range see Conversion loss on page 60 Creating and Editing Conversion Loss Tables Conversion loss tables can be defined and edited in the Edit conversion loss table dialog box which is displayed when you select the New Table button in the External Mixer gt Conversion loss table settings A preview pane displays the current configuration of the conversion loss function as described by the position value entries LSS Se SSS SSS az User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 64 R amp S FSW K7 Configuration Input and Front
444. vision ele EEN 116 DBW see Demodulation bandwidth 0 0 0 eee 13 Decimal separator ele export rtt etre tereti rentre 132 Deemphasis filter PAR cM 114 Remote control eorr tnt hern 255 256 Default values Preset starte stone eed re ose aer itor vae ES 50 Deleting Limit line val es uir rrr honra 150 Settings files m SUANGANAS cM Delta Markers cc cases iter erp Rr ihnen DENING TEE Demodulation AF GREIN ase i erben teet recreo trono tese dedere Configuration Softkey E DIS NAY PS Filter YPES EEN Process Spent Rm ele Te E ene EE User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 348 R amp S9FSW K7 Index Teo dro 109 Spectrum Result Summary ss 110 cc 119 Demodulation bandwidth CONMGILONS C Deemphasis filter Displayed EE Aui Remote control Noui Troubleshooting erected 164 Denominator Frequencies external generator 43 77 Detectors Remote control sins cesses nre 268 Um 129 Deviation Scalig oot verint egi eg e e ene eee ex deae 117 Dev per division I Rp 116 Diagram footer information sss 14 Differential input Analog Baseband B71 remote control 194 Analog Baseband GB 71 DiglConf Softkey see also R amp S DiglConf
445. x axis Remote command CALCulate LIMit lt k gt CONTrol OFFSet on page 314 Y Offset Shifts a limit line that has relative values for the y axis levels or linear units such as volt vertically This setting does not have any effect on limit lines that are defined by absolute values for the y axis Remote command CALCulate LIMit lt k gt LOWer OFFSet on page 315 CALCulate LIMit lt k gt UPPer OFFSet on page 318 Create New Line Creates a new limit line Edit Line Edit an existing limit line configuration Copy Line Copy the selected limit line configuration to create a new line Remote command CALCulate LIMit k COPY on page 320 p User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 147 R amp S FSW K7 Analysis 6 7 2 Limit Line Settings and Functions Delete Line Delete the selected limit line configuration Remote command CALCulate LIMit k DELete on page 320 Disable All Lines Disable all limit lines in one step Remote command CALCulate LIMit lt k gt STATe on page 320 Limit Line Details Limit lines details are configured in the Edit Line Line dialog box which is displayed when you select the New Edit or Copy To buttons in the Line Config dialog box Edit Limit Li emt x Name UPPER LIMIT LINE EEN 200 0 dBm Comment Margin 5 0 dB E
446. y sssss 137 Search settings Markers remote eret reet nente en 300 Select Marker inc M P ah ants Wie ED Aborting remote s Activating remote ss sss 272 Mode remote cet tret edens 272 acc MEE 271 Settings Displayed File name i Restoring fes i i oorr EE 53 Storage lOCALION sass eicere tete inen gege gegen 52 Settings files DeIEtNG misein ee a a eee en tesece see Loading WEE Predefined s SAVN WE Setup files External generator eee eee 39 74 75 Shift x Bing All 150 User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 354 R amp S9FSW K7 Index Shift y Limit lines a oriri 150 Short circuit reflection measurement Calibration external generator ssssss 78 Signal ID External Mixer B21 remote control 181 External Mixer B21 sss 62 Signal source aug M M R 179 Signal to noise and distortion See SINAD critt nennen rre eter Signal to noise ratio d MD Querying remote Tiroubleshootirig TEE Single sweep SOFIKOV EE 104 Elle Ee p 151 Slope Power sensor trigger 2 eeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeee 85 Trigger us D Trigger Power sensor ceceeeeeeeteeeeeeneeees 85 Softkey Calibrate Reflection Open remote control 220 Calibrate Reflection Short remote control 220 Calibrate Transmission remot
447. y for the high pass filter must be defined manually see also chapter 5 9 2 Analog Demodulation Output Settings on page 123 If a filter was already configured when online demodulation output is activated it is replaced by a manual filter that provides corresponding results if possible Remote command SENSe FILTer n HPASs STATe on page 257 SENSe FILTer lt n gt HPASs FREQuency ABSolute on page 256 SENSe FILTer lt n gt HPASs FREQuency MANual on page 256 Low Pass Defines a low pass filter type Relative and absolute low pass filter are available e Absolute low pass filters Absolute filters are indicated by the 3 dB cutoff frequency The 3 kHz 15 kHz and 23 kHz filters are designed as 5th order Butterworth filters 30 dB octave The 150 kHz filter is designed as 8th order Butterworth filter 48 dB octave The absolute low pass filters are active in the following demodulation bandwidth range Filter type Demodulation bandwidth 3 kHz 6 4 kHz lt demodulation bandwidth lt 3 MHz 15 kHz 50 kHz lt demodulation bandwidth lt 8 MHz 23 kHz 50 kHz lt demodulation bandwidth lt 18 MHz 150 kHz 400 kHz lt demodulation bandwidth lt 8 MHz Manual A low pass filter with the manually defined frequency is used SS 1 User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 113 R amp S FSW K7 Configuration BEE Demodulation Note If online demodulation output is active the predefine
448. y the possible range SENS MIX FREO STAR Result 47480000000 47 48 GHz SENS MIX FREO STOP Result 138020000000 138 02 GHz Select single sweep mode INIT CONT OFF Initiate a basic frequency sweep and wait until the sweep has finished INIT WAI Return the trace data default screen configuration TRAC DATA TRACe1 Configuring Input via the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 The following commands are required to control the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 in a remote environment They are only available if this option is installed For more information on the Analog Baseband Interface see the R amp S FSW UO Analyzer User Manual R amp S FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements REESEN Configuring the Measurement Useful commands for Analog Baseband data described elsewhere INP SEL AIQ see INPut SELect on page 179 SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 225 Commands for the Analog Baseband calibration signal are described in the R amp S FSW User Manual Remote commands exclusive to Analog Baseband data input and output INPut IG BAbancedESTATSe rcr ciiin ceo et eee e ehe d ere eene etas 194 INPutIQ FULLscales AUTO DEE 194 INU IO FULEscale EE iioii coti reed nere ES Eed 195 INPUEIO TYPE n oeie eiae atas e Deest vdd duos EUM dues ux a E eusut ade Mad ebat oaa eed Mare ut 195 ll EE 195 INPut IQ BALanced STATe State This comma
449. y with the range limits The calibration sweep nevertheless covers the entire span defined by the R amp S FSW however no input is received from the generator outside the generator s defined limits TTL synchronization Some Rohde amp Schwarz signal generators support TTL synchronization when connected via GPIB The TTL interface is included in the AUX CONTROL connector of the R amp S FSW B10 option When pure GPIB connections are used between the R amp S FSW and the signal generator the R amp S FSW sets the generator frequency for each frequency point individually via GPIB and only when the setting procedure is finished the R amp S FSW can measure the next sweep point For generators with a TTL interface the R amp S FSW sends a list of the frequencies to be set to the generator before the beginning of the first sweep Then the R amp S FSW starts the sweep and the next frequency point is selected by both the R amp S FSW and the gen erator using the TTL handshake line TRIGGER The R amp S FSW can only measure a value when the generator signals the end of the setting procedure via the BLANK signal User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 44 R amp S9FSW K7 Measurement Basics 4 7 4 8 Receiving Data Input and Providing Data Output Using the TTL interface allows for considerably higher measurement rates than pure GPIB control because the frequency stepping of the R amp S FSW is directly coupled with the frequency stepping of the gene
450. you can also add the unit If the unit is missing the command uses the basic unit Example with unit SENSe FREQuency CENTer 1GHZ without unit SENSe FREQuency CENTer 159 would also set a frequency of 1 GHz ERREUR RA TN User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 169 R amp S9FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements 11 1 6 2 Introduction Values exceeding the resolution of the instrument are rounded up or down If the number you have entered is not supported e g in case of discrete steps the command returns an error Instead of a number you can also set numeric values with a text parameter in special cases e MIN MAX Defines the minimum or maximum numeric value that is supported e DEF Defines the default value e UP DOWN Increases or decreases the numeric value by one step The step size depends on the setting In some cases you can customize the step size with a corresponding command Querying numeric values When you query numeric values the system returns a number In case of physical quan tities it applies the basic unit e g Hz in case of frequencies The number of digits after the decimal point depends on the type of numeric value Example Setting SENSe FREQuency CENTer 1GHZ Query SENSe FREQuency CENTer would return 1 amp 9 In some cases numeric values may be returned as text e INF NINF Infinity or negative infinity Repre
451. z is inserted If entries already exist a new entry is inserted above the selected entry The position of the new entry is selected such that it divides the span to the previous entry in half Delete Value Deletes the currently selected position value entry Shift x Shifts all positions in the table by a specific value The value can be entered in the edit dialog box The conversion loss function in the preview pane is shifted along the x axis Shift y Shifts all conversion loss values by a specific value The value can be entered in the edit dialog box The conversion loss function in the preview pane is shifted along the y axis Save The conversion loss table is stored under the specified name in the C r_s instr user cv1 directory of the instrument Digital UO Input Settings The following settings and functions are available to provide input via the Digital Base band Interface R amp S FSW B17 in the applications that support it E M User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 67 R amp S FSW K7 Configuration Input and Frontend Settings They can be configured via the INPUT OUTPUT key in the Input dialog box input Input Source Power Sensor Radio Frequency otf put Setting Digital 1Q Input Sample Rate 10 0 MHz Adjust Reference Level pe to Full Scale Level Yes Name IQR 100 Serial Number 101165 Port Name Digital IQ OUT Sample Rate 10 MHz Full Scale Level 10 dBm For more information see the R
452. zo 2 T 97 L TT EE 97 THO GSO E 98 TAGS EE 98 a cil E H 98 Ree t 98 ele 99 Tigger AOI EE 99 User Manual 1173 9240 02 13 94 R amp S FSW K7 Configuration SS a a SS Pn Trigger Configuration Trigger Source In the Analog Demodulation application the next measurement can be triggered if the selected input signal exceeds the threshold specified using the Trigger Level setting see Trigger Level on page 98 Thus a periodic signal modulated onto the carrier frequency can be displayed It is recommended that the measurement time covers at least five periods of the audio signal Remote command TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 243 Free Run Trigger Source No trigger source is considered Data acquisition is started manually or automatically and continues until stopped explicitely Remote command TRIG SOUR IMM see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 243 External Trigger 1 2 3 Trigger Source Data acquisition starts when the TTL signal fed into the specified input connector on the front or rear panel meets or exceeds the specified trigger level See Trigger Level on page 98 Note The External Trigger 1 softkey automatically selects the trigger signal from the TRIGGER INPUT connector on the front panel For details see the Instrument Tour chapter in the R amp S FSW Getting Started manual External Trigg

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Notebook Belinea o.book 3.1 User's Manual  PCL-422 Installation Instructions Instructions d`installation  Acronis Backup & Recovery 11  collegamenti elettrici  instructions d`emploi de combustibles liquides a  CKBD01 - CCTV Center  Manuel d`installation et d`utilisation  Mode d`emploi: : Free Download, Borrow, and Streaming : Internet Archive  ASUS CPX20 User's Manual  PCI Express 2.0 Mid-Bus Probe for Summit T24  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file